JP6552121B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

  Based on the fact that a game ball as a game medium is driven into a game area formed on the front surface of the game board, and the game ball that has been inserted wins a starting opening provided in the game area, a display made of, for example, a liquid crystal display device There is known a gaming machine which is controlled to a big hit gaming state when a variable hit such as a symbol is executed on a device and a big hit symbol is displayed.

  In this type of game machine, it has been proposed to execute movable body effects that indicate that the big hit symbol may be displayed by operating the movable body disposed in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device ( For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2001-137461 A

  According to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, although the movable member is caused to perform an interesting motion, it is not sufficient to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention is a gaming machine that performs a lottery based on establishment of a start condition, and a display device capable of executing an effect based on the result of the lottery, and a movable body capable of executing an effect based on the result of the lottery The movable body includes a first movable portion operable by a first drive source and a second movable portion operable by a second drive source, and the movable body is a game from an initial position. A first person moves a part of the movable body to a first position where the movable body cannot be visually recognized, and operates from the first position to a second position where at least a part of the part which cannot be visually recognized is visible at the first position. An operation, and a second operation in which the player moves a part of the movable body to an invisible first position from an initial position, and returns to the initial position without operating from the first position to the second position; is capable of executing, the movable body, you in the first operation and the second operation Is movable to the first position in a state where the first movable portion and the second movable portion overlap, and the operation up to the second position in the first operation is the first movable portion On the other hand, the second movable portion is operated in a manner that the overlapping amount of the second movable portion decreases, and the effect to be performed on the display device when the movable body is at the second position is, unlike the effect that the movable body is performed in the display device when in the first position, the second movable portion, the movable body is moved to said first position from said initial position It is possible to move to the second position so as to overlap the region that has passed through .
Further, the present application also includes each means described below separately from the above-mentioned means for solving the problem.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the present invention is a gaming machine which performs lottery based on establishment of starting conditions, and a display device capable of executing an effect based on a result of the lottery, and an effect based on the result of the lottery A movable body capable of performing the step of moving the movable body from the initial position to a first position where the player can not visually recognize a part of the movable body, and from the first position to the visual position in the first position A first operation of moving to a second position where at least a part of the disabled portion becomes visible, and the player moves a part of the movable body to an invisible first position from the initial position, and the first position A second operation of returning to the initial position without moving from the second position to the second position, the effect to be performed by the display device when the movable body is at the second position is the movable An effect performed on the display device when the body is in the first position; Characterized in that it comprises.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved interest by more suitably executing effects using a movable body.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame which comprises a pachinko machine, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the removal | desorption structure of the upper shaft support bracket of a main body frame, and the upper support bracket of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle device in a door frame, and was looked after. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame, and was seen afterwards. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. It is a front perspective view of the ball | bowl feed unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball | bowl feed unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen after removing the back case of a ball | bowl feed unit. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left side view of a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was looked after. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the award ball unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the delivery path, the delivery motor, and the delivery rotary body in a winning ball apparatus. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board | substrate box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of a firing power supply substrate box, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and was seen from the back side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a sliding door for glass doors and a sliding door for body frames in a lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the gaming panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 etc. disassembled and viewed from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 103 from back. FIG. 140 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. It is a fragmentary sectional view showing the crime prevention structure in the axial support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of the game board which makes a 2nd attacker unit easy to see. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from back. It is a perspective view of an attacker unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back lower. (A) It is a front view of an attacker unit, (b) is a BB sectional view in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the projection area | region by the projector unit of an attacker unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front left movable presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front left movable presentation unit from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front left movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front left movable production | generation unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a front left movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view of a center character. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center part by each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center thing by each main structure, and was seen after. It is a front view which expands and shows the 2nd attacker unit in center goods. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a 2nd attacker unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front right movable presentation unit in center goods, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front right movable presentation unit in center goods, and was seen after. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the front right movable production | presentation unit in a center accessory. It is a front view of the back unit in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into main component members, and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit in the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a front view of the back middle movable production | presentation unit in a back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back middle movable production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back middle movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable production | presentation unit in the back in every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable presentation unit back to main parts, and was looked after. It is the perspective view which looked at the back inside drive mechanism in a back inside movable presentation unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back inside drive mechanism in the back inside movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the drive mechanism in the back in every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the drive mechanism in the back in every main member, and was looked after. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back middle movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the back rear movable movable effect unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable production | generation unit after back on from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back rear movable movable production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back up and back movable presentation unit into an arm slide unit and an arm unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up and back movable presentation unit into an arm slide unit and an arm unit, and was seen after. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the arm slide unit of the back up and back movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the arm slide unit of the back up and back movable presentation unit, and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at the arm unit of the back up and back movable presentation unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the arm unit of the back up and back movable presentation unit back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the arm unit of the back up and back movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the arm unit of the back up and back movable presentation unit, and was seen after. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper arm unit of the arm unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper arm unit of the arm unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the forearm unit of the arm unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the forearm unit of the arm unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion by the arm slide unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion by the arm unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back front front movable production | presentation unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back front front movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up front movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the rear front front movable effect unit as seen from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back front front movable production | presentation unit. It is an explanatory view showing the relation between the back up front movable production unit and the back up back movable production unit in the back unit. Fig. 174 is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a back-to-front and front-side movable effect unit and a back-to-back back-side movable effect unit, which is subsequent to Fig. 174; It is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom movable movable production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom movable movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back bottom back movable presentation unit into a back back back decoration unit, a raising / lowering unit, etc., and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back bottom back movable presentation unit into a back bottom back decoration unit, a raising / lowering unit, etc., and was seen after. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back bottom back decoration unit of a back bottom back movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower back decoration body unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back lower back decorative body unit. It is a perspective view which shows schematic structure of the raising / lowering unit in a back lower back movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back lower back movable production | presentation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable production | presentation unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom front movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back lower front movable production | presentation unit. It is a perspective view which shows the back left movable production | presentation unit 3700 in a back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back left movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back left movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of one movable unit in a back left movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back left movable production | presentation unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is the interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production | presentation prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a prior determination table used for the effect prior determination process, and (B) is a table about the type details of prefetching determined by the prior determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for jackpots, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, and (C) is a lottery processing for types of jackpots. It is a symbol determination table used for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 16 ms regular processing performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of a melody reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of a melody reach. It is a time chart which shows the modification of a melody reach. It is a figure which shows the normal state before a specific movable production is performed. It is a figure which shows the progress which moves an arm unit through the front of a liquid crystal display device to a waiting | standby position as a front step of specific movable presentation. It is a figure which shows the state which the arm unit moves to the standby position from the accommodation position, and is hold | maintained at the standby position. It is a figure which shows the aspect of specific movable presentation. It is a block diagram which shows the structural examples, such as a scheduler control part. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of driver software etc.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Furthermore, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame constituting a pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, a main frame, and a game board constituting a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the outer frame 2 installed on the island facility (not shown) of the game hall and the outer frame 2 are pivotably supported openably at the front side. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 A door frame 5 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a space below the game window 101 for storing game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5, are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The horizontal width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width dimension. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are arranged such that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  In front view, the pachinko machine 1 is such that the game area 1100 where the game ball is struck through the substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and it projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player holds the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can recognize the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is impossible to touch game balls, obstacle nails, various winning holes, and bonus items in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes the back of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Furthermore, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support bracket of the main body frame and the upper support bracket of the outer frame. FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 is connected by the connecting member 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, There is provided an engagement notch 15 which penetrates and is recessed to the left and right direction center side. A mounting step 10a recessed from the other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. A protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extruding direction) is provided to enhance strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 106). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connection member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 to be in the left-right direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other It has a plate-like engagement piece 19 which can be inserted into and engaged with the engagement cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 extending in the direction. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively formed in symmetrical shapes. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surfaces of the side frames 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is disposed to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support fitting 20 and fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower side frame 12 of the left side. Fixed on the front surface of the reinforcing bracket 22 and the reinforcing bracket 22 disposed so as to support the lower surface of the lower supporting bracket 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13. The decorative cover 23 is provided. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be able to open and close.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. Support rod hole 20c notched to be bent from the right end near the front end in the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame hanging down from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protrusion 20b A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook 20c of the upper support fitting 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The upper support fitting 20 has the strength of the support protrusion 20b enhanced by the depending wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted on and fixed to the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projection 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from near the front end of the support projection 21c. Support projections 21d. A main body frame support formed on a main body frame support bracket 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support fitting 21. After inserting the support projection 21 d of the support fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame support bracket 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support hook hole 20 c Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner.

  Further, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, two closing plates 24 and 25 arranged at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction are attached and fixed inside the side frame plate 13 on the right side. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The main body frame 3 can be opened relative to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. This guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by a rivet 28. On the other hand, it is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The operating portion 27b which protrudes, the elastic piece 27c which protrudes from the opposite side to the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the front end of the stopper portion 27a An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to be narrower than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it is separated from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a is inclined to the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion of the body frame 3 is not closed, and a space in which the pivot pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed at the head space portion of the support hook 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c so that the stopper portion 27a In the state where the front end side is opposed to the stop drooping portion 20f of the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f and the state is in contact) In the usual pivotally supported state, the support pin 633 positioned in the end space portion of the inclined hole of the support hole 20c formed by bending and the end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a The center is in a state of being offset in an oblique direction and facing each other. And, in this normal support state, the support pin 633 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in a state of being in contact with the front end portion of the support hook hole 20 c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. Since the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, when the operation portion 27b is turned to turn the lock member 27, the lock member 27 can be smoothly turned. It has become. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the tip end surface 27d is taken as the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support weir 20c and abuts on the circular arc tip surface 27d, the operative force F is supported A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the end surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped end surface 27d, and one side of an inclined hole of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact part with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment to turn the tip in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) in which the tip end separates from the support projecting piece 20b does not work, and the pivot pin 633 is the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole of the support hook 20c. Maintain the state of being pinched between the inner surface of one side. To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  In addition, even if the shape of the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the tip end side of the stopper portion 27a just contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the applicant of the present invention has a point that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a lower support bracket is mounted on a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame pivot support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63). It is necessary that 21 support protrusions 21d be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27. As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. Then, when the pivotal support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedging hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (C), the pivotal support pin 633 does not abut the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support weir 20c. The tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the pivoting pin 633 so that the pivoting pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Then, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projection 20b to turn the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support wedge hole 20c. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main frame 3 is lifted by lifting the main frame support hole formed in the main frame support bracket 644 and the support projection 21 d of the lower support bracket 21 to thereby release the main frame 3 into the outer frame 2. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. Although such work is carried out by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be made easy to strike, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily installed in the existing island facility. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) as an extrusion-shaped material, it becomes possible to form a thinner wall while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame, The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be attached to the main unit frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and fixed in a state in which the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of the frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall not shown, adjacent devices (for example, It can be attached closely with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. Furthermore, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as seen from the rear after being disassembled from the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view.

  As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly elongated circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the right side decoration unit 200 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer circumference, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the top outer circumference of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 And a pair of side speaker covers 290 which are disposed and attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100. .

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for performing a game ball driving operation, and a rear side of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. And ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the fal cover unit 540, and mounted so as to close the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 590 is provided.

1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 26 to 30. FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 26B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 30 shows a state of wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view expanding and showing.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. The frame base body 110, the upper bracket 120 for fixing the upper decorative unit attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and the lower left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 A pair of side speakers 130 disposed on both outer sides, a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110, and the front face of the door frame base main body 110 attached to the lower right corner in front view And a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500.

  Note that the door frame base unit 100 is outside the side speaker 130 on the right side in a front view, with the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring 136 (see FIG. 24) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 etc. And a cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 (see FIGS. 22 and 24 and the like). The cover member 134 can guide the wiring 136 along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and holds the wiring 136 so that the wiring 136 does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. Can be done.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower portion of the game window 101 with a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) Mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotational position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 below the launch cover 191 A handle device relay substrate 192 relaying connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100 and a rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192 are covered. Door frame arranged on the opposite side to the rear cover (in rear view) with respect to the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 etc. with the center in the left / right direction sandwiching the center of the rear cover A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base main body, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a door pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of the wiring cord 196 that connects the frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. 4, and an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In this example, the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, the decoration substrates 430, 432 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the wiring cord 196 that connects the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. The details are described later, but are held by the wire holding member 197 and extended backward, and the main side relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal board are described later. It is connected to 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a cutout portion of a rectangular shape 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and widths of left and right side sides are the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivoting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  The door frame base main body 110 is disposed on the left and right outside of the lower side of the game window 101 in addition to the game window 101, and the speaker attachment portion 111 for attaching and fixing the side speakers 130 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached and fixed. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 28) and the game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for feeding, and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 by slanting obliquely so that the right (open side) end of the front disposed at the lower right corner in front view and bulging forward is retracted. A wire passage port 115 which penetrates in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment portion 114 and through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass; Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a relay board attachment portion 117 for attaching the handle device relay board 192 to the lower side in the ball feed unit attachment recess 112; From the disposition closer to the center than the speaker attachment portion 111 on the board attachment portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (axial support side) for attaching the door frame base substrate 194 and the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 projecting backward and the door frame base main body 110 is recessed toward the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the game window 101 to the rear side. The glass unit support step 110a with which the outer periphery of the front surface can abut and the glass unit locking member 190 can be rotated by protruding backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Further comprises a, and four of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a door frame protrusion 110c that protrudes backward from the lower side by a predetermined amount. This door frame protrusion 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked to the main body frame 3, and an incorrect tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d which protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has an attachment portion 110g (see FIG. 24) for attaching the speaker bracket 132 for attaching the side speaker 130, and an attachment hole 110h (FIGS. 18, 24, and 24) for attaching the side speaker cover 290. 25 etc.) are respectively formed at appropriate positions.

  In the side speaker cover 290, as shown in FIG. 25, the left and right glass units 590 are arranged to penetrate through the glass unit support stepped portion 110a into which the glass unit 590 is fitted from the rear side. In a state where the glass unit 590 is removed from the 110 (door frame 5), the glass unit 590 can be detached with a predetermined screw through the mounting hole 110h. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the mounting hole 110 h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 is configured such that the rear side is covered by fixing the crime prevention cover 180 to the door frame base main body 110. Therefore, in order to remove the side speaker cover 290, first, the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 must be removed from the door frame base body 110. Thus, taking some time to remove the side speaker cover 290 can make the person who intends to conduct a fraud etc. take time and effort for the removal work, and removes the relatively large glass unit 590. As a result, the removal work can be made conspicuous, and the deterrence (security) against fraud etc. can be enhanced by making the theft behavior against the side speaker 130, fraud inside the gaming area 1100, etc. It has become.

  In addition, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the upper center of the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right attached to the door frame base unit 100 are left and right. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is concealed, and both left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. Also, the upper bracket 120 is configured such that a part of its tip is inserted into the upper decoration unit 280, and can support the upper decoration unit 280 from the upper side when the door frame 5 is assembled. It is like that.

  Further, although the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) forward from the center of the game area 1100 in front view .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open as shown in FIGS. It has a step 195a recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, and the cross section is formed in an I-shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three each in the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends. The wire holding member 197 has the end portion on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 in the vertical direction at the step portion 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the stepped portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling in a holding hole 197a which is paired up and down with the wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3 It will be pushed forward by the part and will turn in the direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in the direction of moving away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (the direction of the main body frame 3). Thereby, the wiring cord 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being blocked by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring frame holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the door frame base substrate cover 195 is moved so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. The main frame 3 is pivotally supported on the rear surface and held so that a part of the wiring cord 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 does not move in the vertical direction. When opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions (such as disconnection of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent the vertical movement of the wiring cord 196, and to securely fold the wiring cord 196 in the lateral direction to prevent the occurrence of a failure.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wire holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the door frame 5 can not be closed, or the main control board 4100 as the main body side electric device, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, etc. Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, a ball rental unit 360, and a handle as electric devices Location 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even when the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connection connector is disconnected. it can. In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, so that the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-213675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage or disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The holding band 197 can prevent the holding band 197 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and surely prevent the wiring 196 from falling off together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197 can do.

  Further, even if the position where the wire 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position separated from the side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wire 196 can be Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from drooping when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high security against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with protrusions protruding at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 is located, the wiring is formed by the pair of protrusions and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wire holding member 197 can be enhanced, and the wire holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good condition.

  In addition, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the base of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening / closing operation can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196, etc. can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the front end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the front end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, A step portion 195 a capable of storing the wire holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the step provided with the wire holding member 197 on the door frame base substrate cover 195 Since it is stored in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed. The wirings 196 can be gathered in a compact manner, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to reliably achieve the above effects. Moreover, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 1 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 etc., the handlebar bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. A plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding in the right-angled direction outward with respect to the annular flange portion 142 and the cylindrical portion 141 protruding in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141 A plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 are provided, which connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 to each other in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed in the position corresponding to the three groove parts 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as to be incapable of relative rotation with respect to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) toward the front in a front view. The axis of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in the state is similarly inclined.

  Subsequently, as shown mainly in FIGS. 27 and 28, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 mounted along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110; A pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 mounted along the back surface of the support side portion 110 of the support side, an open side reinforcement sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side end portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110 The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101, and they are mutually tightened with a screw or a rivet to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper surface and the lower end portion of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower support portion 158 having an axial pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 that is bent forward (see FIG. 27), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 that is bent forward to the right side (open side) portion of the upper long side edge when viewed from the front. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long edge and is extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion piece 159, the upper bent protrusion piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to regulate moving backward. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 is provided with an open side outward bending projection 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154; As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side (see FIG. 106). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two upper and lower points of the upper and lower shaft supporting portions 156 and 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is enlarged. Although there is a possibility that it becomes easy to carry out an action, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. In addition, the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted in the U shape of the axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the axially supported reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 106) can prevent the insertion of the tool, and can prevent only the pivotally supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from being bent, and can enhance the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1.

  Next, the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 27 and FIG. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. In addition, the rear side crime prevention end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is configured to extend rearward longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 that protrudes along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and the left and right sides outside the projection piece 184 before the crime prevention And a U-shaped attachment elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end of the connector.

  The crime prevention cover 180 mounts the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in a front view to the crime prevention cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) By being attached to the crime prevention cover attaching portion 364 of the unit 300, the door frame 5 can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. When the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the front crime prevention piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and the half on the open side is front. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the crime prevention cover 180 can cover the front lower portion of the guiding passage of the hitting ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hitting ball that flies or reversely feeds the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

  Accordingly, in this example, the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the gaming window 101, the glass unit 590 and the like from the front side of the door frame 5 Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) and a fraudulent act is attempted, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with the fitting portions 190 a rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portions 110 b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a screw for securing the locking member to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 passes through the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is pivotally supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, although the detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating. Of the four glass unit locking members 190, no protrusion is formed on the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in the rear view, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially in the same plane. It is possible to cover the front surface of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. FIG. 31A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed after being disassembled.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side decoration frame 202 that forms a skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, a side upper decoration member 204 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and a side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. A side upper cover 208; a side lens 210 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 202 from the rear side; and a side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210 It is equipped with.

  In addition, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface A substrate 214, and a lower-side lower decorative substrate 216 which is disposed on the lower side from the approximate center of the side inner lens 212 in the vertical direction from the lower side and has a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; A right side upper decorative substrate cover 218 attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the rear side of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214, and a right side covering the rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 Attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 216. The right side under the decorative board cover 220 that is provided with a.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 disposed at the upper left portion in the front view of the side decoration frame 202, and an upper portion that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to the upper rear portion of the side decoration frame 202. A speaker bracket 224, an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decoration frame 202, and a side sub lens 228 attached from the inside at a predetermined position on the side surface of the side upper cover 208; There is. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the upper decoration board 214 on the right side is arranged so that the LED 214c is decorated for light emission.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side decoration frame 202, a side upper decoration member 204, a right side upper decoration board cover 218, and a right side lower decoration board cover 220 are formed of a light-impermeable member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204. Further, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decorative unit 200 are translucent members. The side upper cover 208 is substantially milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is said that.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. It is designed to be able to diffuse and refract light. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 It can not be clearly seen from the The front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently decorated with light by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

  The side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example is generally formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101 as shown, specifically, along the outer periphery of the game window 101 The arc-shaped inner frame 202a and the upper part are arranged at positions separated outward with respect to the inner frame 202a, and are straight along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part The outer frame 202b is formed in an arc shape so as to be curved toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 202a, the upper end frame 202c connecting the upper edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, the outer frame 202b and the inner frame An inner frame 2 is disposed at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of a lower end frame 202d that connects lower end edges of 202a and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. And a, and the partition frame 202f having a slit 202e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 202b.

  The inner frame 202a of the side decoration frame 202 extends in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 202b is formed in a straight line at the substantially same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, while the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is the upper and lower sides. Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. In addition, a curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the portion of the outer frame 202b that extends vertically in a straight line is formed in a curved arc shape also curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. Further, the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 202f is disposed on radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 has a configuration in which the space between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition walls 202f. Is a light emitting decoration opening 202g, and a peripheral lens portion 210a of a side lens 210, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. In addition, the radiating lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition wall frame 202f from the rear side. Furthermore, the slit 202e and the light emitting decorative opening 202g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 202f, so that the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  The side upper decoration member 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 extends laterally at a constant height substantially along the arc-like upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decoration frame 202, as shown in the figure, and A plurality of openings 204 a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 is provided with a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the arrayed openings 204a.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 is shaped to fit in the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 through the opening 204a to near its front end A plurality of light guides 206a capable of protruding is provided. The light guide portion 206a has a polyhedron at its tip, and by inserting and fitting it into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204, it may appear as if a jewel is fitted into the opening 204a. It can be done. In addition, the light from the right side upper decoration substrate 214 disposed on the rear side by the light guiding portion 206 a of the side upper decoration lens 204 may be emitted forward (to the player side) from the opening 204 a of the side upper decoration member 204. As well as being able to, the tip of the light guide 206a can be made to shine as a jewel.

  The side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 has an upper surface and a right side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). Is shaped substantially along the side upper decoration member 204. The side upper cover 208 is provided with a mounting step 208a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 204 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, or the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 or the like is formed on the end surface. Also, two cutouts 208b arranged on the upper and lower sides are formed on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, so that the side sub-lens 228 attached to the inside through the cutouts 208b is desired to the front side. It has become. By inserting the side sub lens 228 into the notch 208b of the side upper cover 208, only this portion can emit light in a different manner.

  The side lenses 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 are shaped substantially along the side decoration frame 202, and the rear face is recessed, and are inserted later into the light emitting decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202. A peripheral lens portion 210 a and a radiating lens portion 210 b inserted into the slit 202 e of the side decorative frame 202 later are provided. As illustrated, the side lens 210 does not include the peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emission decorative opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. It is set as the accommodation step part 210c made. The accommodation step 210c accommodates an upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, and the like which will be described later. In addition, the side lens 210 includes an attachment portion 210d which forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 210c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 208a of the side upper cover 208.

  The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape which bulges forward so that the front surfaces of the circumferential lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b substantially follow the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces directed in different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is uneven. By this, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is irregularly refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron can provide a distinctive appearance in which the peripheral lens portion 210a is sparkling.

  The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210, and corresponds to a portion of the side lens 210 where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are formed, as illustrated. It corresponds to the main body part 212a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens part 210b (slit 202e of the side decoration frame 202) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body part 212a and projects forward from the main body part 212a. And a plate-like light guide part 212b arranged at the above position. The main body 212 a of the side inner lens 212 is formed in a state where the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Also, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the same manner as the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210, one surface of the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212 is polyhedral by a plurality of surfaces directed in different directions. The light transmitted through the main body part 212a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body part 212a.

  By combining the side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be birefringently refracted. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape along with the irregular refraction allows the side lens 210 (circumferential lens portion 210a) to have a brilliant appearance and make the sense of perspective unclear.

  A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right side decoration unit 200, and the light emission decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 (peripheral of side lens 210 The LEDs 214a and 216a disposed at positions corresponding to the lens portions 210a) have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slits 202e of the side decoration frame 202 (the side lenses 210) are used. The LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b) have relatively narrow illumination angles (for example, 15 ° to 60 °). The LED 214 c on the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 for emitting and decorating the side sub lens 228 is a red LED in this example.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200, like the side speaker 130, outputs middle-to-high range sound and can be attached at a predetermined position by the upper speaker bracket 224 in a predetermined direction. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224 a that protrudes diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the upper back side of the horn portion 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, and the upper right speaker 222 can not be seen from the player by the horn portion 224a in a front view. It has become.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is made to emit toward the player from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 by the horn section 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, and noise is generated for other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing in different directions, as with the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210 and the main portion 212 a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted due to the uneven thickness.

  Further, the upper speaker cover 226 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decoration opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c in the side decoration frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226, so that the sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed after being disassembled.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 includes a side decoration frame 242 that forms a skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, a side upper decoration member 244 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and a side upper decoration member 244. Side upper decorative member 244 is attached on the front side so as to cover the upper side of the side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side, the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244, and sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246 A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 242 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250 It is equipped with.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and the decoration on the left side is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) on the surface A substrate 254, and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the lower side from the approximate center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction from the lower side and having a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper side decorative substrate 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Attached to the side lens 250 and the side decoration frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decoration board 256. That the left side under the decorative board cover 260, and a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 disposed in the upper right part in the front view of the side decoration frame 242, and an upper part that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted to the upper rear side of the side decoration frame 242. The speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decoration frame 242 are provided.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, a side decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration member 244, a left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and a left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244. Further, the side upper decorative lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decorative unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The substantially entire side upper cover 248 is milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedron shape. It is designed to be able to diffuse and refract light. Therefore, the upper left side decoration substrate 254 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left side lower decoration substrate 256 It can not be clearly seen from the In addition, the front surface of the upper left side decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is white, and the left side decoration unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. While the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit, the decorative substrates 254, 256 are not noticeable. The upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The light emitting decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  The side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 242a and an upper portion that is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 242a toward the outside and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion. The outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so as to bend toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 242a, the upper end frame 242c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, the outer frame 242b and the inner frame A lower end frame 242d for connecting the lower end edges of 242a, and the inner frame 2 arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. And a, and the partition frame 242f having a slit 242e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 242b.

  An inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, in the outer frame 242b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed in a straight line substantially at the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a. Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. In addition, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. The partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242 is curved in the front-rear direction so that the portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 242 f is disposed on radiation radially extended from near the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b by a plurality of partition walls 242f. The light emission decorative opening 242g is formed as the light emission decorative opening 242g, and a circumferential lens portion 250a of a side lens 250 described later is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the slit 242e and the light emitting decoration opening 242g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 242f, and the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 244 of the left side decoration unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decoration frame 242 and is also provided on the rear surface. Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 has a Jomon-like relief on the upper side along the openings 244a arranged in a row.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 through the opening 244a to near its front end A plurality of light guides 246a that can protrude can be provided. The light guide 246a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and by inserting and fitting into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it can appear as if gems are also fitted in the opening 244a. It can be done. In addition, light from the left side upper decoration substrate 254 disposed on the rear side by the light guiding portion 246a of the side upper decoration lens 244 may be emitted forward (to the player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decoration member 244. In addition, the tip of the light guide 246a can be shined as a jewel.

  The upper surface and left side surface (in front view) of the side upper cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 is shaped substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and the lower surface (lower end) The shape is substantially in line with the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 is formed at the lower part of the front surface so as to be able to accommodate the side upper decorative member 244, and has an open lower portion and a backward recessed installation step 248a. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed on the end surface. Further, the side upper cover 248 is provided with a covering portion 248 b covering the upper pivot support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 on the outer side surface (left side surface in front view).

  The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 is shaped substantially along the side decoration frame 242 and has a concave rear surface, and is inserted later into the light emitting decoration opening 242 g of the side decoration frame 242 A circumferential lens portion 250 a and a radiation lens portion 250 b to be inserted later into the slit 242 e of the side decoration frame 242 are provided. As illustrated, the side lens 250 does not include the circumferential lens portion 250 a corresponding to the light emitting decorative opening 242 g in contact with the upper end frame 242 c of the side decorative frame 242, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. It is made the accommodation step part 250c made. An upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodation step 250c. Further, the side lens 250 includes an attachment portion 250 d which forms the upper surface of the accommodation step 250 c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step 248 a of the side upper cover 248.

  The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 242f of the side decorative frame 242. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is not uniform. Thus, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is irregularly refracted. In addition, due to the polyhedral inner surface, the peripheral lens portion 250a can be made to have a distinctive characteristic appearance.

  The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are formed in the side lens 250 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body 252a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body 252a and projects forward from the main body 252a. And a plate-shaped light guide 252b disposed at the position. The main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed such that the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The light transmitted through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body 252a.

  By combining this side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light passing through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be irregularly refracted in a double manner, and the shape etc. of the object disposed on the opposite side It is almost unrecognizable. Also, due to the irregular refraction and the irregular reflection due to the polyhedron shape, it is possible to make the appearance of the side lens 250 (peripheral lens portion 250a) glitter and to make the perspective feeling unclear and mysterious.

  A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface of the left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 of the left side decoration unit 240, and the light emission decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 (peripheral of the side lens 250 The LEDs 254a and 256a disposed at positions corresponding to the lens portion 250a) have relatively wide irradiation angles (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slits 242e of the side decoration frame 242 (the side lenses 250) are used. The LEDs 254b and 256b disposed at the positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 250b) have relatively narrow illumination angles (for example, 15 ° to 60 °).

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper speaker back side of the upper end of the horn portion 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264, so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 264a in front view. It has become.

  The upper left speaker 262 in this example is designed to be emitted from the top of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn section 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and noise is generated for other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing in different directions, as with the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness.

  The upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decoration opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. In addition, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the through holes 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266 from the player side by random refraction of light. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250.

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles triangular shape as viewed from the front, and penetrates the central opening 281a that penetrates largely to the center and both the left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decorative member 281 that has a pair of side openings 281b and into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a, and a rear side in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 A central lens 282 fitted from the rear side, an inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, a pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281, and an outer shape in front view The central lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 have a shape similar to that of the front decorative member 281. A main body member 285 attached to the rear side of the front decoration member 281 so as to be sandwiched between the decoration members 281; And a board cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 so that the outer shape of the front view is substantially the same as that of the main body and covers the upper decorative board 286 from the rear side.

  The upper decorative unit 280 extends backward while bending from the lower end of the front decorative member 281 so that the upper front end is supported by the front decorative member 281 and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower openings 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, and a lower lens 289 fitted into the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 from the upper side and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287, It is equipped with. In the present example, a plated layer having metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front surface decorative member 281 and the lower surface decorative member 288. The LED 286 a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is disposed at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286 b is disposed at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be individually decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 286a is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED.

  The inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 in the upper decorative unit 280 of this example is an arc whose center upper end is a side extending in the left and right direction in a front view And has three protrusions extending from the approximate center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the apex of the lower side into the central opening 281a. Further, the front decorative member 281 is formed with a plurality of streaks extending diagonally upward and outward on the outer side of the upper side of the central opening 281 a, whereby the front decorative member 281 is formed from the central opening 281 a The wing is formed in an extended shape, and a side opening 281b is formed along the cross-cut.

  The central lens 282 fitted in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the central opening 281a, and has a shape that bulges forward and the front surface thereof. Are formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions. The central lens 282 of this example is formed of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel cut like a brilliant cut and the front decorative member 281 looks like a pedestal of the jewelry. .

  The inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and a fine lens (or prism) is formed on the surface. A plurality of light sources are formed so that light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be widely diffused to the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decoration member 281 when fitted into the side opening 281b. It is done. Note that a plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284, as with the inner lens 282, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. It is possible to emit light.

  Note that the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of being clouded by a plurality of minute lenses formed on the surface, and the rear side is not clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It has become.

  The main body member 285 of the upper decorative unit 280 has an outer shape substantially conforming to the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and the front end opening is inclined downward and closed. Center portion 285a inclined obliquely upward, and a closed rear end disposed on both sides of the central portion 285a is positioned substantially at the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286 through the rear end faces of the central portion 285a and the side portions 285b. ing. When the upper decorative board 286 is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central part 285a and the side part 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side, so that light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the side.

  Further, the lower surface decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side shapes thereof are the upper speaker cover 226 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240, The shape is substantially the same as the shape of the end on the side closer to the upper end frame 202c or 242c of 266, and the end on the side closer to the upper end frame 202c or 242c of the upper speaker cover 226 or 266 is placed and fixed ing. The lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decoration member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. In addition, light from the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the left side upper decoration substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 through the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It emits light.

[1-2E. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the pan unit 300 Are placed between the

  The side speaker cover 290 supports a disk-shaped cover body 291 having a plurality of holes curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A body member 292 formed to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 having an annular opening, and a lower tray of the pan unit 300 disposed on the lower side of the body member 292 And a lower member 293 formed to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328. In this example, since the cover body 291 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or struck from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be made. As long as it can be protected.

  The side speaker cover 290 has a metallic gloss plating layer formed on the surface of the main body member 292. Further, the lower member 293 is formed of a milky white light transmitting member similar to the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300 described later.

  The side speaker cover 290 in this example is attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 independently of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300, and the door frame base main body It is fixed to the door frame base main body 100 by a predetermined screw inserted from the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 through an attachment hole 110 h (see FIG. 18) formed at a predetermined position of 110.

  Thereby, after the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5 is removed, the side speaker cover 290 can be removed to the front side by removing the screw attaching the side speaker cover 290 from the rear side of the door frame 5 By removing the speaker bracket 132 from the front side of the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 can be removed. Therefore, even if it becomes necessary to replace the side speaker 130 for some reason, the front surface of the side speaker 130 can be removed without removing the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the plate unit 300, etc. It is possible to easily remove only the side speaker cover 290 that covers the side speaker 130 so that the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced.

  Thus, in this example, in order to replace the side speaker 130 attached between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the dish unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. First, since the main body member 292 disposed on the front side of the speaker in the side speaker cover 290 is detachably attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side, the door that closes the front surface of the main body frame 3 After opening the frame 5 to the front side and removing the body member 292 from the rear side of the door frame 5 to the door frame base body 110, the body member 292 and the cover body 291 are attached to the door frame base body 110 (door frame 5). When it is moved to the front side and removed from the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 faces from the front side of the door frame 5. Since this side speaker 130 is held by the speaker bracket 132 attached from the front side to the door frame base main body 110, the speaker for the door frame base main body 110 from the front side of the door frame 5 after removing the main body member 292 By removing the bracket 132 and releasing the holding of the side speaker 130, and further moving the side speaker 130 to the front side, the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 are moved to the door frame 5 (the door frame base main body 110. The side speaker 130 can be removed from the door frame 5 without being removed from the door frame 5, and the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily replaced.

  Further, even if the player or the like knocks the door frame 5 (side speaker cover 290) during the game and the side speaker 130 is broken, as described above, the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily made. Since it can be exchanged, the interruption time of the game due to the replacement of the side speaker 130 can be shortened as much as possible, and the interruption is prolonged and the player becomes frustrated or lose interest, thereby reducing interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the side speaker 130 is sandwiched between the speaker bracket 132 and the door frame base main body 110, and the side speaker 130 can be attached to the door frame 5 ( Since it can be attached to the door frame base body 110), the side speaker 130 does not need to be provided with a mounting piece, a mounting hole or the like, the cost for the side speaker 130 can be reduced, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 increases Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the cover body 291 covering the front surface of the side speaker 130 is formed of a metal plate (punching metal) having a plurality of through holes, the cover body 291 is Deformation and breakage can be reduced as much as possible, the side speakers 130 can be sufficiently protected to prevent the occurrence of defects, and the durability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. .

  In addition, since the side speaker cover 290 covering the side speaker 130 is provided between the left and right side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker 130 should be relatively close to the player. As a result, as described above, the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced, and the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. In addition, since the side speaker 130 is disposed as close to the player as possible, the sound output from the side speaker 130 can be more efficiently heard by the player, providing a powerful sound. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the sound effect and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, since the side speaker 130 is disposed between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the continuity of decoration by the side decoration units 200 and 240 can be maintained, and the side decoration unit can be maintained. 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 can be connected without a sense of incongruity, and the pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the appearance from being deteriorated by the side speaker cover 290 and attract the player's attention strongly can be obtained. Further, since the surface shape of the main body member 292 in the side speaker cover 290 is formed so as to be continuous with the surface shapes of the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker cover 290 is formed on the side decoration units 200 and 240. It is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable even if the side speaker 130 is provided on the front side separately from the side decoration units 200, 240, etc. The designability of the front of the door frame 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be made favorable.

  Furthermore, when removing the main body member 292 of the side speaker cover 290 from the door frame 5, it is necessary to first remove the crime prevention cover 180 attached to the rear side of the door frame 5 and the glass unit 590. Can take some time for removal of the unit, and can take time and effort for the removal operation to those who intend to perform an illegal act etc. and make the removal operation stand out by removing the relatively large glass unit 590 It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 high in deterrence (security) against fraudulent acts etc. by making theft acts and fraudulent acts insult.

[1-2F. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 41 to FIG. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 for storing gaming balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper tray 301 The ball can be supplied to a ball hitting device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-like dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100; A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 which is fixed at substantially the center of the front surface and opened upward and rearward and has a large front side left side (axial support side) bulging forward, and the front end of the upper plate body 312 covers the upper outer periphery. An upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward when viewed visually, and a plurality of openings 316 a attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrating vertically. A plate front decoration member 316, and a plurality of light guide portions 318a which are disposed between the plate upper decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and are fitted into the openings 316a of the plate upper decoration member 316 are provided. did The right pair of upper dish upper lens 318 and upper dish upper lens 318 are arranged on opposite sides of the upper dish upper panel 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 and have a plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322a on the upper surface. Is disposed between the upper dish right decorative substrate 320 and upper dish left decorative substrate 322, and the upper dish upper lens 318 and the upper dish upper panel 314, from the upper dish right decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 And an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing the light to the upper dish upper lens 318 side.

  In the dish unit 300, the lower part of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front of the dish unit base 310 and the upper and the rear are open and the center in the left and right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end is the center in the left and right direction The lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the head and the upper end of the lower dish body 324 are fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish body 324 and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward similarly to the lower dish body 324 in front view A lower dish having a plate-like lower dish top plate 326 curved to become higher toward the center, and an opening 328a along the front ends of the lower dish top plate 326 and the lower dish main body 324 and covering the outer periphery of the opening 328a A cover 330, a plate side middle cover 330 having openings 330a disposed on the left and right sides of the lower plate cover 328 and penetrating in the front and rear direction, and an opening 330a of the plate side middle cover 330 And a disk side outer cover 334 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the disk side middle cover 330 and extending in the left and right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. ing. A lock hole 330b is formed at the right end of the plate side middle cover 330 disposed on the right side in a front view, in which a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later faces. Further, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the plate side outer cover 334 on the right side in a front view.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower tray 302, and installed on the upper left side in front view of the tray unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, see FIG. 171).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. The dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left and right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed at the upper end edge extending in the left and right direction. It is equipped. A rental ball unit attachment portion 310b is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a for attaching the rental ball unit 360 through in the front-rear direction. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner in a front view) of the ball unit attachment portion 310b, has a horizontally long rectangular shape and penetrates in the front and back direction an upper disc ball supply port 310c; An upper countersink outlet 310d which penetrates vertically in the front-back direction below the mouth 310c (approximately in the middle in the height direction of the tray unit base 310) and near the right end of the decorative portion 310a; And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e which are disposed directly below the ball outlet 310d and the upper ball inlet 310c and which project forward and whose upper surfaces have the same height. The upper flat ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the middle position in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower flat support portion 310e disposed immediately below.

  Further, the pan unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower pan support portions 310e, is fitted with the rear ends of the lower pan main body 324 and the lower pan top plate 326, and is formed into a horizontally long rectangular ring in a front view. A groove 310f, and a rectangular lower ball supply port 310g disposed at the lower right of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the bowl unit base 310 is provided with a lower bowl ball feeding rod 310h cylindrically extended rearward so as to be continuous with the lower bowl ball feeding port 310g and an open side of the lower ball bowl feeding rod 310h. A notch 310i formed on a side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 310 c of the bowl unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit through the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the notches 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is in communication with the first ball outlet 544 a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction in the front view and is recessed backward. The guiding recess 310j is inclined so that the right end in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined such that the front end is lower in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the height difference between the front end of the guiding recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper tray main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guiding recess 310j, and at the right end of the guiding recess 310j, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 and The difference in height is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper bowl ball supply port 310c is closed by the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301, the gaming ball paid out from the winning ball device 740 via the far cover unit 540 is Since it is not possible to go straight forward into the upper tray 301 from the upper flat ball supply port 310c, the paid-out gaming ball abuts on the gaming ball in which the front side of the upper flat ball supply port 310c is closed and rolls The direction is changed, and guided so as to roll in the guiding recess 310j to the right in front view, and released from the vicinity of the right end of the guiding recess 310j to the upper side of the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301; Become. Thus, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper plate 301 in the upper and lower two stages, so that the player does not move the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even when the game balls are paid out, the game balls can be continuously supplied (released) into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling bothersome for the storage of the game balls on the upper plate 301. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game by concentrating the player on the game by the operation of hitting the game ball and the game ball hit, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. Can be done.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is in communication with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344 c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower spherical ball supply port 310g is provided with an expanded portion 310k that is expanded in the left direction in a front view, and the lower conical ball supply port is formed by this expanded portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is spread in the left and right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early clogging of the lower ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower plate 301 remaining on the front side of the lower ball supply port 310g, thereby preventing more balls A ball can be fed into the lower plate 301.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located in the vicinity of the middle position in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  In the upper tray main body 312, a metal upper tray rail 312a that can contact the game ball is attached from the center in the left-right direction at the rear end of the bottom to the open side. Although not shown, the upper tray rail 312a is electrically grounded (earthed) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and outside the open side of the upper plate body 312 A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the mounting hole 314a penetrates in the vertical direction and on which the upper disc ball extracting button 340 described later is attached. The upper tray upper panel 314 is formed in the front end at a step shape which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper tray main body 312 and has a decorative attachment portion 314 b for attaching the upper tray front decorative member 316. An operation unit attachment portion 314 c is formed in a step shape which is further lowered than the decoration attachment portion 314 b at a position on the front side of the plate main body 312 and for attaching an operation unit 400 described later.

  Although not described in detail, the decoration mounting step 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 has upper and lower positions at positions corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decoration substrate 320 and the upper plate left decoration substrate 322 attached to the lower surface. An opening and a notch that penetrate in the direction are formed, and an opening that allows passage of a wiring cord that connects the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 is formed in the operation unit attachment portion 314c. .

  The upper front decorative member 316 is curved in the left and right direction along the front end of the upper tray upper panel 314, and a plurality of openings 316a from the lower side to the light guide portion 318a of the upper tray upper lens 318. Is fitted to the decorative attachment portion 314 b of the upper tray upper panel 314 so that the upper tray upper lens 318 can be held between the upper tray upper panel 314 and the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of minute lenses (prisms) on the surface is disposed under the upper dish upper lens 318, and the upper dish right decoration substrate 320 and the upper dish left decoration substrate 322 are disposed. It is possible to sufficiently diffuse the light from the above to make the entire upper dish upper lens 318 emit and decorate substantially uniformly. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted into the opening 316a is the same. It is shaped, and by fitting this light guide portion 318a, it appears to have an appearance that a pair-shaped gemstone is fitted into the opening 316a of the upper dish front decorative member 316. .

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction and has a substantially lower center on the upper surface, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end of the bottom plate 324a excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the side of the bottom plate 324a The upper end rising upward from the end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower counter top plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight part of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower surface cover 328 has an outer shape in a front view bulging downward, and each side is formed in an inverted triangle shape of a circular arc, and is provided with an opening 328 a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328 a matches the shape formed by the lower plate body 324 and the front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a translucent milk-white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged at predetermined intervals on the back side, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

  The dish side middle cover 330 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower dish cover 328 in a front view, and is predetermined along a lower side of the lower dish cover 328 from a substantially center in the left and right direction to a side surface of the door frame 5 in a front view. The upper rear end extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 includes an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, the right (open side) dish side middle cover 330 in the front view has a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near its outer end (right end). When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 330b.

  The plate side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330c extending rearward from the lower portion of the front end, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is supposed to be. In addition, a portion of the lower side of the lower plate body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330 c of the plate side middle cover 330.

  The dish-side outer cover 334 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 in a front view, and the front view has a substantially triangular shape along the side and bottom sides of the door frame 5 and opens rearward and upward. It is formed in a box shape. In this example, a handle insertion hole 334 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the right (open side) dish side outer cover 334 at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The bowl side outer cover 334 is attached to the front of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a part thereof is attached to the bowl unit base 310. In addition, the lower side except the central portion of the lower plate main body 324 is covered by the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side middle cover 330.

  The upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 in the disc unit 300 is operated with respect to the upper disc ball extracting button 341 which is mounted to be able to advance and retract in the vertical direction with respect to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper disc upper panel 314. The actuating piece 342 moves up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper disc ball release button 341 and is supported on the front side of the disc unit base 310, and the ball feed unit 580 slides vertically by the up and down movement of the actuating piece 342 The upper disc ball-out slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the disc unit base 310 and the upper disc ball-out slider 343 can be slid in the vertical direction An upper dish ball removal base 344 that is supported and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 310.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. Further, the upper ball ball removal slider 343 is urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper ball ball removal base 344 and the upper ball ball removal base 344.

  The upper disc ball removing base 344 of the upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper disc ball outlet 310d of the disc unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper disc ball outlet 310d and opens forward. 42 and a ball guiding channel 344b communicating with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper countersinking base 344 and guiding the gaming ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guiding it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b and then extends toward the right (axially supported) end in a rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper countersinking base 344 And a ball removing channel 344c in which the game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper bowl ball removal base 344, the opening 344 a communicates with the upper bowl ball outlet 310 d, and the lower end of the ball guiding channel 344 b communicating with the opening 344 a is the ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper tray 301 is communicated with the ball feed unit 580 by communicating with the entrance 581 a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 through the feed opening 113. Can be supplied to.

  Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344 b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581 b of the ball feeding unit 580 via the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. And the lower end extending to the pivotal support side is in communication with the notch 310i of the lower ball supply rod 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After that, the balls are discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g to the lower dish 302 via the lower dish ball supply rod 310h of the dish unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  Note that the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is biased upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower dish ball removal base 351 disposed between the bottom plate portions 330 of the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 in front view and left and right. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324, and rotating the opening / closing shutter 352 and lower dish A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 are provided.

  The lower disc ball dropping base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351 a vertically penetrated at a position facing the lower disc ball dropping hole 324 b of the lower disc body 324. The opening / closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b. And the lower ball ball extraction base 351 and a coil spring bias the closing portion 352a to a position where the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a are closed.

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353. The lower dish ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring. It is possible to

  Further, as shown in the figure, the lower dish ball removal button 354 is arranged at a position sandwiched between the left and right dish side middle covers 330 on the lower side in the horizontal direction of the lower dish cover 328 in the dish unit 300. The surface shape is such that the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the plate side middle cover 330 is smoothly continuous.

  In the lower disc ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 is substantially coincident with the lower ball removing hole 324b of the lower disc body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower disc remover base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower disc ball extracting mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower disc cover 328 or the like. The lower countersink hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a of the open / close shutter 352. In this state, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (the lower plate 302). When the lower disc ball release button 354 in the closed state is pushed backward, the lower disc ball release button 354 and the lower disc ball out slider 353 slide backward, and the slide of the lower disc ball out slider 353 toward the back The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates against the biasing force of the coil spring so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball opening hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower disc ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower disc ball release button 354 is kept in the open state retracted backward, and the shutter ball out hole 352 b is released The game ball stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward even if it is held in alignment with the removal hole 3324 b and the lower tray removal button 354 is not kept pressed.

  On the other hand, in the case where the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b is closed, when the lower ball ball extraction button 354 in the retracted state is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower ball ball slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released. The open / close shutter 352 is urged in such a direction that the closing portion 352a is closed by the coil spring so as to be able to slide, and the closing portion 352a is moved by the biasing force. It will turn in the direction which moves in the direction (forward) of ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the open / close shutter 352 pivots forward, the lower countersink slide 353 slides forward, and the lower countersink outlet 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower counterball relief button 354 is lowered. The game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302 by returning to the closed position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the plate cover 328 or the like.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower ball ball pulling out mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism will not be described.

  A rental ball unit 360 in the tray unit 300 includes a rental ball button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a rental balance display unit 363 between the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then pushes the ball lending button 361, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. Can be borrowed (dispensed) into the upper tray 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned amount is subtracted and the cash remainder and prepaid card inserted are returned. There is. Further, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. The ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  The dish unit 300 of the present example includes an upper dish 301 and a lower dish 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes. The pachinko machine 1 can be reminiscent, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new pachinko machine), it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play by reducing anxiety given to the player. It has become.

[1-2 G. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 45 to FIG. FIG. 45 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation unit is pressed in the operation unit.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation or move the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the gaming state, and not only a game ball driving operation for the player , To be able to participate in the production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive gear 412, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. A spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass are provided. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 attached on the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covering the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attaching portion 314c in the pan unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the top surface of the cover body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the top surface of the base member 420 A dial decoration substrate 430 having an opening 430a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the button operation cylinder 416b and the dial operation unit 401 can pass and a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the dial operation unit 401 on the upper surface Are fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 and A pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rotation, a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressure operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressure operation unit 405 It is equipped with.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer tube portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and is shorter than the inner tube portion 401a, and an outer tube It mainly includes a collar portion 401d annularly extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area when the two come into contact with each other is increased. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through-hole 406a. It is supposed to be.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b which extend downward from the lower part of the outer periphery and the lower end protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction. By locking with the locking convex portion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is set so that the button main body 406 does not come off the button support portion 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although not shown in detail, in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, there is provided a contact portion which prevents the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction, The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower part of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432. The press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower side than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. Further, the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the top surface of the cap inner 408 so that the character can be viewed from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connection locking claws 410b which project upward from a position where the upper end opposes and then protrudes inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected to each other so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details will be described later, but the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed between the two. In this example, the lengths in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the drive gear 412 is driven to rotate by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations of the drive gear 412 (rotary shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 can be It is possible to give a feeling.

  Furthermore, the operation portion holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a for rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, and a button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 projecting cylindrically upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. And a locking projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface in the vicinity of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for transmitting the light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation portion 405) And a rotation detection sensor 4 attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416d through which the 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e which the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration substrate 432 vertically penetrates the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and viewed from the upper side; And a pair of board holding claws 416f for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support tube 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. It further has a plurality of contact parts that can be brought into contact with the claws 406b. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. It is prepared for.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operating unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 around the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported rotatably and rotatably. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coil spring 418 is disposed between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416 b and the truncated conical lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 has a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b that vertically penetrates the operation holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downwardly so as to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. Have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the leg portions 420e are provided.

  Further, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the upper side outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430 protruding therefrom. Furthermore, although detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the positioning boss | hub for positioning each member, an attachment hole, etc. are formed in the suitable position of the upper surface and the lower surface of the base member 420. FIG.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side to the central opening 420a, and then the predetermined screw is inserted. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, whereby the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the top surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420 e of the base member 420 is configured such that a positioning hole 420 f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with a positioning projection 424 a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The lower cover 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the substrate mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and disposed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration substrate 430 mounted on the substrate mounting boss 420h is driven It is not in contact with the gear 410.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 contacts the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420 d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transmitted to the base member 420 side. It can be sufficiently transmitted to the base member 420 so that the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b that protrudes downward is provided at both ends in the major axis direction, and the engaging claw 422b is engaged with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  In addition, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one (front side of the pattern machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction of the pachinko machine 1), and has a claw-like locking piece 422c whose lower end protrudes outward. Have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper tray front decoration member 316 in the tray unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper tray front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 is configured such that the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial member 401, and the like are attached. By covering the upper side of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422 a can prevent the dial operating portion 401 from being pulled upward.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning projection 424a that can be fitted to the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with an engaging portion 424 b engageable with the engaging claw 422 b of the upper cover 422 at the upper part of each end in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engagement claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the dial operation unit 401 (excluding the flange 401d) can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the tray unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided. .

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the pan unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) slightly floating above the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. The cover body 426 is elastically deformed to reduce the impact when it is pressed or hit.

  In the operation unit 400, with the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the pan unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then the cover main body 426 is The surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths of the directions are the same. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is assumed. Thereby, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is detected. It is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotated from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Further, although the operation unit 400 of this example will be described in detail later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401. Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401, and the button cap Since 407 (press operation part 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e, the load applied to the press operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protrusion part 401f. The operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial drive motor 414 is adjusted in small increments while the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 so that the game and production can be enjoyed. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be operated by pressing are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player etc. hit the operation unit 401 or 405 strongly, and the operation unit 401 or 405 can be freely made to the player. While being able to operate it, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405 to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck, The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the hitting impact from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can be made to withstand strong hits, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405 and to entertain the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As shown, when the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact and a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is connected to the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, an impact is caused by the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300). Since the load can be received, the impacts from the operation units 401 and 405 can be dispersed to avoid the concentration of the impacts, and the impact resistance and load resistance by the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e protruding downward from positions where the operation parts 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even when the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by contacting the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 in the base member 420 are not provided. The portion that supports the base plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the shock from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view. When the operation portion holding member 416 holding the dial operation portion 401 is removed from the base member 420 and moved downward when the operation portion 401 is smashed from the upper side, the dial operation portion 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420 The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). Allows the player to be surprised and to pay attention to the effect by the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit It is possible to make the production using 401 (press operation unit 405) more diverse and less tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in games from being lowered.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 through the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, so that the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 can be Therefore, even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. Direct application to the dial drive motor 414 can be avoided, and damage to the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and radiated satisfactorily through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating. It can be made to withstand high loads Can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the pressure of the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. Rotation operation and pressing operation can be detected, so that it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal. It is possible to provide an experience with a bodily sensation, and to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. Further, the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 for emitting and decorating the operation units 401 and 405 can be provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated. Thus, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  In addition, since the step 407 a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the player presses the pressing operation unit 405. When the dial drive motor 414 causes the dial operation unit 401 to repeatedly rotate forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range and vibrates, the stepped portion 407a in contact with the projection 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is pressed. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation for the pressing operation 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 is enjoyed It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 which was thought not to move by hand, which is good It is possible to make it seem that there is something, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. While being able to make it easy, it is possible to make the player operate the operation unit 400 positively, enjoy the operation of the dial operation part 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing operation part 405, and the interest to the game decreases Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the press operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the press operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the press operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. This enables the load and impact applied to the pressure operation unit 405 to be dispersed to the side of the dial operation unit 401 even when the pressure operation unit 405 is strongly hit, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressure operation unit 405. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being broken, thereby avoiding interruption of the game due to the breakage of the pressing operation unit 405 (the operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can perform the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The role of each of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and is guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. Therefore, the player can easily read the character "PUSH" from the player's side without turning or tilting greatly. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 has a projecting portion 401 f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401 a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined position in the vertical direction. In the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as close as possible. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate or for the pressing operation unit 405 to be difficult because of the intrusion of foreign matter. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Furthermore, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, whichever direction in the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 Since it is possible to make contact even at a position, even if the pressure operation unit 405 is inclined and pressed (presses a position deviated to the outer periphery than the center of the pressure operation unit 405), it reliably contacts the dial operation unit 401 Thus, the rotary drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 contact in an annular shape, the load from the press operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the press operation unit 405 Impact resistance can be further increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and can achieve the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a smashing of the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily entertain using the operation unit 400.

[1-2 H. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame, as disassembled and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A fixed and cylindrical handle base 502 whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle main body rear 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle The rotary handle main body front 506 fixed to the front of the main body rear 504 and made integral with the rotary handle main body 504 and arranged on the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and fixed to the handle base 502 Rotating handle body front 506 and rotation in cooperation A front cover 508 for rotatably supporting the bundle body after 504, and a.

  Further, the handle device 500 is attached and fixed so as to project rearward from the front side to the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle main body, and has a shaft member 510 having a noncircular bearing portion 510a at its rear end, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510 A rotational position detection sensor 512 having a detection shaft portion 512a fitted to the 510a and made rotatable and non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and the rotational position detection sensor 512 sandwiched by the handle base 502 A sensor support member 514 fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 and having a through hole 514a through which the detection axis 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 can pass, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a touch sensor 516 is a firing stop switch 518 mounted at a different position on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514; The single rotation button 520 rotatably supported on the material 514 and operating the firing stop switch 518, and the rotary handle front 506 and the rotary handle rear 504 disposed at initial rotation positions And a handle return spring 522 that urges it to return to a counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front.

  As illustrated, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 according to this example has a cylindrical shape in which the front end side has a hemispherical shape that is expanded toward the front side and has a hemispherical shape and the rear end side has an open rear end. In the cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side, three axially extending groove portions 502a are formed. The three groove portions 502 a of the handle base 502 are one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and unevenly spaced with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502 a fits with the protrusion 143.

  The handle device 500 has an arc-shaped slit 506a disposed concentrically with the rotation shaft in the front of the rotating handle main body 506, and three mounting bosses 508a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 506a on the front surface 506 of the rotary handle. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front of the rotary handle main body 506 abuts on the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508, whereby the rotation range of the rotary handle main bodies 504, 506 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b protruding rearward is formed on the rotary handle main body front 506, and one end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 506b. And the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the sensor support member 514, and the rotary handle body 504 is held by the handle return spring 522. , 506 are urged to rotate counterclockwise in a front view.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so that its attachment surface faces the outer side (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above, so the handle attached via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also tilted outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling discomfort in the turning operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotational handle main bodies 504 and 506 (the handle device 500) are rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is detected via the shaft member 510. The shaft portion 512a is to be rotated. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Thus, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the like. It is like that. When the touch sensor 516 detects the player's contact, when the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 are rotated, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball Can be typed in. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven, It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original and reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotational driving of the firing solenoid 654. It is like that. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle apparatus 500, while launching of a game ball can be stopped temporarily, before operating the single button 520 by operating the single button 520 release operation. A game ball can be launched with a driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotational operation of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 is electrically detected by the rotational position detection sensor 512, and then the emission control is performed based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the unit 4120, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine, There is no need to provide a mechanical (eg, joint unit) mechanism so that the door frame 5 is closed when the door frame 5 is closed and the link frame is released when the door frame 5 is opened, thus simplifying the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and the player's interest is reduced due to a gaming ball driving defect. And it is capable to suppress.

[1-2 I. Foul cover unit]
Next, the fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 52 to FIG. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the fal cover unit in the door frame, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the fal cover unit in the door frame, as viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a front view showing the front cover of the fal cover unit in a removed state.

  A foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 to be described later, or a ball hitting device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the cover base 542 of the far cover unit 540 is disposed at the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction with the first ball inlet 542a, and the front end of the cover base 542 in communication with the first ball inlet. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right as viewed from the front, a second sphere inlet 542c that is arranged outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right in the rear view) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a, The second ball inlet 542c is in communication with the ball passage 542d, extends downward, and is lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view in the interior of the cover base 542. The first ball inlet 542 a and the second ball inlet 542 c are configured such that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed to the main frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. In the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542, as shown in the figure, the height of the portion extending in the left and right direction along the lower end is about three times the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball. An accommodation space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can communicate with the far ball inlet 542e disposed at the substantially central upper portion in the lateral direction and opened upward, and the far ball inlet 542e, and can guide the game ball to the upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. The opening and closing operation piece 542 g rotates the opening and closing crank 793 by contacting the spherical abutment portion 793 d of the opening and closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The far cover unit 540 of this example is the first ball outlet through the first ball passage 542 b for the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542 a. 544a can be supplied to the upper plate 101 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540, the game ball supplied to the second ball inlet 542c from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700, through the second ball passage 542d second ball outlet From 544b, it can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply bowl 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the fal cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface of the second ball passage 542 d on the upstream side (left side in a front view) of the accommodation space 546, and the cover base 542 is pivotable by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. The rocking member 548 pivotally supported at the same time, a full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting the rocking of the rocking member 548, and a spring for urging the rocking member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550 552. As shown in FIG. 54, the lower end of the pivoting member 548 is pivotally supported by the cover base 542 and the upper end is pivoted to the left in front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side opposite to the housing space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the back. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to circulation of gaming balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game ball stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game ball flows to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). From the full tank outlet 776 to the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage 542d, and the second bulb outlet 544 of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the tray unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can no longer come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and also provides the player with a dish unit. Notification is made to prompt the player to discharge the game balls in 300 to the outside.

  In addition, when the gaming ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to the substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 It becomes non-detection, and the payout of the game ball from the winning ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2 J. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 55 and FIG. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 56 is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the rear case removed and seen from the rear. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the gaming balls supplied from the upper tray 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the ball launching device 650 and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301. The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper bowl ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 A box-shaped front cover 581 having a through opening 581a and a ball outlet 581b opened to the lower side of the opening 581a, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. The rear cover 582 has a striking ball supply port 582a for supplying to the striking ball launch device 650 the gaming ball which penetrates in the longitudinal direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581, a rear cover 582 and a front cover A partition 58 for pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitioning the entrance 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b on the rear side of the front cover 581. The ball removal member 583 having a and the gaming balls on the partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 are sent one by one to the ball hitting supply port 582a of the back cover and extend in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 A ball feeding member 584 rotatably supported around the axis and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for turning the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and the ball feeding member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right. Has been placed.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 has an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, is extended forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper countersinking base 344 It is formed to close the.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 is a partition portion 583 a that partitions the space between the inlet 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b below the inlet 581 a and the upper surface is lowered in the direction of the ball feeding member 584. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 583b that is pivotally supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 583b, and a side surface of the pivot collar 583b below the actuation collar 583c. And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 55), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 It comes in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300 via the disc 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in plan view with a center on a rotation axis centering on the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 and extending in the vertical direction. It has a ball holding portion 584b which is recessed in a circular arc shape from the rear end to the rotary shaft side, and a rod-shaped collar portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the flange 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feed member 584, the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b is in communication with the hitting ball supply port 582a at the same time as the blocking portion 584a turns in the direction of the partition portion 583a is the supply position, and the ball holding portion 584b faces in the direction of the partition portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position, the game balls held by the ball holding portion 584b are supplied from the ball hitting supply port 582a to the ball striking and launching device 650, and the game entered into the partition 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the ball remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition 583a, and the ball holding portion 584b has the end portion on the flange portion 584c side closing the hitting supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and the side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 57) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center. In this example, a flapper solenoid in which a ball feeding solenoid 585 and a ball feeding operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586, which is oscillated by the driving of a ball feeding solenoid 585 which advances and retracts in the vertical direction, by a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587. The 584 can be turned. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Also, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted upward so that the ball feed member 584 pivots to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 is received. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

  In addition, the ball extraction member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 580 in this example is configured to apply a moment so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the weight portion 583 c. The forward movement of the actuating rod 583 c abuts against the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300, thereby restricting its rotation. In normal times, the dividing portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing hole 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removing hole 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper countersink releasing button 341 of the upper countersink removing mechanism 340 in the countersink unit 300 downward, the upper countersink removing slider 343 slides downward with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact As the piece 343a moves downward, the actuating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, the actuating member 583c moves downward with the contact piece 343a of the upper ball ball extracting mechanism 340, so that the ball removing member 583 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the gaming ball entering from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet flow path 344c of the upper tray ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. , And is discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball removal slider 343 with which the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 is in contact is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a Also, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that biases the upper ball ball withdrawal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, so that breakage of the ball withdrawal member 583 and the like can be prevented, and the gaming ball is It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

  As described above, according to the present example, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301 and the game ball is supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the player holds the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting device 650, thereby playing the game window 101 of the door frame 5. A game is played in the game area 1100 that can be viewed via the player, so that the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a discharge mechanism (ball removal member 583) are disposed, so that only the ball feed member 584 and the ball removal member 583 are provided. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball hitting device 650 are also brought as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, it remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls as much as possible, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, it is possible to increase the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300, and the game ball is hit. The game balls in the upper plate 301 can be eliminated early by the operation, and the upper plate 301 can be prevented from being filled with the game balls at an early stage, and the game balls in the upper plate 301 can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to reduce the feeling of inconvenience for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest, and also to miniaturize the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to be the pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in the assembly can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583. Even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be solved easily.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the extraction button 341 to the ball extraction member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side). By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage, causing malfunction or damage, and reliability for the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 or the upper plate 301 only by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward. It is possible to stop the game balls from being discharged from the game player, and to allow the player to easily operate the ball extraction operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball extraction button 341.

  In addition, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is made movable by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper countersink slider 343 and the partitions 583a can be reduced as much as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is at the raised position, the partitioning portion 583 a of the ball extracting member 583 brings the entry port 581 a into communication with the hitting supply port 582 a. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts against the partition portion 583a, the impact can be mitigated by the biasing force acting on the upper tray ball withdrawal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a The durability of 583) can be enhanced. In addition, since the impact applied to the partition 583a can be alleviated by the biasing force acting on the upper flat ball slide slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to collide even if it collides with the partition 583a. Thus, the ball feeding unit 580 or the like can be damaged and the occurrence of a defect can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition portion 583a when a load of a game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a is compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and the moving range of the partitioning portion 583a can be reduced in the planar projection. The effects and effects of

  In addition, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction to connect the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper countersinking mechanism 340, the partition By turning by its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are communicated, and the game medium in the storage tray is fed to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player without being stopped, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is moved to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem so that it is interesting It can suppress that it falls.

  Further, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b bent, the rotating hook part bent when the game ball collides with the divider 583a. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing it by 583b or by absorbing it by bending of the rotating collar portion 583b, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. It can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper tray 301, when discharging the gaming ball in the upper tray 301, the right and left sides of the gaming ball in the ball feeding unit 580 The movement of the direction can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can be used as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to suppress the ball feeding unit 580 from being unnecessarily enlarged.

[1-2K. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. This glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the gaming window 101, and an annular octagonal unit frame 592 molded with synthetic resin, and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592 respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 106). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 is disposed at the left and right ends vertically apart from each other, and includes four pieces 592a extending outward in the form of a plate, and a plate extending horizontally along the lower end and downwardly extending Shaped locking piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be engaged from behind and above Then, the outer periphery of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support stepped portion 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the locking piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIGS. 23, 28, etc.).

  As described above, in the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing game balls are vertically arranged below the vertically elongated oval shaped game window 101. In order to drive the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 to the right of the lower tray 302 in the front view right side of the lower tray 302 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 closing the gaming window 101. A handle device 500 is arranged. In addition, the door frame 5 surrounds the lower side of the game window 101 while the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 are disposed so as to surround the left and right and upper sides of the game window 101. Thus, the plate unit 300 is disposed to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 across the side speaker cover 290, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. It has an appearance with a continuous and integrated unity.

  In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, etc. provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby the game window 101 The light emitting decoration can be made with any light emitting color so as to surround the opening 328 a of the lower plate cover 328. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, on the rear side of the radiation lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. By turning on or off the arranged LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256, it is possible to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

  Specifically, the light emission modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a in the side lenses 210, 250, and the light emissions of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. If the modes are the same light emitting mode (the light emitting color and the light emitting pattern are the same), the entire light emitting decoration can be substantially uniform, and if the light emitting modes are different so as to emphasize the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a When it is made to be able to make it a light emission decoration that there was a break in the circumferential direction, when the light emission modes are made different so as to emphasize the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, they glow radially around the center of the game window 101 It can be a light emitting decoration, and can attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the base member 420 for supporting the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of aluminum alloy by die casting, and the base member 420 is formed of the plate unit 300 by the cover main body 426. Because the operation unit attachment portion 314c is suspended, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover main body 426 is elastically deformed so as to bend, and then the base member 420 is lowered. It will be in contact with the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c via the cover 424, so that the impact applied to the dial operation portion 401, the pressing operation portion 405, etc. can be alleviated and breakage of the operation unit 400 can be prevented. It can be done.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 405 is inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 401 is included together even if a player or the like tries to strike the pressing operation unit 405 strongly. Therefore, the impact hit by the dial operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the impact can be prevented from being concentrated to be hard to break. In addition, the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly protrude from the upper surface from below. When the impact hitting the portion 401 is transmitted to the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410 and the operation portion holding member 416 is bent downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a. Since the base member 420 can contact the upper surface and receive the impact, it is possible to reduce the load on the operation portion holding member 416 and to prevent the gear rail 416a from being crushed by the impact. The durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached from the upper side to the plate unit 300, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, It is possible to prevent the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 from being lowered by replacing the unit 400.

[1-2L. Luminescent decoration in the door frame]
Then, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 is mainly demonstrated with reference to FIG.59 and FIG.60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. Moreover, FIG. 60 is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 has a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 on which the LED is mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion of the gaming center 101 in the left-right direction center. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are surrounded by the side decoration frames 202 and 242 which are opaque (in this example, have a plated layer on the surface) Is enclosed.

  Side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged on the rear side of these side lenses 210 and 250, and the body inner portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged with respect to the rear surfaces of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. The plate-shaped light guides 212b and 252b are formed so as to extend as far as possible to the rear surfaces of the radiation lens units 210b and 250b. Has been. Although not shown in detail in the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surfaces thereof, and the decorative substrates 214, 216 and 254 arranged on the rear side. , 256 can diffuse light.

  The upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, and circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b are provided. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper decoration Normal luminance lower than that of the LED 286b of the upper decorative board 286 in the unit 280). In addition, two LEDs 214c disposed on the upper and lower sides corresponding to the side sub lenses 228 in the right side upper decoration substrate 214 are red LEDs.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and by reflecting the light from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  Next, as described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the end portions of the upper portion of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction. The upper center of the gaming window 101 is decorated. The upper decorative unit 280 has a large central lens 282 formed in the center in the center, a side lens 284 formed obliquely on both the upper and lower left sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. And a lower lens 289 arranged. The central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the side lenses 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a translucent (white) member. . Thereby, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface thereof, and can diffuse and refract light, so that it passes through the transparent central lens 282. Looking at the inner lens 283, the central lens 282 appears to be deep, and the central lens 282 itself appears to be sparkling. Further, the upper decorative substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the inner lens 283 is not visible from the player side.

  The upper decorative substrate 286 in the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of (six in this example) LEDs 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 and disposed behind the inner lens 283, the side lenses 284 and the lower lens 289 A plurality of LEDs 286b (in this example, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, which are disposed on the left and the right, respectively) disposed on the side are provided. In this example, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a white LED of high brightness. In addition, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, the plurality of light guide portions 318a in the upper plate upper lens 318 along the front end of the upper plate 301 are connected to the upper plate along the front end of the upper plate 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240. It is arranged in a state of being exposed through the opening 316a of the front decoration member 316, and when viewed from the front, the lower side outer side of the game window 101 by the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper lens 318 as shown. (Lower) is designed to decorate. Below the upper dish upper lens 318, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a projection corresponding to each light guide 318a is disposed. The upper dish upper lens 318 of the dish unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper dish upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

  The upper plate upper inner lens 319 of the plate unit 300 has a plurality of minute prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guiding portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 to diffusely reflect or irregularly refract light. As in the case of the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 is given a richness and a sparkling brilliance, thereby The light part 318a looks like a jewel. The upper dish upper inner lens 319 does not allow the upper dish right decoration substrate 320 and the upper dish left decoration board 322 disposed on the lower side to be seen from the player side through the light guide 318a.

  A plurality (six in this example) of the upper dish right decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 in the dish unit 300 correspond to the light guide portions 318 a of the upper dish upper lens 318. LEDs 320a, 322a are provided. In this example, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper pan right decorative substrate 320 and the upper pan left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the upper dish right decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 are also white, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432 d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the gaming window 101, and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so as to surround the gaming window 101, and are substantially concentric. A plurality (two in this example) of light emission can be decorated. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is decorated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 correspond to the first annular group 102 and the The radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 59 and 60) radially extends around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the two-ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated to emit light radially, and in addition, the annular group by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 The light emission decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction. In addition, the LEDs 214c corresponding to the side sub lenses 228 on the upper right side in the right side decoration unit 200 are the upper right side group 105, and one of the upper right sides of the door frame 5 is lit by appropriately emitting the LEDs 214c. The portion (side sub lens 228) can be decorated to emit light.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 emits light at the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is considered as a group 106. The LED 286a of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference point of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 Can be made to emit light. The LED 286 b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. The LED 286b of the upper central side group 107 is appropriately lit to decorate the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106, or above the gaming window 101 (including the upper part). Can be made to emit light in a V-shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320 a corresponding to the light guide 318 a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted in the plurality of openings 316 a of the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300 decorating the lower side of the gaming window 101. , 322 a is a lower group 108 that illuminates and decorates the outer periphery of the lower side of the gaming window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the gaming window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be decorated with light emission, and the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 , 216a, 254a, and 256a, the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 An operation unit group 109 for decorating light emission is used. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be informed.

  The light emission decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The twenty LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b and 256 b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104 a to 104 h for each of the radiation lens parts 210 b and 250 b of the side lenses 210 and 250. Also, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper center group 106 are divided into three systems, a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106b, and an upper left portion 106c. The six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the twelve LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d three by three from the front right side. In the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and the LEDs 430b form a pair. The two LEDs, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  Meanwhile, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 432d belongs are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit full color, and 3 in actual light emission control. It has doubled 84 systems. The LEDs 286 b and 430 b are white LEDs of high brightness, and the four systems 107 a, 107 b, 109 a and 109 b to which the LEDs 286 b and 430 b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected to each other. In actual light emission control, the number of systems is doubled to 8 systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs with normal luminance and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Moreover, LED214c is made into red LED, and belongs to 2 system | strain 105a, 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, so that the same number of ten systems is obtained in actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing is controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (the same color or similar colors are sequentially emitted) so that the light spreads outward around the game window 101. On the other hand, light emitting effects such as converging from the outside toward the game window 101 by causing the second ring group 103 to sequentially emit light (in the same color or similar colors sequentially) from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102; Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light simultaneously, it is possible to perform a light emission effect or the like that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

  In addition, the LED of the game board 4 and the LED of the first ring group 102 near the game window 101 are coordinated with the LEDs provided on the front of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000 etc. (details are omitted). With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 disposed outside the first annular group 102, it is possible to perform a more expressive luminous effect, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly. It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  In addition, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, light is circulated around the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately emitting light from the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, and 108a to 108d. Light may be directed toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101, or light may be transmitted along the outer periphery of the game window 101 from the central lens 282. It is possible to produce a light emission effect that moves. In this example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are divided into ten groups 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited thereto. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Furthermore, by emitting only the radial group 104, the light emission effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. By making it emit light that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or making the radial group 104 emit light (light on / blink) while emitting light from the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 It is possible to give a light emission effect that gives an accent to the light emission decoration of Further, by emitting light individually from each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b circulate.

  In addition, it is possible for the light to be rotated in the central lens 282 by causing each system 106 a to 106 c to emit light simultaneously by causing each system 106 a to 106 c of the upper center group 106 to emit light simultaneously, or sequentially emitting light from each system 106 a to 106 c. Light emission effects can be performed. In addition, by making the upper central side group 105 emit light, the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and decorated with high brightness, and the player comes to a chance or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability change game) State, short-time gaming state, short-time gaming state when probability change, etc.) can be performed. The lower lens 289 is arranged to emit light toward the player from above the player's head, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286 b. .

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 can emit light by decorating the front edge of the upper plate 301 by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108 or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109. Or, a light emission effect can be performed to urge the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. In addition, the system 109a, 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce a lighting effect with different gradations such as emission color and brightness for each 109 or for each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c. A rich lighting effect can be performed.

  Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are the first close to the gaming window 101. Since the ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 far from the game window 101 outside the first ring group 102 can be made to emit light, a plurality of outsides of the game window 101 (game area 1100) are arranged. The pachinko machine can be decorated in a substantially concentric circle shape, and the light surrounding the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can produce a light emitting effect that is not available in conventional pachinko machines, and attracts the player's attention strongly. It is designed to be one.

  In addition, one peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs arranged in a substantially concentric circle, and even if the appearance looks like one, each LED of the two systems can emit light. Since the light emission decoration can be made substantially concentrically, it is difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a (the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit) by the light emission decoration can be made. 240) can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention strongly by increasing the impact of the light emitting decoration can be obtained.

  Furthermore, LEDs 214b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, which are divided in the circumferential direction by LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b and arranged substantially concentrically. Therefore, the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be decorated in a plurality of rings by causing the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light according to the gaming state. And I have never seen it on a conventional pachinko machine It is possible to show the cormorants Do not light-emitting decoration to the player, can be a pachinko machine 1 attracted is strong interest in the player.

  In addition, the annular first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 configured by the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 in the door frame 5 are arranged substantially concentrically (FIG. 60) So that the light converges toward the gaming window 101, that is, the gaming area 1100 by emitting light in the order of the second annular group 103 and the first annular group 102 from the outside to the inside. And can make the player's interest to the gaming area 1100, and can make it seem that there is something good in the gaming area 1100, which increases the expectation of the game. It can suppress that interest falls. Furthermore, by emitting light in the order of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 from the inside to the outside, it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect that spreads outward from the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there is something good for the light-emitting effect spreading to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Furthermore, since the above-described light-emitting effects can be performed outside the game window 101 (game area 1100), not only a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 but also the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The player in the game hall can also show the above-mentioned light-emitting effects, attract the interest of other players, and make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. Can do.

  In addition, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 radially disposed so as to divide the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 extending in the circumferential direction. Since it is possible to divide the annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction by causing these radial groups 104 to emit light, it is possible to add an accent to the luminous decoration, The change of the light emitting decoration can strongly attract the player's attention. In addition, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 correspond to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 by the radial groups 104 arranged radially. Since the LEDs 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j are divided, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the respective peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are caused to emit light independently for each of the systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j. Thus, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which light moves in the circumferential direction. By providing a variety of light emission effects, the pachinko machine 1 that does not get tired can be obtained.

  Further, the side lenses 210 and 250 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a corresponding to the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a, and radiation lens portions 210b and 250b corresponding to the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b. Compared with the case where the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are included in the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and integrated, the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be changed, so Even when the lighting decoration is not performed, the design of the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained. Incidentally, even if the side lenses 210 and 250 are divided into the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a which are annularly arranged and the LEDs 214b and 216b which are radially arranged , 254b and 256b can be made to emit light in the same light emission mode, so that it becomes possible to illusion the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b to be integrated, and the outer periphery of the game window 101 is integrated Thus, the light emitting decoration can be performed in a ring shape, and the above-described effects can be sufficiently achieved.

  Further, the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that are partitioned in the circumferential direction by LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially on one peripheral lens portion 210a and 250a in the side lenses 210 and 250. , 216a, 254a, 256a are made to correspond to each other, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light even if the appearance looks like one. Since the light emission decoration can be performed substantially concentrically, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, and the change of the side lenses 210 and 250 due to the light emission decoration can be increased. Increase the impact of decoration and attract players' attention It can be pachinko machine 1 to be kicked.

  Furthermore, the side inner lenses 212, 250 irradiate the side lenses 210, 250 by diffusing light from the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 between the side lenses 210, 250 and the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256. 252 is provided, so that unevenness in the light emitting decoration of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be suppressed, the appearance of the light emitting decoration can be improved, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, Even if 254a and 256a are used, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated with light emission in a planar shape, so that a light emitting body that emits light in a linear shape (for example, a cold cathode tube (fluorescent tube), a neon tube, an organic EL, etc.) The first annular group 1 can be obtained by individually emitting each of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a as compared to the case where 2 and the second annular group 103 can also change the light emission in the circumferential direction, can present more various light emission effects, and suppress the decrease in the interest of the player due to difficulty in getting bored. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest.

  In addition, since light can be diffused by the side inner lenses 212 and 252, even if the transparency of the side lenses 210 and 250 is increased, the back side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 is caused by irregular refraction in the side inner lenses 212 and 252. The decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 placed on the player can be hard to see, and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, etc. can be seen directly from the player side and prevent the appearance from deteriorating. Can.

  Furthermore, the light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is guided by the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 to irradiate the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. The light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b can be reliably guided to the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b to be decorated with light emission, so that the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be realized. Further, the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 ensure the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 even if the distance between the side lenses 210 and 250 and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is long. Since the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 irradiate the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 widely with the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, sufficient space between the side lenses 210 and 250 is sufficient. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially can be mounted on the same substrate as the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a that secure the space, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 is surrounded by the side decoration frames 202 and 242, the light from the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a is a radiation lens It is possible to reduce as much as possible the influence of light from the light emitting lens portions 210b and 250b to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a to the portions 210b and 250b, and it is possible that the respective light emitting decorations interfere with each other. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the light emission.

[1-3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. FIG. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the rear FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side in a front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and also has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4; Upper shaft support bracket 630 and lower shaft support bracket 640 for supporting the door frame 5 by being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left side end portion of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2; Ball hitting device 650 for hitting the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front of the game board, and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the winning ball unit 700 to the tray unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the main frame 3 Open the ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, and the like. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 68 and FIG. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape in a front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 It is formed to have a certain depth D (see FIG. 65). Thus, when attaching the main body frame base 600 to the main body frame base 600 at the time of attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. The rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main frame base 600 has a gaming board holding opening capable of fittingly holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating the inside of the range of about 3⁄4 of the whole from the top to the bottom in a rectangular shape in the front and back direction. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming a front end outer periphery excluding the front side left side of the main body frame base 600, a recess from the front of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear; A door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the lower frame, an upper bent protrusion 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and an open side protruding rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engaging groove 603 into which the bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. A peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 is provided. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and a positioning projection 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning projection 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out ball discharging groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict movement of the lower end of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and backward. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. In addition, although the details will be described later, the movement of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the game board 4 in a front view.

  Furthermore, the body frame base 600 is a bracket attachment for attaching the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 to the rear surface of the free end (upper and lower left end in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the vertical and horizontal directions on the front side, and the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 should be attached with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and formed in the lower left in front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, A downwardly extending far space 626 is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left than the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by the relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 etc.), and the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear face of the rear face face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a barrier on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper front end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 which protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixed piece 690a fanning around an axial center pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixed piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600 and then operates the operation piece 690 b to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward beyond the game board placement unit 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placement unit 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. In addition, the game board fixture 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b abuts against the stopper 617, and by abutting against the stopper 617, the rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is restricted. It has become.

  Furthermore, a door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. In addition, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the main body frame base 600 on the lower rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the three main body frame bases 600 penetrate longitudinally in the front and rear direction inside the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in a front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 which is penetrated in the front and rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and aligned in the left and right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the approximate center in the vertical direction. Locking projections 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock lock holes 621, respectively. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. Then, in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. A state 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. Is provided with a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 that allows the game ball to circulate from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly above. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed at the rear side by a substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and will be described in detail later. A game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 is provided. It is distributed.

  In addition, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are disposed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the back view, and back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supporting the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for attaching the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to the front left side of the opening 614 in the front of the lower rear wall portion 604 and a lock device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall 605 And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description will be omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for attaching the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. It has been formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the vertical direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front. A stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 107) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-like mounting portion 642a extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front A plate-like front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end of the front view 642a and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The mounting portion 642a, the forward extension portion 642b, and the stopper 642d of the door frame shaft support fitting 642 are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the attachment portion 644a in a plate-like attachment portion 644a. A front extension portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 644b are provided. Also in the body frame shaft support bracket 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension portion 642b of the pivot support 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support bracket 644 are attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is like that.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are mounted on the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640. Are coaxially positioned, and the main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is By inserting the upper support fitting 20 into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, when the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 The bracket 642 c is coaxially located, and the door pin of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642 c of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is mounted on the front extension portion 642 b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when inserting the upper shaft support fitting 630 into the door frame shaft support hole 634, the shaft pin 155 is Once the upper pivot support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper pivot support member 630 vertically overlap by sliding downward, the door is slid upward by sliding the pivot pin 155. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Ball hitting launcher]
Next, the hitting and launching apparatus 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the hit and fired device 650 of the present embodiment, a firing base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600 and a rotational drive shaft 654 a project forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652 , A hitting ball 656 fixed so as to be integral with the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a movement locus of the tip 658 Between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 attached to the front end of the launch rail 660 extending from the predetermined position at the top to the base end as the base end at the base end A ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the firing rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball can not pass at the same time as the 658 is made passable. The ball 662 (the tip 658) is controlled to rotate to the side of the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where it is possible to hit the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the piece 662 and the ball stopper 662 And a stopper 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 reciprocates and rotates the drive shaft 654a at a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. The hitting rod 656 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a gentle arc extending from the fixing portion 656a, and a tip end with respect to the axial center of the driving shaft 654a. It has a collar portion 656b with the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can contact the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the collar portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip of the tip end 658 is pivoted toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view) Being regulated.

  In addition, the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 has a loose circular arc shape in which the lower part is recessed along the lower end extension of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98). On the other hand, the center is in a V-shaped recessed shape, and the game ball hit by the hit ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the firing rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launcher 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can restrict the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, so that it can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. It can be done.

  When the hitting and launching apparatus 650 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, etc. It is positioned below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the gaming board placement portion 606 (the lower side of the gaming board holding port 601), and the outside of the gaming board 4 held in the gaming board holding port 601 A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111. The ball hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example is to hit the gaming ball into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 by firing the gaming ball so as to jump over the far space 626 on the left side in front view than the firing rail 660. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball entry 542e of the far cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the far space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven in is dropped into the foul space 626, received into the foul ball inlet 542e, and discharged to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, the striking launcher 650 is configured such that the launch solenoid 654 is driven by the launch control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle unit 500 and the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 for supplying the game balls to the hit ball firing device 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven. When the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 to the hit ball launch device 650 side when it is released (OFF), the shooting solenoid 654 is driven substantially simultaneously with the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 By turning on (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball cage 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of a winning ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the winning ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the winning ball tank and the tank rail unit in the winning ball unit, as viewed from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of a winning ball device in the winning ball unit, as disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a sphere circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main unit frame 3 of the present embodiment stores predetermined gaming instructions after storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 is provided with a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and aligning the gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sending it downstream, and a predetermined payout of the gaming balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730. A payout device 740 that pays out based on the instruction and a gaming ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit and the game ball paid out when the upper plate 301 is full with the gaming ball Mainly comprises a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. The external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the award ball base 710 and the external terminal board cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal board 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof, and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in rear view. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. As well as being disposed, a vertically extending prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and a lateral terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate An external terminal plate attachment portion 712 for attaching the cover 786, a plurality of attachment locking portions 713 for attaching the tank rail unit 730 to the upper end lower end rear side of the rear wall 710b, and a vertical side rear side of the rear wall 710b A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball device 740 to the ball, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding the gaming ball dispensed from the prize ball device 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and a rear wall And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branching unit 770 at the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the like. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. In addition, although detailed description is omitted in the award ball base 710, an attachment hole, an attachment boss, etc. for attaching the award ball tank 720, the award ball device 740, etc. to the main body frame base 600, etc. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 , A rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left side in plan view of the flange portion 724, a baseball tank formed near the proximal end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. Awarded at 720 Ball Base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  An outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of gaming balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the winning ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the gaming balls on the bottom wall 721 roll toward the discharge port 723 It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball straightening member 727 has one end pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein so that the other end hangs down by its own weight. . The ball straightening member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730 described later, and the game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. In addition, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game ball can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown also in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 is provided with a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is sloped so that The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface And a plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 74) which are further downwardly protruded and are locked from the upper side to the attachment locking portions 713 of the award ball base 710.

  The tank rail 731 is arranged such that the end on the right side (open side) in a front view is positioned directly below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720, and the gaming ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is After receiving, it rolls to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the award ball base 710, the tank rail 731 that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the award ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported at the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 for closing the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stopper which can be moved into and out of the tank rail 731 to stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a grounding plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and that can contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the gaming balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball holding plate 734 has an attachment portion 734a to which the ball stopper 735 is attached at the top, and two slits 734b which are vertically penetrated and through which the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which has not been made one step higher by the ball straightening member 727 one more step, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower as it goes to the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As illustrated, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls that have flowed down the tank rail 731 flow down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls aligned in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. To the device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matters such as dust rolling along with the game ball in the tank rail 731 fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. The game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731 so that the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734a in the tank rail 730. By inserting it, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the projecting pieces 735a, and the supply of gaming balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. There is.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b having a predetermined space communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b in communication with the lower left side (open side) and bent substantially in a letter shape. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side surface and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower right side (axial support side) bottom of the distribution space 741b and extends downward and open to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 whose length in the vertical direction is shorter than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742 Dispensing motor 744 disposed on the front side of the plate 743 and the motor supporting plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor supporting plate 743, and is integral with the rotating shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744 The first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745, and the second gear 746 meshed with the second gear 746 The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotation integrally rotating with the third gear 747 and disposed in the distribution space 741 c of the unit base 741 The body 748 and the dispensing rotating body 748 are integrally rotatably supported on the opposite side across the third gear 747, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. And 749.

  In addition, the winning ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of the gaming ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of gaming balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the winning ball passage 741c. Sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotation body 748, and the rotation angle sensor 752 A sensor base 753 and a prize ball relay board 754 relaying the connection between the payout motor 744, the ball out switch 750, the count sensor 751, and the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and attached to the back surface of the back cover 742 I have.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), And a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball that circulates in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 The metal fitting 757, the screw 744 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported with respect to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the open rear end of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d. Is supposed to be closed. In addition, the unit base 741 has a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a that is temporarily bulged backward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side (left side in rear view) below the position where the supply passage 741 a bulges rearward and is outside the cut-out position of the supply passage 741 a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball breakage switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the count sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a longitudinal direction below the prize ball passage 741a. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence or absence of the playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the cut ball switch 741e. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball break switch 741e (out of ball state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attaching / detaching button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 arranged on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply path 741 a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 is generally in the form of a vertically long plate, and the upper end is bulged rearward. At the top of the back cover 742, a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attaching / detaching button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and relay board mounting The sensor board attaching part 742c which is arrange | positioned under the part 742b for attaching the sensor board 753, and the through-hole 742d which the paying-off | rotation body 748 can pass are provided. The relay substrate attachment portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed on the rear side of the earth metal fitting attachment portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and heat generated by the payout motor 744 is generated. It is possible to facilitate heat dissipation.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a each having a size that can accommodate one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are stored one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, it is possible to detect the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748.

  The award ball apparatus 740 of this example has a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball removal switch 860b is operated. By rotating 744, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be paid out to the player side (upper tray 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744 a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 has a payout rotator 748 on the front side and a rotation detection board 749 on the rear side so as to be integrally rotatable. The payout rotator 748 and the rotation detection board 749 are fixed together with the third gear 747. It is supposed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation is performed. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741 c by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the clockwise direction from the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball pulling passage 741d, and the payout rotating body 748 is The game balls paid out to the ball removal passage 741d side from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d, the ball removal passage 778 of the full dispensing unit 770 described later, the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the body frame base 600, the board unit It can be discharged outside the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

  The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the award is made from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as a ball clog can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball path 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls are full on the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 can be distributed so as to pay out the game balls.

  The full-tan branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the award ball base 710 at the rear end upper portion and a locking portion 770 which is locked to the attachment locking portion 716 of the award ball base 710 substantially at the center top And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the rear side of the mounting lock portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a from the rear side to the mounting locking portion 716 of the winning ball base 710, and the winning ball base 770 By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving a game ball flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710 and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving port 771 to the front side in the branch space 772, and a game ball that has circulated through the normal passage 773 forward and the front end of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and a full passage 775 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position on the right side of the rear view rather than just below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Furthermore, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that receives the game ball that opens upward at the left end in a front view at the upper end of the rear end and flows down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740; A ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game balls received in the removal opening 777 to the front side, and the game balls distributed through the ball removal passage 778 are released forward to the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end in front view And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full ball outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively the first foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so that the game ball released from the ball outlet 779 is released from the main body frame base 600. The main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is to be delivered.

  In this full tank branching unit 770, the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received by the prize ball receiving opening 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the gaming ball having entered the prize ball receptacle 771 drops the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receptacle 771. Then, the gaming ball that has flowed down into the passage 773 normally enters the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540 from the outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and is placed on the dish unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the dish 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 (the winning ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of gaming balls, the first ball outlet of the far cover unit 540 The game ball which can not go out to the upper plate 301 side from 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540, and eventually, the inside of the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full branch unit 770 is also full. become. In this state, the gaming ball entering the branch space 772 from the winning ball receptacle 771 can not normally enter the passage 773 and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball enters into the full tank passage 775, and from below the full ball outlet 776 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, under the dish unit 300. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  Note that the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be viewed from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branch unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, etc. can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  As described above, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example automatically performs the game ball paid out from the winning ball device 740 until the full tank is cancelled. Since the lower tray 302 can be supplied to the lower tray 302, the upper tray becomes full and the ball release button of the upper tray is operated like the conventional pachinko machine, so that the game balls can not be supplied to the striking device. It is possible to avoid interruption of the hitting of the game ball, and it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience in the game and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game ball to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game ball staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 is paid out to the upper plate 301, the game ball in the upper plate 301 and the game ball in the normal passage 773 are used as a ball hitting device. The storage ball of the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as in the conventional case are stored in the upper plate 301. Can. Accordingly, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained. A pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, and the player can be entertained by the large game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank ball outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (the first inlet) Even when there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost of the machine can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 through the normal passage 773 is preferentially hit into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray Even if it is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to a lack of game balls for throwing in, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 in which the number of storage dishes is different. .

  In addition, unless the upper tray 301 is full, since the gaming balls paid out from the winning bowl device 740 are sent to the upper tray 301, the frequency of transferring the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 302 to the upper tray 301 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to concentrate the player on the operation of hitting the game ball and the like, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, even when the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball The position of the lower end of the inlet corresponding to the inlet 542a etc. can be made the same height as the first ball inlet 542a etc corresponding to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage trays, so It becomes possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and the storage plate can be made deeper to secure a sufficient amount of storage for the game balls, and the player can be made to play without having to worry about the storage amount frequently. It is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 provided with different numbers of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the winning ball apparatus 740, and the upper tray 301 is full tank with game balls. Even if no game balls are released from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branching position of the full passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls can not be ejected from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full tank ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is disposed as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the substantial storage amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage dishes provided on the door frame 5 is different, the storage amount of gaming balls in each door frame 5 can be maximized without changing the main frame 3 (full tank branch unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be made as much as possible, and can cope with different door frames 5 sufficiently.

  Further, the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 have a size that allows the game balls to be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the retention amount of the game ball in the full tank branch unit 770 Since it can be increased, even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3 can be obtained.

  In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. At the time, it is possible to easily find a clogged spot from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem early and to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3 E. Ball outlet opening and closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 80 to FIG. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the attachment portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the regular ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are closed, and from the winning ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held on the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending through the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  Further, the open / close shutter 792 of the ball outlet open / close unit 790 is a flat shutter body 792a, and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) which slide from the front of the shutter body 792 and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. And a laterally long rectangular drive hole 792b disposed in a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding projections and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a right-side outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a. From the front end of the opening 791b and projecting rearward from the front end of the driving lever 793b and slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side in front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical shape at the tip, and the other end (lower end) of the open / close spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the driving rod 793b. And the spring locking portion 793e for locking the

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening and closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed behind the opening and closing shutter 792 even when the opening and closing shutter 792 is lifted. A normal sphere outlet 774 and a full sphere outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the drive pin 793c of the opening and closing crank 793 rotates up and down like an arc at the same time as the opening and closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front and rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 is slid in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which the is inserted. In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790, the contact portion 793d of the opening and closing crank 793 contacts the opening and closing operation piece 542g of the door cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. The contact portion 793d is pivoted in the clockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 can be lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the open / close crank 793 and the open / close operation piece 542g of the full cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released. Is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the opening / closing shutter 792 is lifted to close the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776. Be able to.

  Thus, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 automatically automatically sets the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776 in the winning ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game balls are prevented from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 It can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply substrate box in the substrate unit. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. Further, FIG. 89 (A) is a front view of the firing power supply substrate box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A).

  The substrate unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 in front view, and the substrate unit base A firing power supply substrate box 830 attached to the right end rear surface of the front view 810, a power supply substrate box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 so as to surround the firing power supply substrate box 830 from the rear side A power supply substrate box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control substrate box 860 attached to the power substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the front view 860; and a main relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral relay terminal board 882 attached to the front of the board unit base 810; I have.

  The substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example is configured to extend in the left-right direction as shown in the figure, and the substantially central part in the left-right direction inclines gently upward as it goes down one step toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall 811 projecting forward from the front, an opening 812 disposed on the upper side of the shielding wall 811 at a position one step lower than the middle in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction Board attachment portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view and for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and in a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front and rear direction in front view left side of the board attachment portion 813 A plurality of vertically long slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  In the substrate unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The game ball can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. In addition, the substrate base unit 810 sends the gaming balls having flowed down the main frame base ball escape passage 622 to the power supply substrate box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Be able to.

  Further, in the board unit base 810, the board attachment portion 813 for attaching the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is disposed at a position corresponding to the opening 614 opened in a rectangular shape in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. Further, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Furthermore, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box storage portion 843 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 in which the box storage portion 816 is disposed on the rear side, and the box storage portion 816 and the front box storage portion 843. And a receiving recess for receiving the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally elongated opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and moving forward. The bass-reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a deep bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 in the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted forward. ing.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply substrate 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. In the firing power supply substrate box 830, various electronic components attached to the firing power supply substrate 831 are accommodated internally, and heat from the electronic components etc. is provided through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 is removed from above in the upwardly open accommodation recess formed by the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810 and the front box accommodation portion 844 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 described later. It is supposed to be accommodated. Thereby, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, when a problem occurs in the firing power supply substrate box 830, the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily detached, replaced, or repaired from the front side of the main body frame 3. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, when the launch power supply substrate box 830 is described in detail, as shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply substrate 831 is provided with a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 charging and discharging electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a. And a combined current combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is driven by causing a current to flow to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking and launching apparatus 650. In this firing power supply substrate box 830, slits 830a as heat dissipation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat emitted from the DC / DC converter 831a mounted on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the outside. ing.

  Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply substrate box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply substrate box 830, a partition wall 830b, which divides the internal space into two spaces of a space for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, has an upper inner wall And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the end opening edge. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Partition wall 830b for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed on the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface for communicating the housing space 830c with the outside air. The released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored by being released to the outside through 830a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a, is a heat radiation hole formed on the upper surface and the lower surface communicating the housing space 830d with the outside air. By being released to the outside through the slits 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power board 851, but are fired separately from the power board 851. By being provided on the power supply substrate 831, the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply substrate 851. Therefore, it becomes easy to handle by reducing the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 and the replacement work of the launch power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the launch power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830.

  In addition, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, it is easy to replace the firing power supply board 831. It is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game at an early stage. Therefore, the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing can be resolved at an early stage, the game can be resumed, and the interest of the player decreases. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of life due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. The life is extremely long as compared with the firing power supply substrate 831. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration associated with charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for producing the combined current to be supplied to the discharge solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851, but are provided on the discharge power supply substrate 831 separate from the power supply substrate 851. Can be concentrated on the power supply substrate 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, it has a capacity for changing the driving characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to remove the launch power board 831 and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. It is possible to prevent fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the driving strength of the launch power supply substrate 831 that has been tampered with and optimized, and to make fraud difficult. The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of preventing a player who has learned frustration etc. from developing into injustice such as injustice.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced immediately and the unauthorized use can be made. It can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch controller 4120 that controls the hitting ball launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By replacing the launch power supply substrate 831 with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a that can realize the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the bat striking launch device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 is a new game It can be matched to board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply substrate 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply substrate 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as game halls, It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for exchange, and it is possible to exchange in a short time and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the firing power supply substrate 831 (the firing power supply substrate box 830) is made removable so that it can be replaced, the change of the implantation characteristics is made as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (the delivery control substrate 4110) is replaced. Cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side or the like can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is degraded, as described above, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, a defect occurs due to the degradation and the firing power supply substrate 831 is immediately replaced. And the problem can be resolved, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and at the same time, the interruption of the game can be quickly resolved to feel frustrating or to feel disappointing. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the shooting power supply substrate 831 (the shooting power supply substrate box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game power holding board 601 is held by the game board holding port 601 Because it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for fraudulent action is made to enter from the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, an illegal tool reaches the firing power substrate 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from performing an illegal act on the launch power supply substrate 831 and has a high defense against the illegal act.

  Furthermore, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601 and the position for supporting the firing power supply substrate box 830 is on the rear side of the front surface of the main body frame 3, the firing power supply A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Also, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the firing power supply substrate 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3. Therefore, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (fired power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, so that the problem can be eliminated early and the game is interrupted. While being able to shorten time as much as possible, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which reliably plays the effect mentioned above.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the lower left side of the left and right center in front view. Ejecting ball receiving portion 841, Ejecting passage 842 for guiding the gaming ball received by Ejecting ball receiving portion 841 downward, and Ejecting passage 842 and the front of the side of Ejecting passage 842 and Ejecting ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the launch power board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed forward. A rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 passes through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810 through the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game ball that has flowed down and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841, which will be described in detail later, pass through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be discharged.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece And the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the power board box 850 has a standing wall 850b slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal where the wiring cord extends is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to turn (turn back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  In addition, since power supply substrate box 850 is provided with protruding portions 850c protruding backward on both sides of the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, even if wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, the rear end The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side. The wire cord 854 can be brought close to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d immediately after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It is possible to make it possible to simplify the working process involved in the assembly.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When mounted, the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush.

  Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851, the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850 b projecting rearward than the rear end of the connector terminal 855 Since the wiring cord 854 extended from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is a power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It becomes possible to act in such a direction as releasing the connection with the 853 and can prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unremovable by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as substrate replacement can be easily performed.

  Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

  Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is positioned adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, so that it is connected to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a force from acting and to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, dust and dirt that cause a failure can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 851 and mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) and to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  In addition, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or removing the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853. Can be prevented from being energized and causing a failure of energization or the power supply terminal 853 being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

  Further, since the protruding portions 850c that project backward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protruding portions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can not be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded at the standing wall portion 850b is brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 is made difficult to be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. While the wire cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the assembly process can be simplified to suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, the delivery control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a thin box-like box base 861 that is wide and open at the rear, and a thin box-like cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear side and opens at the front. And 86, a delivery control board 4110 (see FIG. 195) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation / cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 can not be separated without being cut off, and the trace thereof is left when the delivery control substrate box 860 is opened. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the dispensing control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  The payout control board box 860 is configured such that an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are arranged to face rearward through the cover 862.

  Furthermore, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, and the board attachment part 871a formed on the upper left rear face in rear view and the board cover attachment part 871b formed on the rear right end rear face A peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted from the rear side to the substrate mounting portion 871a of the substrate base 871 and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871 A connection terminal board cover 873 attached from the rear side and having an opening 873b extending vertically in the rear wall 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal board cover 873 are attached to the rear surface CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connected terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a power indicator for displaying the operating state etc. of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island equipment side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The substrate base 871, the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 are respectively formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the CR unit connection terminal are provided from the outside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, if a problem such as ball clogged in the pachinko machine 1 occurs, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator installed on the island equipment side or the CR unit 6 etc. The displayed status display sticker 876 is pasted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. The board base 871 is formed on the inner upper part of the board mounting part 871a and a fixing piece (not shown) for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, and is formed on the inner lower part of the board mounting part 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape with the substrate cover attachment portion 871b opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is made such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided on the left outer side in back view of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b. The protrusion 871e of the substrate base 871 has a rearward protrusion amount slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in FIG. It is arranged to be close to the position.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear surface right rear surface of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b so as to be vertically separated, and has a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875; And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall 873c, a rectangular opening 873b extending vertically through the rear wall 873a, and a rear wall substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 873b The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall 873d extending from the 873a to the front (substrate base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall 873d abut the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is opened on the left side when viewed from the back side, and extends outward (rightward) from the right side end when viewed from the back side of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the back and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. And a hooking piece 873i. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended ahead also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g is formed.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. While being able to control the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to move forward by the pair of substrate holding portions 873e, it is possible to hold the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in a detachable manner. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has the fixing piece 873h inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871, thereby The base cover mounting portion 871b of the base 871 can be detachably mounted.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. Yes.

  Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side, and is disposed on the right side surface as viewed from the rear side. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through-hole 875b And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The substrate box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be capable of opening and closing by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871. Yes. The board box cover 875 has a length such that the partition wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the partition wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a The length 875 c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the substrate box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the partition walls 875c substantially abut on the rear surfaces of the substrate base 871 and the connection terminal plate cover 873. It is like that.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is used as a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside also on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminals 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 are square two-piece connectors, and are attached so as to be able to be fitted and connected from the rear as illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece 871c of the connecting terminal plate cover 874 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 are the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875. Since the barrier wall 875c on the side exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit attached as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, illegal acts can be prevented. It is like that.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft parts 875a on the shaft part 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported rotatably on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. Since the partition wall 875c has a length extending between them, and the partition wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if it is attempted to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and to prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to conduct fraudulent action and suppressing It can be made expensive.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector. However, the protection part 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if the incorrect tool is inserted through the gap etc. and the tip of the incorrect tool is made to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the CR board connection terminal plate 874 housed is protected by the terminal board box 870. It is possible to prevent illegal acts against the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 with certainty.

  When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the ridges 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate Since the partition walls 875c of the box cover 875 exist, respectively, the multiple barriers will be constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 will be a crank shape meandering. In addition, an attempt is made to infiltrate a flexible tool having an excellent flexibility between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary). However, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 has a CR The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of reliably preventing fraudulent acts on the unit connection terminals 874a and the internal connection terminals 874b.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be surely prevented.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 is opened. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected to the connection terminal by the barrier 875c. Reaching to the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection box board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, and it is possible to make it difficult to conduct fraud and to have high deterrence.

  Furthermore, even if it is attempted to insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord in the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord. It can be

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even when a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Whether an unauthorized tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 accommodated therein, or the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 itself is not replaced with an unauthorized one. Or, it is possible to easily check whether electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 have been replaced with unauthorized ones. Can make it easier to detect cheating, and it also makes it easier to detect cheating. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since terminal board box 870 is mounted on the back surface side of main body frame 5 such that the front surface of CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, the outer frame 2 can be When the main body frame 5 is pivoted to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870 face the worker side (player side). The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  A main side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are a door control and a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, the decoration substrate, the operation unit 400 and the like provided in the fifth embodiment. The main side relay terminal boards 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal boards 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a substrate formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810 By attaching them to the attachment portion 813, the connection terminals face the front side from the front face of the main body frame base 600.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 30).

  Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining loan display portion 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the connection of the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is relayed. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This relay relays the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main unit frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (game unit 4 attached to the main unit frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main unit frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-like main portion 902 closing the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 extending forward from the right side of the main portion 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of support pins 906 arranged in the vertical direction and protruding downward and pivotally supported by the back cover support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 and formed in the upper and lower portions of the left side of the main portion 902 in front view An engagement piece 908 engaged with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and a back cover 900 near the lower engagement piece 908 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable / closable manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, etc., the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side in a rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. 921 and a longitudinally long rectangular lock port 922 disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lock that is elastically locked from the rear side with respect to the lock port 922 A plate-like guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a laterally elongated long hole 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and the long hole 923b of the guide 923 are inserted from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having an external thread 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the external thread 924a of the fastening member 924. Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loosely fitted state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play at Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can be slid in the left-right direction and is not dropped from the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 has a fastening member 924 that protrudes forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 in this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame 3 by pivoting the pivot pin 906 to the back cover pivot 623 of the main frame base 600. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially in agreement.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. A state of being positioned behind the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the end of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b from this state and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed). Note that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique to the main body 902, the fastening member 924 is Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axial center of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably transferred to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, so that it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that penetrates the connection cutout 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in a front view.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, and the like. Comes to the rear. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening portion 912 through which a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the notch portion 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating thinly in the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through the slits 916 is of the main frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the rear outside. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend long in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through holes 918 are in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the apparatus so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted satisfactorily. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is fixed to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 and maintenance of the rear side of the game board 4 is performed. Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 remains the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 from being attached to the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from dropping from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  In addition, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is assuredly correct with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be concluded. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When the fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. Can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female threaded portion and is screw-coupled with the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared to engagement by a simple locking claw. Can not be released and the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility, and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is easily positioned at a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924 is easily moved straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, the locking port Since it is elastically locked to 922, the shaft extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 on the distal end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably mounted It can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 to be engaged, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is described. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one fastening part using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

  Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be opened even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like. It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 66 and FIG. The side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 fixed to the upper and lower portions near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction with substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a front end right from the front end of the side plate 952a Front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c disposed so as to form a predetermined gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and having a smaller amount of projection than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a And a rear end piece 952d extending longer in the rightward direction than the front end piece 952b (see FIG. 106). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by the side plate piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and the front component 1110 of the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. The left side in a front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 106).

  In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600. When the side crime prevention plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is the axial support side of the axial support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. To be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped protruding piece 166, and to prevent insertion of a tool for cheating between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view (See FIG. 106). In addition, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 etc. favorably. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed with the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is interposed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side face plate 950. The rear side piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the pivot-side U-shape. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protrusion 166 on the pivotal side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoted U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. Can be used to open the door frame 5 against the main frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. The body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance in the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the security side plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (the shaft support side) is formed of metal. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared to the case where the entire body frame 3 is formed of metal.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 for locking the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one position between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041 so as to be stopped, the open side is improper such as a bur Even if it is scolded by such a tool, it can be favorably prevented that the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is expanded, and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being forcibly opened.

  Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the security side plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the crime prevention side plate 950 from being forcibly bent and being cheated. .

  Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal extrusion type material, the crime prevention side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined sectional shape with the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily While being able to form, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and defects such as strength reduction that occur during processing as compared to the case where the metal plate is bent The security side plate 950 can be reduced as much as possible and has high durability and high strength.

[1-3I. Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 93 to FIG. FIG. 93A is a left side view of the locking device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the locking device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94 (B) is a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding door for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device as seen after disassembling, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the glass door sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3. A door hook hole 620 formed at the top of the right side (open side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main frame base 600 and a lock retaining hole 621 formed at the lower portion, and a peripheral wall of the main frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding wedge 1040, the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame can not be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame are formed therein. And are arranged slidably. The U-shaped base 1001 is extremely thin in comparison with a lock device integrated in a conventional L-shaped cross section. This makes it possible to make the size in the left and right direction of the lock device 1000 as thin as possible, and the size in the left and right direction of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively enlarged. It is possible to provide a large 1,400 game board 4.

  The U-shaped base 1001 can be attached in a state where the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) up and down opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002 and a screw fixing portion 1003 protruding outward in the middle and the upper portion of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side Protruding forward from the lower end of the upper end and the middle part of the open side (front side) of the side 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side 1001b where the 1003 is provided and the lower side of the open sides 1001a and 1001b The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is a hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The lock device 1000 is attached with screws not only at the upper and middle screw stop portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw lock portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The lock mounting portion 625 is also fixed to the main frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower side of the lock device 1000 can also be mounted.

  In addition, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the lock projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001, the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper and the lock lock hole 621 is inserted and positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw. It can be fixed firmly to (body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projections 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be the fixing structure) project from the side surface 1001 a not in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b which is dense with the main body frame 3.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), while the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at three places at the top, middle, bottom of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portion of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 respectively formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 can be moved upward, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be moved downward.

  Furthermore, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the side wall portion 605 in the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed in the lower closed side surface and the open side main body frame base 600. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring engagement piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch portion 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001, which will be described in detail later, advances and retracts the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001 b below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected laterally from the front end, through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and an attachment hole 1013 formed on the lock attachment substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 with two screws 1012 An attachment hole 1014 is formed in the lower case, and a screw stop 1003 is formed in order to attach the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034; It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for mounting to the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed into a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 engaged with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 at the time of rotation, The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 when it is rotated.

  This cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the above.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but fraudulently for the main body frame with a piano wire, a wire, or the like. To prevent lowering of the As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud preventing members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is a vertically long plate-like member and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper resistant member 1023 is the highest through the swinging shaft hole 1025 together with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is opened longitudinally at a position overlapping the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the plate-like surface, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 to slide the door frame sliding wedge 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely to be able to abut the rear surface side of the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates on the outer side of the front upper side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026. Provided with the inclined portion 1024, and the inclined portion 1024 abuts on the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding improperly. In addition, the control projection 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035 so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (bias direction) It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first tamper resistant member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud protective member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first anti-corrosion member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 by being engaged with the horizontal opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "-" shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 at its upper end, and a spring engagement hole 1036 at its upper other end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 may be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be rotatable relative to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base body 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Furthermore, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutment portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001, and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The sliding door 1040 for a door is provided with a hook portion 1041 for a door frame that protrudes toward the front at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one longitudinal side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding wedge 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state where the door sliding wedge 1040 is accommodated in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. Can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging hook shape as shown in the figure, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the door frame sliding lever 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  In addition, the sliding frame for door frame 1040 is provided at the bottom of the longitudinally long rivet long hole 1042 which is drilled at the center of the side in the upper, middle and lower and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted and the bottom of the rivet long hole 1042 at the top The lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide protrusion 1043 which protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding door 1040 for a door frame. The rivet long hole 1042 of the door sliding wedge 1040 is configured such that a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is a sliding door wedge. It is formed to be vertically long so as not to disturb the lifting operation of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. In the door frame sliding wedge 1040, the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050. The sliding movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed at its upper end with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding is performed by the spring 1048. The wedges 1040 are biased downward, and the main frame sliding wedges 1050 are biased upward, respectively. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Furthermore, the sliding door for a door frame 1040 is provided with a vertically-long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction at the lower part of the lower side of the vertical side in the vertical direction. This escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is securely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by a press, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connection wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. A protrusion moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left and right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055; a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a front longitudinal side of the protrusion moving hole 1056; And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper inside of the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward.

  The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the guide projecting piece 1043 on the upper side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to be engaged with the other end of the spring 1048. Further, the upper end of the connecting wire wedge 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051. Furthermore, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding action of the upper hook member 1051 There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is for a rivet which penetrates in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the upper end of the hook portion 1065 projecting backward from the lower end and the plate surface of the lower hook member 1052 A long hole 1061, a downward engaging hole 1062 disposed below the long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a downward direction of the idle hole 1063 A protrusion moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connection hole 1060 bored on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower lower side of the rear side of the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch portion 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 has a rivet. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 does not interfere with the pivoting operation of the second engagement protrusion 1018. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are connected by the connecting wire ridge 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame slide are inserted. After inserting the pallet 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swinging shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud preventing member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. In addition, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is a pin hole. It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after it is fixed at 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024 and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip end of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Of the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the door frame 5 in which the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding frame 1050 for the main frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement projection piece 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and connect it The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descended. Thereby, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is released, and the main frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the main frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054, 1065 are in a state of being lifted by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same elevated position as shown in FIG. 96A). Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the closing plates 24 and 25 are forcedly pressed against the outer frame 2. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are engaged again with the closing plates 24, 25 and the main frame sliding The hook 1050 is raised and returned to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The pivot 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. The locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released by rotating. In addition, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent action such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering the same. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the sliding door 1050 for the main frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut It is in a state of In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 causes the first fraud prevention member 1023 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the stopper piece 1027 intrudes into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch An engagement notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame slide lever 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked to the main frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to unfairly pull down (unlock) and it is not possible to conduct an unfair act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The rotation of the stopper piece portion 1027 starts to move in the clockwise direction in the drawing around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 is also moved so as to withdraw from the tamper-proof notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be done.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the control projection 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud preventing member 1032 abut from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 from being performed illegally, the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 Prevents unauthorized devices from entering the enclosed space, making it a structure that can not be easily tampered with.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide frame 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001 which is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The attachment position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for operating the lock device 1000 with the main frame slide lever 1050 slidably set to a position below the lower edge of the game board 4 Therefore, even if the size in the horizontal and vertical directions of the game board 4 is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, It can be attached firmly.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 faces the back surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is impossible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621. The structure is such that the positioning and locking is performed and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the upper, middle and lower of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with the above structure.

  In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 with screws. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole screwed by penetrating the piece 1008 in the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this embodiment, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A sliding door 1040 for a door frame and a sliding door for a main body frame in a closed space formed by an L-shaped base (lock base) and the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the first side wall 540 It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and there can exist an effect similar to the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the transparent award ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710 a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the award ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side of the gaming hall on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the gaming balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned to form a prize ball base rear wall portion 710b. Transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the game machine and gaming balls discharged from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction And a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main frame base 600, the rear surface of which is behind the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. And the transparent back cover 900 disposed substantially in the same plane, the rear of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. A pachinko machine capable of visually recognizing the side and the back side, and easily checking the back side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 covering the back side of the game board 4 1 can be used.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. It is easy to find out from and can prevent the occurrence of any failure due to the residue.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, an unauthorized device, tool, etc. for performing cheating on the rear side or the side of the game board 4 are attached Even if it has been, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted, and it is also possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to make the installation of an unauthorized device or the like hesitate, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  Also, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dust from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the award ball tank 720 is positioned approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is approximately half the depth of the main body frame 3, so the rear side and rear side of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. In addition, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to make a flat shape. The mounting operation can be facilitated by attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made into a substantially flat surface, and it can be caught or brought into contact with other members in the island facility to be installed by eliminating protrusions on the rear side. It can prevent and it can prevent that a failure generate | occur | produces. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material with a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Also, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 etc. The rear side of 4 and the like can be further easily viewed, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900 and the like. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, or the member such as the synthetic resin is deformed or the occurrence of a problem is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball can not pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the game ball from intruding into the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to the intrusion of the game ball.

[1-4. Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 98 to FIG. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the back FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on the game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the gaming board using the gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 etc., and FIG. 104 is a gaming viewed from the rear of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction.

  The gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, is a front configuration in which the outer circumference of the gaming area 1100 where the gaming ball is struck by the player operating the handle device 500 is partitioned and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 disposed on the rear side of the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 disposed on the rear lower portion of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls the game content that is attached to the rear surface of the game ball 1100 and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100 A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game situation and visibly attached to the player at a predetermined position of the front component 1110; To have. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. It is further provided (see FIGS. 108 to 115, etc.).

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Front component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front and rear direction in a substantially circular shape The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1110 is an outer rail 1111 extending in a circular arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower end toward the left from the center in the lateral direction in front view, and extending to the upper right corner passing the upper end in the lateral direction in the front view. The inner rail 1112 is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction to the upper left diagonal upper portion, and smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 Inner circumferential rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in a front view, the end (upper end) of inner circumferential rail 1113 and outer rail 1111 A stop 1114 that allows the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 to connect with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 and the inner rail 1113 Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is positioned on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. By turning the opening position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter into the game area 1100.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (injected into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received in a starting port 2101, 2102, a winning port 2103, 2104, 2201, etc., which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and discharged from the out port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher 650 can not enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the end of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the roll of the space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is performed. It falls and is received by the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the far space 626 and discharged to the lower tray 302 in the pan unit 300.

  A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the gaming ball is enhanced and the gaming ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, elastic members such as rubber and synthetic resin are arranged on the surface of the stopper 1114, and even if the game balls roll vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and make a collision, the shock is mitigated. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  In addition, the front component 1110 has a wall-like security projection 1117 projecting forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-out guide surface 1115 A groove-like rail security groove 1118 which extends up to the front end and is recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps vertically with the crime prevention rear end projection 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5. Therefore, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can be made to reach the game area 1100. Can not be

  Further, when the front structural member 1110 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime protruding piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The post-crime protruding piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even with the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, illegal equipment such as a piano wire which is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the front component 1110 is vertically spaced at the left end in the front view and recessed from the front to the rear and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened at the left end, and spaced apart in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward, and has an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage cutout portion 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending long in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is engaged with the positioning member 956 attached to the inner side of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the front end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably engaged with the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be used as a game board By locking the locking portion 608, the front end right end of the gaming board 4 inserted into the gaming board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Also, with the fixed recess 1121 of the front component 1110 inserted in the gaming board holding port 601 of the main frame 3, the gaming board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front of the main frame 3 can be viewed from the front When turned clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It is like that. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152.

  Furthermore, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front and rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion and a thickness in the front and rear direction from the center in the left and right direction at the lower side of the through hole 1123 A fastening portion 1124 thinly formed, and a stamped paper sticking portion 1125 which is disposed on the left side in a front view of the through hole 1123 and to which a certificate stamp for certification confirmation is stuck. Although the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 is not shown in detail, when the game board is attached to the previous main frame, a predetermined fastening band is fixed to the fastening hole formed in the previous main frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display unit 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By being worn, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 to fix the inner rail 1112 at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4 B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. And a ball passage notch 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the lower right corner in a front view An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

  Also, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower part and the positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and whose lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 101). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and although not shown, Within the corresponding range, a plurality of obstacle nails are to be implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is to be attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-out guide surface 1115 is made to enter the out-port 1151 and be discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 has an out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out sphere. The game ball which is formed to be lower toward the discharge unit 1161 and is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160 is The ball is discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 downward. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the board pass through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 that protrude forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 and then fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. In a state of being fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side to the left end portion of the rear wall in the rear view when viewed from the rear. An elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 disposed so as to face the portion 1163; and a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control substrate box 1170 is a thin horizontal box-shaped substrate base 1171 open on the rear side, and a thin horizontal box-like shape covering the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 open on the front side and fitted into the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the substrate base 1171 in a rear view, and a fixing piece 1174 which fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the substrate holder 1160, and the right end of the substrate cover 1172 from a rear view. And an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end of the back view two times up and down across the elastic fixing piece 1175 and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) pasted between the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and caulking is fixed in any one of the four sealing parts 1176. Has been. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulking-fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the main control board box 1170 remains open and closed. It has become. Thus, whether or not the main control board box 1170 is improperly opened can be clearly determined visually from the outside.

  In addition, since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed three times. Further, in the main control substrate box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off or peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or replaced with an incorrect main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. The main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170 by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention performance is obtained. It can be done.

[1-4E. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component 1110, and the display unit 1181 is disposed on the front of the front component 1110 so as to be visible from the player side, and the front component 1110. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 102 (A), the game state that changes depending on the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED to display the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 2101 consisting of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 The first special symbol memory display 1184 for the first special symbol is displayed on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184, and the first special lottery result is drawn by receiving the game ball to the first start port 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying as and the second starting opening 210 disposed on the upper right of the first special symbol display 1185 A second special symbol display 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls as a second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 and comprising two LEDs lined up and down.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc substantially along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from immediately above the second special symbol display 1186, and the number of reservations regarding passage of the gate unit 2401 by the game ball is An ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying and an ordinary lottery result arranged by passing the game ball through the gate part 2401 arranged under the ordinary symbol storage indicator is displayed as an ordinary symbol The special symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for the purpose, and the normal special symbol storage indicator 1188 are arranged side by side to the upper right side, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" when the "big hit" A round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (round number) of the open / close pattern 2103.

  The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and the light emission color to be emitted and the on / off blink Various game states (for example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed by the combination.

  Also, the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the first special symbols on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b when the number of holdings is two. When the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, when the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, the gaming ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the second special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of reservations can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol memory display lamp 1187a, 1187b lights together, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b when the number of reservations is four Both are now flashing. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Furthermore, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, the first special lottery The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first 7-segment LED light emission pattern (special symbol) is stopped. The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  The normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and is a combination of the light emission color to be emitted and the light on / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display an ordinary lottery result which is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate part 2401. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being variably displayed for a predetermined time as in the special symbol.

  Also, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game symbol passes through the gate portion 2401 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored ordinary symbols (stored) is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with a 10 round display lamp 1190a and a 15 round display lamp 1190b made of predetermined LEDs, and each lamp is turned on so that the round in the “big hit” game. Numbers can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 102A, the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 195). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as a basic configuration of the game board 4, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 which can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and which can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The store clerk or the like in the hall can be made to recognize the position of the display portion 1181 without confusion To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 102 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by seven-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol memory display 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  Since the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are composed of eight LED groups in addition to the same function and effect as described above can be achieved by the function display unit 1180 as well. It is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case of using the segment LED. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are hard to understand, it is possible to prevent the display on the function display unit 1180 from being concerned during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game, the movement of the game ball, The game can be made more enjoyable by concentrating on movable effects, effect images and the like.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from the game panel 1150 in the above-described game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here. The game panel 1200 of this embodiment is thinner than the above-described game panel 1150, and has a plate shape capable of dividing the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is divided by the front component 1110, according to the outer shape of the front component 1110. The panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The outer shape of the game panel 1200 panel plate 1210 is a polygonal shape slightly larger than the game area 1100, and the synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic board. The thickness of this panel board 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and it is necessary minimum that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail (not shown) is planted on the front or the table unit 2000 is attached. The thickness (8 to 10 mm) is considered. In this example, the panel board 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction, Is equipped. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 in the same manner as the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the attacker unit 2100, the center accessory 2500, and the like, and the attackers from the front side with respect to the openings 1215. The unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed (see FIG. 133 and the like).

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is substantially the same thickness as the gaming panel 1150 made of the above-described wood board (in this example, about 20 mm) of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

  The depth of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210 from the front surface, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220 It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engagement claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is positioned between the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower center and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. The rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end by a predetermined range from the lower end by the attachment support portion 1227 so that the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface protrudes rearward, and the amount of depression ( The depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 113 and the like) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 that is attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from projecting rearward beyond the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, ie, the game board 4 is used as the main unit frame 3 It can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601 of (pachinko machine 1).

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 which are disposed in the rear side of the mounting support 1227 and above the housing recess 630h and into which predetermined screws can be screwed. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be attached and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure, projecting forward from a fixing portion 3001 a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3001). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  An attachment hole of an appropriate diameter according to the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be attached and fixed such that the inner diameter of the hole is a mixture of a large diameter and a small diameter with respect to the attachment hole 1228 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portion 1230 It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed within a predetermined range from the lower end of the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height from the front side of the accommodation recess 630h. In this case, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the back surface of the front component 1110 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the gaming ball is fired from the bat firing device 650 But they are guided smoothly. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that the mounting hole 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. The box-like rib is formed for the purpose of

  The panel holder 1220 is provided with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and the game panel 1150 is held by the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set in the state of Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. The ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front lower right corner portion when viewed from the front are inserted. And an insertion hole 1234.

  In addition, the panel holder 1220 is a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and the lower end side is opened downward; A notch 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and cut away from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction is provided. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. The game board 4 is moved relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607. It is supposed to be regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224, the engagement piece 1225, and the engagement step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel board 1210, and the front side of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. Even if the installation device is not modified, it is possible to set the panel plate 1210 to the conventional obstacle nail planting device with the panel holder 1220 held, and to suppress the cost for planting the failure nail. Can be done.

  In addition, although the game panel 1200 of this example is not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. At the same time, a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, in the thin panel board 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that the panel board 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be realized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position such as an obstacle nail or a winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210.

  Further, since a plurality of mounting holes 1228 are provided in advance in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 and the like mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 The panel holder 1220 can be a common part of the pachinko machine 1 which does not depend on the model by designing the fixing portions of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228 even if they are at different positions. It has become.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 107 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the gaming board housed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 106, the crime prevention structure on the pivot support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. The metal crime prevention side plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and the metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of the synthetic resin in the door frame 5 are configured.

  As described above, the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and the dimension in the vertical direction is substantially the same as the dimension in the vertical direction of the main body frame base 600 In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. This side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction, extends in the front-rear direction, and forms a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending from the front end of the side piece 952a to the inner side (open side) in a substantially right angle direction. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and extending inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a in a substantially perpendicular direction. And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the security side plate 950 is formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section opening inward (open side) by the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c.

  The side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d disposed in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the main body frame 3 is increased and the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, etc. In the outer side of the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the support side, a support U-shaped protruding piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (the support side) is provided. In the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, the door frame 5 is mounted and supported only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main frame 3 and the main frame 3, the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main frame 3 becomes large. There is a risk of fraud. On the other hand, in the crime prevention structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side plate 950. A rear-side piece of the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is axially supported. The side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcedly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotally U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 abuts on the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 from moving away from the main body frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being broken open. It is possible to prevent the fraudulent action such as opening the door frame 5 against 3 being performed.

  Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 formed of metal in the body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward than the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is tentatively Even if is destroyed, illegal tools such as a piano wire can not penetrate into the game area 1100 on the front of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and cheating is performed. Can be reliably prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the security side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It can be fully countered against the destruction of the. Also, in general, in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1. From the (front) side, it is almost impossible to allow the unauthorized tool to enter behind the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, a prize ball base 710, a tank rail 731 and a prize ball device 740 in the main frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 can be used as the rear or side of the game board 4 housed in the main frame 3. Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is not opened, it can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found, and it can be prevented that an illegal act is performed. In addition, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to make the installation of the unauthorized device fooling, and it becomes possible to increase the deterrence against fraud. ing.

  In addition, since the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. 3 When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the board 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 Therefore, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board showing the second attacker unit in an easy-to-see manner, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from diagonally right front, and FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the left front. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from behind. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear FIG.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and the game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. From the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when it is attached to the pachinko machine 1 at the front view lower right corner of the front component 1110 and a frame-shaped front component 1110 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven A plurality of function display units 1180 disposed at visible positions, and a plurality of front-side components 1110 attached to the rear side of the front component 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrating in the front and back direction with a predetermined shape corresponding to the game area 1100 And a plate-like game panel 1200 that defines the rear end of the game area 1100.

  The game panel 1200 of this example is a transparent panel plate 1210 formed in a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110 and having an outer shape smaller than that of the front component 1110; And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110 for holding the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner from the front side. The opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  In addition, a decorative seal 1102 having a pattern according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the front side of the transparent panel plate 1210 on the game panel 1200 of this example (see FIG. 113). The decorative seal 1102 is formed with an opening 1102 a penetrating a predetermined amount (for example, 0.2 mm to 1 mm) large relative to the outer diameter of the obstacle nail G implanted in the panel plate 1210. And the decorative seal 1102 does not come in contact with it. By the way, when a contraction difference occurs between the decorative seal 1102 and the panel plate 1210 due to temperature change, aging, etc., the decorative seal 1102 is pulled or pushed by the obstacle nail G moving with the panel plate 1210. Although there is a risk that the decorative seal 1102 may be wrinkled and the appearance may be deteriorated, the decorative seal 1102 is provided with the opening 1102 a having a diameter larger than that of the obstacle nail G, so only the gap with the obstacle nail G at the opening 1102 a It is possible to avoid contact with the obstacle nail G to avoid being pulled or pushed, and it is possible to prevent wrinkles from being generated in the decorative seal 1102 due to temperature change, aging change, etc. The appearance of the gaming panel 1200 (within the gaming area 1100) can be maintained in a good state.

  This decorative seal 1102 is partially applied to a transparent film so that a pattern etc. has translucency, and the decoration of the ball guiding unit 3060 in the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side through the transparent portion The members 3064, 3065, the lower back-front movable effect unit 3600, and the like are visible from the player side (see FIG. 109). Further, since the decorative seal 1102 is provided so that the pattern or the like has translucency as described above, the back left top decorative unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, the back left decorative member 3704 in the back left movable effect unit 3700, and the like. By emitting light in a plane, light can be emitted as if the pattern is self-luminous. As a result, the design (decorative sticker 1102) of the gaming panel 1200 that divides the rear end of the gaming area 1100 emits light, so that the design (the gaming area 1100) can stand out, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. The pachinko machine 1 can be attached.

  In addition, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached from the front to the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200, a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a back side of the back unit 3000 And a liquid crystal display device 1900 having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, which can be viewed from the player side, and a substrate attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side. A holder 1160 and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 are provided.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the present example is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the upper left side of the attacker unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2100 arranged on the upper side of the out port 1151 in the lower part in the game area 1100. The front left movable effect unit 2300, the gate member 2400 disposed on the upper side of the front left movable effect unit 2300 and slightly on the left side from the center in the vertical direction in the game area 1100, and the substantially central portion of the game area 1100. And a center character 2500 in the form of a frame.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is a box shape attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and opened on the front side, and a back box 3001 in which an opening 3001c facing the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is formed on the rear wall 3001b. In the back box 3001, near the front surface, the back left upper decoration unit 3050 is arranged at the left corner in front view above the opening 3001c and can be decorated with light emission, and near the front surface in the back box 3001 and below the opening 3001c. , A ball guidance unit 3060 for guiding the game ball received by the front unit 2000 downward, a back middle movable production unit 3100 attached to the front side of the rear wall 3001b in the back box 3001, and a back middle movable in the back box 3000 Back-up back movable effect unit 3200 disposed on the upper side and front side of the rendering unit 3100, and back-up back movable effect unit The back-front movable movable effect unit 3400 disposed on the front side of 3200, the back-bottom rear movable movable effect unit 3500 disposed between the ball guidance unit 3060 and the back-middle movable performance unit 3100 in the back box 3000, and the ball guidance A back-under-front movable effect unit 3600 attached to the front side of the unit 3060, and a back-left movable effect unit 3700 disposed on the left side of the opening 3001c of the back box 3000 and in front of the back-middle movable effect unit 3100. .

  The back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 has a substantially rectangular opening 3001 c penetrating in the back and forth direction in the back wall 3001 b so that the display screen faces the front (player's side) from the opening 3001 c. A liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the rear wall 3001 b of the back box 3001.

  Further, on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control board 4010 having a peripheral control part 4140 and a liquid crystal control part 4150 is provided, as will be described in detail later. There is.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged at an upper portion of the out-out 1151 at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and is supported by the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210), and the attacker unit 2100. The front left movable effect unit 2300 that is arranged on the upper left side of the game area 1100 and extends from the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to the center side in the left-right direction, and on the upper left side of the front left movable effect unit 2300 A gate member 2400 that is disposed and supported on the front surface of the gaming panel 1150 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is disposed at a substantially central portion of the gaming area 1100 and supported by the gaming panel 1150 are provided.

  Although the details will be described later, the first start port 2101 where the gaming ball can always be received, and the gate section of the gate member 2400 disposed under the first start port 2101 in the attack unit 2100 of the front unit 2000. The second starting opening 2102 which can receive the game ball according to the normal lottery result which is drawn when the game ball passes through 2401 and the first starting opening 2101 which is disposed below the second starting opening 2102 The special winning opening 2103 which can receive the gaming ball according to the special lottery result which is drawn by the reception of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102, and two each on the left and right sides above the big winning opening 2103 And four general winning ports 2104 which are arranged and can receive game balls at all times.

  In addition, although the details will be described later in the attacking unit 2100 in the front unit 2000, an object located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 on both the left and right sides of the big winning opening 2103 (for example, a player playing this pachinko machine 1) Is provided with a pair of projector units 2150 (2150L, 2150R) that project a predetermined image. The projector unit 2150 makes it difficult for light to be irradiated (projected) to enter the player's field of view.

  The front left movable effect unit 2300 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is formed so as to become lower toward the right in a front view, and a game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 is sent to the game area 1100. It has a shelf 2301a that can be guided to the center side in the left-right direction in. As will be described in detail later, the front left movable effect unit 2300 includes three decorative bodies 2302, 2303, and 2304 simulating lanterns on the lower side of the shelf 2301a, and can be swung according to the gaming state. Can be done. Further, the front left movable effect unit 2300 is formed to form a pair with the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center character 2500.

  Further, the gate member 2400 of the front unit 2000 is provided with a gate portion 2401 having a size that allows only one game ball to pass therethrough, and a gate sensor for detecting the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2401. 2402 is provided.

  The center character 2500 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a large opening 1215 formed substantially at the center of the panel plate 1210, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side is visible from the player side. It is formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be used. In this center role 2500, a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502 in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210) and a game ball flowing down the inside of the game area 1100 are prevented from entering the frame. A circumferential wall 2503, a warp inlet 2504 opened at a predetermined position of the circumferential wall 2503, a warp outlet 2505 for releasing game balls entering the warp inlet 2504 into a frame, and a gaming ball released from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction And a stage 2510 for releasing the ball into the game area 1100 and returning it to the game area 1100 after rolling.

  Further, although details will be described later, the center role 2500 has an object detection unit 2530 capable of detecting an object located on the front side (the player side) of the game area 1100 and A logo decoration unit 2540 disposed along an arc-shaped outer periphery in the right direction, a second attacker unit 2550 disposed below the logo decoration unit 2540 and to the right of the stage 2510, and a second attacker unit 2550 And a front right movable effect unit 2600 arranged to be paired with the front left movable effect unit 2300 on the side.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the attacker unit, and FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the bottom rear. Moreover, FIG. 119 is a front view of (a) an attacker unit, (b) is a BB sectional view in (a). Further, FIG. 120 is an explanatory view showing a projection area by the projector unit of the attacker unit.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 formed in the lower portion of the center in the left-right direction of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and then the game panel It is fixed to the front of 1200 (panel board 1210). The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of receiving openings (prize openings) in which the game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the first start port 2101 disposed at the uppermost position in the approximate center in the left-right direction, the second start port 2102 disposed below (directly below) the first start port 2101, and the second start port A rectangular prize-winning port 2103 arranged below (directly below) 2102 and extending in the left-right direction larger than the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 and a prize-winning port at a position higher than the big winning port 2103. A total of four general winning openings 2104 are provided, two on each of the left and right sides of 2103.

  The upper side of the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open, and game balls can be always accepted (winning). On the other hand, the second start port 2102 disposed below the first start port 2101 has a pair of vane-shaped movable pieces 2105 disposed substantially upright on the left and right sides of the second start port 2102 as illustrated. Thus, the space between the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2101 is closed, and the gaming ball can not be received by the second starting opening 2102 in the illustrated state. The lower end side of the pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second start port 2102 is pivotally supported rotatably, and the upper end side is pivoted in a direction away from each other to expand the second start port The game ball is ready to be received at 2102. That is, the second start port 2102 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2105.

  Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing member 2106 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2106 is pivotally supported about a substantially lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it impossible to receive the game ball, and the upper side is directed to the front side. When it is pivoted to move, it is possible to open the big winning opening 2103 and make it possible to receive the game ball. That is, the special winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening by the opening / closing member 2106.

  In the attacker unit 2100, the width in the left-right direction of the first starting opening 2101 is slightly larger than the outline of the gaming ball, and the size (width) is such that the gaming ball can be received one by one. In addition, the second start opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are rotated in the direction away from each other to expand three times the width of the game ball The width is about 5 times. Further, the winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the opening / closing member 2106 is in the open state is five to eight times the width of the outer shape of the gaming ball. As a result, in a state where the respective winning openings 2101, 2102, and 2103 can be received, the game ball can be more easily accepted as the lower winning opening.

  Further, the four general winning ports 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 are opened upward on both the left and right sides with the large winning port 2103 interposed therebetween, and are arranged at higher positions as they move away from the large winning port 2103. The first start opening 2101, the second start opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103 are arranged substantially symmetrically with respect to an axis connecting the centers in the left-right direction.

  The attacker unit 2100 of this example is attached to the front of the panel board 1210 in the gaming panel 1200, and has a first starting opening 2101 and a big winning opening 2103 at a position corresponding to the center of the gaming area 1100 in the left-right direction. , And a plate-like base plate 2110 capable of forming the second start opening 2102 and the general winning opening 2104 and a lower front surface of the first start opening 2101 in the base plate 2110 and capable of rotating a pair of movable pieces 2105 On the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103 in the base plate 2110. And four side receiving members 2112 which are attached and open at the upper side and the rear side.

  The attacker unit 2100 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110, pivotally supports an opening / closing member 2106 that opens and closes the grand prize winning opening 2103, and rotationally drives the pair of movable pieces 2105 and the opening / closing member 2106. An attacker driving unit 2120 to be operated, and a predetermined object (for example, a player) that is attached to the left and right sides of the attacker driving unit 2120 on the rear side of the base plate 2110 and is located in front of the attacker unit 2100 (player side). And a pair of projector units 2150 capable of projecting an image.

  The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and the surface is decorated with a shallow relief. The base plate 2110 has an opening 2110 a which has a size that allows the game ball to pass therethrough in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the second start opening 2102. Further, the base plate 2110 is provided with a hook portion 2110 b which can be extended rearward from the position where the first starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 are formed and which can guide the gaming ball. Further, the base plate 2110 is formed at a position below the general winning port 2104 between the two general winning ports 2104 arranged on both the left and right sides of the grand winning port 2103, and the front lens of the projector unit 2150 is provided. It has a circular lens opening 2110 c facing the lens.

  The central receiving member 2111 attached to the front surface of the base plate 2110 in the attacker unit 2000 is formed in a fan shape in which the front surface bulges upward. Although not shown in detail, the central support member 2110 includes a pair of shaft portions extending rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at an interval wider than the left and right width of the opening 2110a in the base plate 2110. The movable piece 2105 can be pivotally supported by these shaft portions.

  Further, the four side receiving members 2112 are formed in a disk shape on the front surface, and are formed in a bowl shape in which the upper side and the rear side are released.

  Further, the attacker drive unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 includes a start port solenoid 2121 for opening and closing a pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second start port 2102, and a rear side of the base plate 2110 that supports the start port solenoid 2121. A starter opening drive mechanism base 2123 attached to the main body, an attachment solenoid 2124 for opening and closing an opening and closing member 2106 for closing the big winning opening 2103, and an attachment solenoid 2124 while supporting the opening and closing member 2106 rotatably. An attacker drive mechanism base 2126 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 below the start port drive mechanism base 2123, and a game ball received at the second start port 2102 supported at a predetermined position of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. A second start port sensor 2127 for detecting A count sensor 2128 that detects a game ball that is supported at a position different from the start port sensor 2127 and received in the special winning opening 2103, and a start port solenoid 2121, an attack solenoid 2124, and a second that are supported by the upper surface of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. A starter sensor 2127 and an attacker unit relay board 2130 for relaying the connection between the count sensor 2128 and the main control board 4100 are provided.

  The start port solenoid 2121 has a plunger which can be advanced and retracted by energization and urged in a projecting direction by a coil spring, although not shown, and the second start port 2102 is below the first start port 2101. The start port drive mechanism base 2123 supports the plunger so as to protrude forward at the rear position. In the present embodiment, when the starting opening solenoid 2121 is energized, the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2121 retracts against the biasing force of the coil spring, and the pair of movable pieces is engaged via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The upper ends 2105 rotate in directions away from each other, and the second start port 2102 is in an open state.

  Further, the start port drive mechanism base 2123 is formed in a box shape so that the start port solenoid 2121 can be accommodated and supported from the front side. The first guiding portion 2123a that guides the game ball that has circulated through the portion 2110b rearward, and the gaming ball that is formed below the portion that supports the starting port solenoid 2121 and is received in the second starting port 2102 is guided downward. And a second induction portion (not shown in detail).

  Although not shown in the drawings, similarly to the start port solenoid 2121, the attacher solenoid 2124 in the attacher drive unit 2120 can be advanced and retracted by energization and has a plunger biased in a projecting direction by a coil spring. In the present embodiment, when power is applied to the attachment solenoid 2124, the plunger of the attachment solenoid 2124 is retracted, and the upper end of the open / close member 2106 is relatively moved forward via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The special winning opening 2103 is in an open state.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, the first start port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 are in a state where they can always accept game balls. On the other hand, in the second starting port 2102, a pair of movable members are driven by energizing the starting port solenoid 2121 in accordance with a normal lottery result in which a game ball passes through the gate portion 2401 in a gate member 2400 described later. The piece 2105 is spread and can be received. Also, in the big winning opening 2103, according to the special lottery result (for example, the special lottery result is “big hit” by receiving the game ball in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 (start winning prize). ”), The opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern and can be received by energizing the attacker solenoid 2124.

  Also, the attacker unit 2100 includes a big prize opening decoration board 2131 supported on the lower part of the attacker driving mechanism base 2126 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the upper surface, so that the inside of the big prize opening 2103 can be decorated with light emission. It has become.

  Also, the two projector units 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 are attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 and have a translucent mounting base 2151, and a substantially cylindrical projector main body 2152 mounted from the rear side to the mounting base 2151. A cover attached to the rear side of the mounting base 2151 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side thereof, and the rear side of the attacker side decorative substrate 2153 and the projector body 2152 covering the rear side of the mounting base 2151 And 2154.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (b), the projector main body 2152 of the projector unit 2150 is arranged at the rear of the main body and can radiate light forward (in this example, a high-intensity white LED is used). And a plurality of lens groups 2157 disposed on the front side of the light source unit 2156, and an image film 2158 on which an image to be projected that is disposed at a predetermined position in the lens group 2157 is depicted. The projector unit 2150 can project the image depicted on the image film 2158 onto an object positioned in the projection range in front of the projector unit 2150 by causing the light source unit 2156 to emit light. ing.

  In this example, the optical axes of the left and right projector units 2150R and 2510L do not intersect with each other, and images can be projected to different positions. Also, in this example, the optical axis of the projector unit 2150 is set so that the image is projected to the projection area TR from both shoulders to both chests to the player seated in the normal state on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (See FIG. 120).

  In this attacking unit 2100, the gaming balls received to the first starting opening 2101 and the four general winning openings 2104 pass to the passage hole 3061a and the general discharge passage 3061b of the unit base 3061 in the ball guiding unit 3060 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is to be sent.

  Also, the attacker unit 2100 is discharged downward after the game ball received in the second starting port 2102 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2127 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. ing. Furthermore, the attacker unit 2100 is configured such that gaming balls received to the special winning opening 2103 are discharged downward after being detected by the count sensor 2128.

  The attacker unit 2100 of this embodiment arranges the attacker solenoid 2124 so that the advancing and retracting direction of the plunger 2124a is in the left and right direction, and places the attacker solenoid 2124 in a position as close as possible to the opening and closing member 2106. Therefore, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2100 can be shortened by 5 to 30% compared to the conventional product, and the rear space of the attacker unit 2100 can be secured more widely. .

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 of this example is configured so that two projector units 2150 allow other pachinko machines arranged on the opposite side of the object (eg, player, game hall) located outside the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Machine, wall, etc.) can be projected and displayed, can provide the player with a novel image effect that has not existed in conventional pachinko machines, and attracts the player's attention strongly It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and to entertain the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, when the projector unit 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 is caused to emit light according to the game state, as shown in FIG. 120, a predetermined image is projected and displayed on the projection area TR covering the player's shoulders, arms and chest. However, since it is a position that is not directly noticeable by the player, a player who does not know the light emitting effect by the projector unit 2150 does not notice even if the effect by the projector unit 2150 is started. I will continue playing. On the other hand, since the projection area TR is an area extending from the shoulder to the arm of the player, the image projected from the projector unit 2150 is projected onto the front half of the player's shoulder, arm, etc. When viewed from the side, a part of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 can be seen, and another player can easily notice the effect (the arrival of a chance) by the projector unit 2150. Therefore, other players than the player himself / herself notice the arrival of the opportunity first, and the people around the player become aware of the light emission effect by the projector unit 2150 for the first time. Therefore, not only the player playing the game with the pachinko machine 1 but also other players can increase the sense of expectation for the game together, and make it easy to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play the game. It is possible to

  In addition, since an image is displayed to the player by the projector unit 2150, the player can be greatly surprised by presenting an image effect which has not been seen with a conventional pachinko machine, and the player's attention While being able to attract strongly with respect to the image etc. which are projected, a player can be entertained by the image etc. which are projected, and it can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

  When a predetermined image is projected and displayed on the player by the projector unit 2150, the light emission decoration is turned off or reduced in each of the decoration units capable of emitting light and provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4. Thus, a part of the player's body located in the projection area TR illuminated by the light emission of the projector unit 2150 may be seen by the player on the glass plate 594 of the glass unit 590 of the door frame 5. This makes it easy to notice the light-emitting effect by the projector unit 2150, and the effect by the projector unit 2150 can be enjoyed.

  In addition, the object detection means 2530 provided in the center accessory 2500 described later detects the seating position of the player, and the projector unit 2150 (2150L or 2150R) corresponding to the seating position of the player emits light. It is also possible to allow the player to reliably project a predetermined image.

  Further, when the projector unit 2150 in the attacker unit 2100 detects an illegal act, the light source unit 2156 emits light.

[2-3. Front left movable production unit]
Next, the front left movable effect unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 124. 121A is a perspective view of the front left movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121B is a perspective view of the front left movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the front left movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the front left movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the front left movable effect unit.

  The front left movable effect unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in the game area 1100 on the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. It is fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 so as to be in contact with the outer periphery.

  In the front left movable effect unit 2300 of this example, one side in a front view is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100, and the outer shape in a front view is formed in a substantially triangular shape and a shallow box The first unit body 2301 and the lower left first decorative body 2302 disposed in the unit main body 2301 and rotatably supported at the upper end side and formed into a shape imitating a lantern, in a front view left side of the lower left first decorative body 2302 A lower left second decorative body 2303 that is disposed in the unit main body 2301 and that is rotatably supported at the upper end side and is shaped like a lantern, and is smaller than the lower left first decorative body 2302, The lower left first decorative body 2302 is movably supported within a predetermined range, and is disposed on the rear side of the unit main body 2301. A lower left side drive solenoid 2330 for moving and driving the lower first decorative body 2302 and a lower left second decorative body 2303, and a lower left side drive solenoid 2330 are mounted on the rear side of the unit body 2301 and the unit body 2301. And a unit base 2304 that supports the movement support mechanism 2320 in cooperation with the unit.

  The front left movable effect unit 2300 includes an upper base plate 2305 attached to the front side of the unit base 2304 so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the rear end on the upper side of the unit main body 2301, and the rear end on the right side of the unit main body 2301 in front view. A right base plate 2306 attached to the front side of the unit base 2304 so as to extend rightward from the vicinity, a plate-shaped decorative member 2307 attached to the front left corner in the unit main body 2301, and an upper front end of the unit main body 2301 And a front lower decoration member 2309 attached to a lower corner of the unit body 2301 and having a predetermined decoration.

  Furthermore, the front left movable effect unit 2300 is attached to the front of the unit base 2304 on the rear side of the unit body 2301 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and the left side on the rear side of the unit body 2301 And a left decorative body decorative board 2311 which is disposed on the front side of the decorative board 2310 and attached to the front surface of the unit base 2304 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. Reference numeral 2312 in the drawing is a head cover that protects the tip of the plunger that moves forward and backward in the lower left side drive solenoid 2330. Further, the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is attached to the unit base 2304 so that the plunger advances and retreats in the left-right direction from the right side when viewed from the front.

  The unit main body 2301 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 has a box-shaped upper surface formed so as to become lower toward the right in a front view, and plays a game ball flowing down in the game area 1100. It is a shelf 2301 a that can be guided to the center in the left-right direction in the region 1100. Further, the unit main body 2301 is formed so that three-dimensional unevenness is formed on a bottom surface (a surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1200) formed in a box shape, and at least the bottom surface has translucency. Yes. The unit main body 2301 has an opening 2301b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper part of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303. The lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 arranged on the front side through the opening 2301b of the unit main body 2301 and the movement support mechanism 2320 are connected to each other.

  The movable support mechanism 2320 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 is, as illustrated, rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the unit body 2301 and the unit base 2304 at the lower end side, and the upper end side is the lower left first The lower end of the drive crank 2321 connected to the tip of the plunger in the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 at the approximate center of the longitudinal direction and the left side of the drive crank 2321 in a front view left side A hook-like operating link member 2322 rotatably supported on an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the unit body 2301 and the unit base 2304 on the side, and rotatably supporting the lower left second decorative body 2303 on the upper end side; Actuate so that actuating link member 2322 extends substantially parallel to drive crank 2321 And a, a connecting member 2323 for connecting to each other in a rotatable state and upper side of the upper side and the driving crank 2321 of link member 2322.

  The drive crank 2321 of the movable support mechanism 2320 is configured to support and connect the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the connecting member 2323 by one shaft member on the upper end side. Further, similarly to the drive crank 2321, the lower left second decorative body 2303 and the connecting member 2323 are supported and connected by one shaft member on the upper end side of the actuating link member 2322, respectively. Further, the drive crank 2321 and the actuating link member 2322 are formed such that the distance between the rotation axis and the axis supporting the decoration 2302, 2303 is the same. When the drive crank 2321 is rotated by the lower left side drive solenoid 2330, the movement support mechanism 2320 rotates so that the operation link member 2322 is always parallel to the drive crank 2321 via the connecting member 2323. Yes.

  As illustrated, in the present example, the connecting member 2323 is formed in a shape curved in an arc shape. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the front left movable presentation unit 2300 is equipped with the stopper which restrict | limits the rotation range of the drive crank 2321. FIG.

  As shown in the drawing, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 are each formed in a shape imitating a lantern and in a plate shape. Further, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are formed to have a light transmitting property. Although not shown in detail, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are assembled as the front left movable effect unit 2300, and the lower left first decorative body 2302 is the lower left second decorative body 2303. The lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are shaken by driving the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 so that they do not come into contact with each other.

  The upper base plate 2305 and the right base plate 2306 in the front left movable effect unit 2300 include plate-like flange portions 2305a and 2306a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200, respectively. The front left movable effect unit 2300 can be attached to the game panel 2300 by fixing the flange portions 2305a and 2306a of the upper base plate 2305 and the left base plate 2306 to the front surface of the game panel 1200. Further, the upper base plate 2305 and the right base plate 2306 are formed to have translucency.

  The left side decorative substrate 2310 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 emits light from the LED mounted on the front surface, and from the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 in front view in the front left movable effect unit 2300 The outer part can be decorated with light emission. Further, the left decorative body decorative substrate 2311 can emit light and decorate the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 by emitting light from the LED mounted on the front surface.

  Next, the movement of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 in the front left movable effect unit 2300 will be described. In the front left movable effect unit 2300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 124A, in the normal state (when the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is not energized), the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 are From the vertical state, the upper end side is inclined approximately 45 degrees toward the right, and the plunger of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is advanced from the main body.

  In a normal state, the load of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 supported at the upper ends of the drive crank 2321 and the operating link member 2322 causes the driving crank 2321 and the operating link member 2322 to be viewed from the front. Although the force for rotating in the clockwise direction is applied, a stopper (not shown) regulates the drive crank 2321 and the actuating link member 2322 so as not to further rotate in the clockwise direction.

  When the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is energized from this normal state, the plunger moves to the left in front view, and the drive crank 2321 connected to the tip of the plunger at the center in the longitudinal direction is centered on the lower end side in front view. It will turn counterclockwise. When the drive crank 2321 rotates, the actuating link member 2322 connected by the connecting member 2323 also rotates in the same direction as the drive crank 2321. In this example, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), the drive crank 2321 and the operating link member 2322 are in a vertical state even when the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is driven (energized) to retract the plunger. On the other hand, the upper end side is inclined to the right in front view.

  Then, when the drive crank 2321 and the actuating link member 2322 are pivoted in the counterclockwise direction by the drive of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decoration supported on their upper end The body 2303 will also rotate. The upper left end of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are pivotally supported (pivoted) respectively, and therefore, when the driving crank 2321 and the operating link member 2322 rotate, When the inertial force acts on the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 and the rotational movement is stopped, the inertial force swings around the upper end pivotally supported by the drive crank 2321 and the actuating link member 2322. Will move.

  On the other hand, when the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is de-energized while the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is energized (the state of FIG. 124 (b)), the plunger of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is in a free state. At this time, the drive crank 2321 and the actuating link member 2322 supporting the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are inclined in the right direction in a front view from the state where the upper end side is vertical Because the load is applied from the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are rotated clockwise in a front view. The force acts, and the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 rotate clockwise and automatically return to the position of the normal state.

  When the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 return to the normal state, inertial force acts on the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, respectively, and the rotational movement When is stopped, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 swing with a loose motion.

  Therefore, the front left movable effect unit 2300 of this example causes the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 to swing with a slight swing by repeating energization and de-energization of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 as appropriate. Can enjoy the movement of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, and also, by the swinging of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, the arrival of a chance etc. Can be made to suggest to people.

[2-4. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2400 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The gate member 2400 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1215 formed on the left side of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 on the left side and slightly above the center in the vertical direction. Is fixed to the front of the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210). The gate member 2400 has a gate portion 2401 having a width such that only one game ball can pass, and the gate sensor 2402 disposed in the gate portion 2401 detects the game ball having passed through the gate portion 2401. It can be done.

  Note that the gate member 2400 of the present example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the conventional gate member, and the portion on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1150 is the thickness of the game panel 1150. It will fit within. That is, only the wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 2402 extends from the rear surface of the game panel 1150.

[2-5. Center feature]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 to 134. FIG. 125 is a front view of the center character, FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the center character as seen from the front, and FIG. 127 is a perspective view of the center character as seen from the back. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. FIG. 130 is an enlarged front view showing the second attacker unit in the center accessory, and FIG. 131 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the second attacker unit. Further, FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the front right movable effect unit in the center character and disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the center character in the front right FIG. 134 is an explanatory drawing showing the movement of the front right movable effect unit in the center character.

  The center character 2500 of this example is inserted from the front side into an opening 1215 formed large so as to penetrate the approximate center of the transparent plate-like panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and the panel plate 1210 It is fixed to the front of the frame, and as shown in FIG. 108 etc., it has a large window 2501 penetrating in the back and forth direction in a frame shape that occupies most of the game area 1100.

  The center character 2500 has a shape of the outer periphery of the upper frame which is inclined linearly at a steep angle and lowered by a predetermined amount from the approximate center in the horizontal direction to the left in front view, and further gently toward the left It has a plurality of steps that are inclined to the On the other hand, the center accessory 2500 has an outer peripheral shape on the right side in the upper frame, which is a curved shape (arc shape) substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100. The outer periphery of the right half in the front view of the center character 2500 is formed in an arc shape along the inner periphery of the game area 1100.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a plate-like flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a game ball that bulges forward from the flange portion 2502 and flows down in the game area 1100 from the approximate center in the left-right direction. And a peripheral wall portion 2503 for guiding left and right and preventing entry of the gaming ball into the frame. Further, the center accessory 2500 is a warp inlet 2504 that opens to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall 2503 located on the front side of the panel board 1210 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter (see FIG. 111). And a warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and after the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 rolls in the left-right direction, into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100 And a stage 2510 disposed below the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501.

  The stage 2510 in the center character 2500 has a curved shape such that both ends in the left and right direction are generally high, and a wave shape in which the position corresponding to the approximate center in the left and right direction of the game area 1100 is slightly higher Is formed. The stage 2510 is formed on the lower upper surfaces (valleys) on both sides across the middle in the left-right direction, and the guide surface 2511 and the guide surface 2511 are formed so as to spread in the left-right It has a front wall 2512 that rises lower than the outer diameter of the game ball from the front end side except for the above part, and a rear wall 2513 that rises higher than the outer diameter of the game ball from the rear end side. The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2505 can be discharged to the front side (in the game area 1100) through the guide surface 2511.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 opens to the rear rear wall 2513 toward the rear of the rear wall 2513 with respect to the position of the apex that is slightly higher corresponding to the approximate center in the left-right direction on the stage 2510, and the chance that the game ball can enter. An entrance 2514, and a chance exit 2515 which is disposed directly below the chance entrance 2514 below the stage 2510 from which the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2514 can be released and opened forward. The game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2514 is released from the chance exit 2515 into the game area 1100. Further, as shown in FIG. 108 and the like, this chance exit 2515 is arranged immediately above the first start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2515 has a high probability. It can be received (wins) into the start port 2101.

  In this center role product 2500, substantially the entire stage 2510 is formed of a transparent member, and the back effect of the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side through the stage 2510 is visible from the player side It can be done.

  In addition, the center product 2500 includes an insertion frame-like portion 2506 that protrudes rearward from the inner peripheral edge side of the frame-like flange portion 2502 and is inserted into the opening 1215 formed in the panel plate 1210. And the insertion frame-shaped portion 2506 constitute a frame-shaped center main body frame 2520.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 closes the window portion 2501 penetrating in the front-rear direction and a transparent protective plate 2516 (see FIG. 128 and the like) disposed on the rear side of the stage 2510, and a game area 1100 (in the door frame 5). An object detection unit 2530 capable of detecting an object positioned on the front side (player side) of the glass unit 590) A logo decoration unit 2540 arranged along an arc-shaped outer periphery in a direction and showing the concept of the pachinko machine 1, a second attacker unit 2550 arranged below the logo decoration unit 2540 and on the right side of the stage 2510, a second Such as to be symmetrical with the front left movable effect unit 2300 across the middle in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 below the attacker unit 2550 Includes a front right movable direction unit 2600 disposed location, the.

  In the center character 2500, the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 2503 on the right side of the approximate center in the left-right direction in front view is shaped substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100. In the attached state, a gap slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball is formed from the top of the center character 2500 to the right along the outer periphery of the logo decoration unit 2540 to the upper end of the second attachment unit 2550 The player can easily hit a game ball into the second attacker unit 2550 (second game area 2551) by making a right strike. In addition, in a state where the center character 2500 is attached to the panel board 1210, an area of a predetermined width is formed on the outer periphery on the left side of the center character 2500 with the inner circumference of the game area 1100. .

  The object detection means 2530 of the center accessory 2500 includes an upper object detection sensor 2531 disposed at the periphery of the window 2501 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction, and a left object detection disposed at the left periphery of the game window 2501 when viewed from the front. A sensor 2532, a right object detection sensor 2533 disposed on the right periphery in a front view of the gaming window 2501, and a lower object detection sensor 2534 disposed below the right object detection sensor 2533 are provided.

  The object detection unit 2530 receives a light emitting unit that emits detection light including invisible light such as infrared light in a predetermined direction in front, and a reflected light of the detection light emitted from the light emitting unit disposed adjacent to the light emitting unit Each of the possible light receiving units is provided so that the hand or the like of the moving player can be detected within a predetermined range in front of the game area 1100. In addition, the object detection unit 2530 can detect each of the left, right, upper, and lower directions by the four object detection sensors 2531, 2523, 2533, and 2534, respectively. By the detection signals 2533 and 2534, it is possible to detect the moving direction, moving speed and the like of the hand or the like. In addition, the object detection means 2530 can perform the effect which a player can participate by operating at the time of the effect performed by the start winning, and provides an effect having a sense of unity with the player to further enjoy the player It is supposed to be.

  The object detection means 2530 enables detection of each of the object detection sensors 2531, 2523 and 2533 at the time of a predetermined gaming state, and causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 to move a hand in front of the game area 1100 in a predetermined direction. The effect image for prompting the player is displayed, and the player is given an opportunity to perform a predetermined effect by detecting the hand moved by the player in front of the game area 1100, and the player is made to participate in the effect of the game. It is intended to enhance interest.

  Although not shown in detail, the logo decoration unit 2540 of the center object 2500 is arranged on the rear side of the logo lens, which is three-dimensionally shaped so as to have translucency and the logo characters are lifted. A diffusing lens member having a plurality of prismatic lenses, and a transparent logo unit base disposed behind the diffusing lens member and supporting the diffusing lens member; A frame-shaped center main body frame 2520 is attached to the front side. The center accessory 2500 is attached to the rear side of the center main body frame 2520 at a position corresponding to the logo decoration unit 2540, and a logo decoration board 2541 having a plurality of LEDs (full color LEDs) mounted on the front face, and the logo decoration board 2541. And a substrate cover 2542 covering the rear side.

[2-5A. Second Attack Unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2550 in the center accessory 2500 will be described. The second attacker unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is disposed below the logo decoration unit 2540 at a position adjacent to the lower right side of the window 2501 when viewed from the front. The second attacker unit 2550 includes a second game area 2551 in which a game ball flowing down along the outer periphery on the right side of the front surface of the peripheral wall 2503 on the front side of the center main body frame 2520 can be circulated, and the second game area A second big prize opening 2552 that is arranged at a predetermined position in 2551 and can receive a game ball, a blade-like second opening and closing member 2553 that can open and close the second big prize opening 2552, and a second opening and closing member 2553 And a second attacker drive mechanism 2560 that is rotated according to the state to enable or disable the reception of the game ball into the second grand prize opening 2552.

  Further, the second attacher unit 2550 of the center character 2500 divides the rear end of the second game area 2551 and is formed substantially flush with the flange portion 2502 of the center main body frame 2520 and proceeds from the flange portion 2502 to the window portion 2501 The gaming ball received in the second large winning opening 2552 can be opened in the front-rear direction at a position downstream of the second large winning opening 2552 in the plate-like rear end wall 2554 and the second large winning opening 2552 in the rear end wall The second outlet sensor 2556 for detecting the game ball received by the second discharge hole 2555, the second big winning hole 2552, and a transparent circulation that makes it possible to guide the flow of the game ball in the second game area 2551. A guide member 2570 and a second attachment cover 2557 attached to the front of the flow guide member 2570 and having a predetermined decoration are provided.

  As illustrated, the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attachment unit 2550 is rotatably supported at its proximal end on an axis extending in the front-rear direction and its distal end is a free end, and the width increases toward the distal end Is formed in a blade shape (a shape similar to the cross-sectional shape of a wing such as an airplane). When the second opening / closing member 2553 is in a substantially vertically rising state with the base end side on the lower side, the second large winning opening 2552 can be closed (closed state), and the state is laid substantially horizontally. Then, the second big prize opening 2552 can be opened (opened state). Further, the second opening / closing member 2553 is provided with a pair of engagement protrusions 2553a that project rearward from the rear surface on the proximal end side, and the drive from the second attachment driving mechanism 2560 is transmitted through these engagement protrusions 2553a. It is possible to rotate by turning.

  In addition, the second attachment driving mechanism 2560 of the second attachment unit 2550 is disposed on the rear side of the rear end wall 2554, and as shown in FIG. 131, a second attachment solenoid 2561 having a plunger advancing and retracting in the left and right direction. And a rotation transmission piece 2562 for rotating the second opening / closing member 2553 by transmitting the advancing / retracting drive of the plunger in the second attachment solenoid 2561 to the engagement projection 2553a of the second opening / closing member 2553; And a bracket 2563 for supporting the second attachment solenoid 2561 and attached to the rear side of the center body frame 2520.

  The second attacker solenoid 2561 of the second attacker drive mechanism 2560 is supported by the bracket 2563 so that the plunger advances and retreats from the left side in a front view. Further, the rotation transmitting piece 2562 of the second attachment driving mechanism 2560 is rotatably supported by the bracket 2563 at the upper position on the upper side of the portion where the plunger of the second attachment solenoid 2561 advances and retracts, and the second attachment The lower end side extending downward from the solenoid 2561 is inserted between the pair of engagement protrusions 2553a of the second opening and closing member 2553, and the second attachment solenoid 2561 at a substantially middle portion in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). Connected to the tip of the plunger.

  Thereby, when the second attachment driving mechanism 2560 advances and retracts the plunger by the second attachment unit 2561, the turning transmission piece 2562 turns about the upper end, and the lower end of the turning transmission piece 2562 moves in an arc shape . Then, when the lower end of the rotation transmission piece 2562 moves in an arc shape, the lower end of the rotation transmission piece 2562 abuts on either of the pair of engagement projections 2553a in the second opening / closing member 2553 and the engagement projection 2553a abuts The second opening / closing member 2553 is rotated by being pushed in the moving direction of the lower end of the rotation transmitting piece 2562.

  In this example, when the second opening and closing member 2553 is raised, that is, when the second large winning opening 2552 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. Is suspended substantially vertically, and the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2561 is in the forward position. Further, in a state where the second opening and closing member 2553 is laid down, that is, when the second large winning opening 2552 is opened, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), the rotation transmission piece 2562 is counterclockwise in front view. The plunger of the second attachment solenoid 2561 is in the retracted position, as it is rotated by a predetermined angle (about 15 degrees) in the direction of.

  The distribution guide member 2570 of the second attack unit 2550 forms a plurality of flow paths through which the game balls can flow in the second game area 2551, and the game balls not accepted by the second large winning opening 2552 It can be released into 1100. As shown in FIG. 130, the flow guiding member 2570 is provided with an area entry port 2571, into which the gaming ball having flowed down along the outer periphery on the right side of the peripheral wall 2503 enters, and a game ball entering from the area entry port 2571. A crank-shaped decelerating flow path 2572 for decelerating the speed and gaming balls supplied from the decelerating flow path 2572 are formed so that the left end side is lowered in front view and the gaming ball is rolled leftward A shelf-shaped branch guide shelf 2573, a first branch port 2574 which opens downward with a predetermined width through which gaming balls can pass from the left end of the branch guide rack 2573 and which can communicate with the second big winning port 2552; A second branch port 2575 is opened toward the branch guide shelf 2573 on the left side of 2574 so that the game ball can pass and does not communicate with the second large winning opening 2552.

  In addition, the distribution guide member 2570 is a shelf-shaped branch port shelf 2576 inclined so that the right end is lowered in the front direction from the vicinity of the lower end of the second branch port 2575 and the front surface of the second large winning opening 2552 The second open / close member 2553 is pivotable wide on the right side so that the game ball entering the first branch port 2574 can be distributed, and the second large winning opening 2552 is disposed below the right end of the branch port shelf 2576 First channel 2577, a first discharge port 2578 which is open at the downstream end of the first channel 2577 and can release gaming balls into the game area 1100, and a second large winning opening 2552 disposed in the first channel 2577 And the discharge port 2555, the second flow path 2580 through which the gaming balls having entered the second branch 2575 flow, and the second flow path 2580 open at the downstream end of the second flow path 2580 to play the game ball Release into 1100 It includes a second outlet 2581, the.

  The first branch 2574 of the distribution guide member 2570 has the right end as the left end of the branch guide shelf 2573 and the left end as the left end of the branch port shelf 2576, and the opening width (width in the left-right direction) is the game The width is twice to three times the outer diameter of the sphere. In addition, the second branch 2575 of the distribution guide member 2570 has a size such that the size of the opening is slightly larger (for example, 0.5 mm to 1 mm) than the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In comparison, it is difficult for game balls to enter. In addition, the second branch port 2575 is disposed so that the lower end thereof is located slightly above the upper surface of the branch port shelf 2576, and is disposed so as to form a step with the branch port shelf 2576. Therefore, even if the game ball rolls on the branch opening shelf 2576 toward the second branch opening 2575, the game ball does not easily enter the second branch opening 2575 by coming into contact with the step.

  The branch opening shelf 2576 of the distribution guide member 2570 is formed to be shorter than the width of the first branch opening 3574, and the lower side of the right end is the upper end of the second big winning opening 2552 in front view. Further, in the first flow path 2577 of the flow guide member 2570, a second opening / closing member 2553 is rotatably disposed at a position substantially immediately below the right end of the branch port shelf 2576, and the second opening / closing member 2553 is rotated clockwise. The first discharge port 2578 is closed by the second opening / closing member 2553 when it is rotated in the direction of (2) and is laid down (the second big prize opening 2552 is in the open state). That is, when the second grand prize opening 2552 is in the open state, the game ball that has entered the first branch opening 2574 is guided to the second big prize opening 2552 by the second opening / closing member 2553 and is not released from the first discharge opening 2578. It is supposed to be.

  In this example, the distribution guide member 2570 and a part of the second attachment cover 2557 are formed transparent, so that the inside of the second game area 2551 can be viewed from the outside (the player side). ing. Further, in this example, the second count sensor 2556 is arranged on the upstream side of the discharge port 2555 in the large inlet flow path 2579 of the flow guide member 2570.

  The second attacher unit 2550 of this example causes the gaming ball having flowed down along the outer periphery on the right side of the peripheral wall 2503 of the center character 2500 to be decelerated once by the deceleration flow path 2572 and then rotated left by the branch guide shelf 2573. It is designed to guide the movement. Then, in the second attacker unit 2550, a first branch port 2574 that can communicate with the second large winning port 2552 and a second branch port 2575 that does not communicate with the second large winning port 2552 are opened on the left side of the branch guide shelf 2573. The player can be harassing and pounding, and the player can be entertained, because the game ball rolled and released from the branch guide shelf 2573 enters which branch port 2574, 2575. It has become.

  When the game ball released from the branch guide shelf 2573 enters the second branch port 2575, the game ball is released from the second discharge port 2581 into the game area 1100 through the second flow path 2580. As described above, since the size of the second branch port 2575 is only slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, most of the game balls released from the branch guide shelf 2573 are directed to the second branch port 2575. It does not enter, and enters into the first branch 2574.

  On the other hand, when the game ball released from the branch guide shelf 2573 enters the first branch port 2574, the game ball is sent to the first flow path 2577. Then, when the second opening and closing member 2553 rises and the second large winning opening 2552 is in the closed state, the gaming ball sent to the first flow path 2577 is not received by the second large winning opening 2552 at the lower end. It is discharged into the game area 1100 from the opened first discharge port 2578. On the other hand, when the second opening and closing member 2553 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front and the second large winning opening 2552 is in the open state, the gaming ball sent to the first flow path 2577 is opened and closed secondly. It is guided to the upper surface of the member 2553 and accepted to the second large winning opening 2552, and is circulated through the large inlet flow path 2579 and detected by the second count sensor 2556 before being discharged out of the game area 1100, 2551 from the outlet 2555 It will be. Further, when the second opening and closing member 2553 is in the open position, the first outlet 2578 is closed by the second opening and closing member 2553. Therefore, the second opening and closing member 2553 is sent to the first channel 2577 through the first branch 2574 A game ball is to be accepted in the second big winning opening 2552. In addition, depending on the timing at which the second opening and closing member 2553 performs the opening and closing operation, even if the gaming ball enters the first branch port 2574, it is not accepted to the second large winning opening 2552, and the game area 1100 from the first outlet 2578 May be released inwards.

  Thus, according to the second attacher unit 2550 of the center character 2500, when the second opening / closing member 2553 is pivoted to the open position and the second large winning opening 2552 is opened, the peripheral wall of the center character 2500 When the game ball enters between the outer periphery on the right side of the unit 2503 and the inner periphery of the game area 1100, the game ball is received to the second large winning opening 2552 through the first branch 2574 and the first flow path 2577. The game ball can be made to win the second large winning opening 2552 by such a hitting operation, and even a player who is not used to the pachinko machine 1 can easily enjoy it.

  Further, according to the second attacker unit 2550, the game ball is guided by the wall-shaped flow path by the distribution guide member 2570 in the second game area 2551 where the second big prize opening 2552 is arranged. Since the game ball is not guided by the nail, the guidance direction of the game ball is changed by tilting the obstacle nail due to the contact of the game ball or the like, and the probability of receiving the second big prize opening 2552 is changed. It is possible to certainly avoid the problem, to maintain the initial state over a long period of time, and to allow the player to be fully entertained.

[2-5B. Front right movable effect unit]
Next, the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 will be described. The front right movable effect unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged at a position symmetrical to the front left movable effect unit 2300 with the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 below the second attacker unit 2550. The front left movable effect unit 2300 is substantially symmetrical. This front-right movable effect unit 2600 is a shallow box-shaped unit in which one side in front view is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100, the outer shape in front view is formed in a substantially triangular shape, and the front side is opened. A main body 2601, a lower right first decorative body 2602 that is disposed in the unit main body 2601 and that is rotatably supported at the upper end side and is shaped like a lantern, A lower right second decorative body 2603, which is disposed in the unit main body 2601 and is rotatably supported at the upper end side and which is shaped like a lantern and is smaller than the lower right first decorative body 2602, and a lower right second decorative body The body 2603 and the lower right first decorative body 2602 are movably supported within a predetermined range and are disposed on the rear side of the unit main body 2601, and the right side through the movement support mechanism 2620. A lower right side drive solenoid 2630 for moving and driving the first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 and a lower right side drive solenoid 2630 are attached to the rear side and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2601, respectively. And a unit base 2604 supporting the movable support mechanism 2620 in cooperation with the main body 2601.

  Further, the front right movable effect unit 2600 is provided with a left base plate 2606 mounted on the front side of the unit base 2604 so as to extend leftward from near the rear end on the left side in a front view of the unit body 2601; A plate-shaped decorative member 2607 attached to the right corner, a front upper decorative member 2608 attached to the front end of the upper side of the unit body 2601 and having a predetermined decoration, and a front attached to the lower corner of the unit body 2601 and having the predetermined decoration A lower decoration member 2609 is provided.

  Further, the front right movable effect unit 2600 includes a right side decorative board 2610 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 2604 on the rear side of the unit body 2601 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and the right side on the rear side of the unit body 2601. A right decorative body decorative board 2611 disposed on the front side of the decorative board 2610 and attached to the front face of the unit base 2604 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof. Reference numeral 2612 in the drawing denotes a head cover that protects the tip of the plunger that moves forward and backward in the lower right side drive solenoid 2630. Further, the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is attached to the unit base 2604 so that the plunger advances and retreats in the left-right direction from the left side when viewed from the front.

  The unit main body 2601 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 is formed so that the upper surface formed in a box shape becomes lower toward the left in front view, and the inside of the second game area 2551 in the second attacker unit 2550 , And is a shelf 2601 a capable of guiding the gaming ball discharged from the first outlet 2578 or the second outlet 2581 to the center side in the left-right direction in the gaming area 1100. Also, the unit body 2601 has three-dimensional irregularities formed on the bottom surface (surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1200) formed in a box shape, and at least the bottom surface is formed to have translucency There is. In the unit body 2601, an opening 2601 b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper part of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603. The lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 disposed on the front side through the opening 2601 b of the unit body 2601 and the movable support mechanism 2620 are connected to each other.

  The movable support mechanism 2620 of the front right movable presentation unit 2600 is, as illustrated, rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the unit body 2601 and the unit base 2604 at the lower end side, and the upper end side is the lower right The drive crank 2621 connected to the tip of the plunger of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 at the approximate center of the longitudinal direction and the right side of the drive crank 2621 in a bowl shape rotatably supporting the first decorative body 2602 The lower end side is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the unit body 2601 and the unit base 2604, and the upper end side rotatably supports the lower right second decoration 2603. 2622 and the actuating link member 2622 operate so as to extend substantially parallel to the drive crank 2621 And a, a connecting member 2623 for connecting to each other in a rotatable state and upper side of the upper side and the driving crank 2621 of link member 2622.

  The drive crank 2621 of the movement support mechanism 2620 is configured to support and connect the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the connecting member 2623 with one shaft member on the upper end side. Similarly to the drive crank 2621, the operation link member 2622 is also supported and connected to the lower right second decorative body 2603 and the connection member 2623 by one shaft member on the upper end side. Further, the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 are formed such that the distance between the rotation axis and the axis supporting the decorative bodies 2602 and 2603 is the same distance. When the drive crank 2621 is rotated by the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, the movement support mechanism 2620 rotates so that the operation link member 2622 is always parallel to the drive crank 2621 via the connecting member 2623. ing.

  As shown in the figure, in this example, the connecting member 2623 is formed in a curved shape in an arc shape. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the front right movable presentation unit 2600 is equipped with the stopper which regulates the rotation range of the drive crank 2621.

  The lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 are each formed in a shape imitating a lantern, as shown in the figure, and formed in a plate shape. In addition, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are formed to have translucency. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, in the state where the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are assembled as the front right movable effect unit 2600, the lower right first decorative body 2602 is the lower right first decorative body 2602. It is positioned in front of the two decorations 2603 so that when the lower right first decoration 2602 and the lower right second decoration 2603 are shaken by driving the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, they do not contact each other. It has become.

  The right base plate 2306 in the front right movable effect unit 2600 is formed to have translucency. The right side decorative board 2610 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 emits the LED mounted on the front surface, thereby causing the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body in the front right movable effect unit 2600 in front view. A portion outside 2603 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, the right decorative body decorative substrate 2611 can light-decorate the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 by causing the LED mounted on the front surface to emit light.

  In the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center product 2500 of this example, the upper portion of the unit base 2604 is attached to the rear side of the center main body frame 2520.

  Subsequently, the movement of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 in the front right movable effect unit 2600 will be described. As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the front right movable effect unit 2600 of this example has the drive crank 2621 and the operating link member 2622 in the normal state (when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is not energized). The upper end side is inclined about 45 degrees from the vertical state toward the left, and the plunger of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is advanced from the main body.

  In a normal state, the load of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 supported on the upper ends of the drive crank 2621 and the operating link member 2622 makes the driving crank 2621 and the operating link member 2622 face front. Although the force to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by sight is applied, the stopper (not shown) restricts the drive crank 2621 and the actuating link member 2622 not to rotate in the counterclockwise direction any more. Yes.

  From this normal state, when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is energized, the plunger moves to the right in front view, and the drive crank 2621 connected to the tip of the plunger in the center in the longitudinal direction is centered on the lower end side. Will rotate in the clockwise direction. When the drive crank 2621 rotates, the actuating link member 2622 connected by the connecting member 2623 also rotates in the same direction as the drive crank 2621. In this example, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), even when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is driven (energized) and the plunger is retracted, the drive crank 2621 and the operating link member 2622 are in a vertical state. On the other hand, the upper end side is inclined toward the left in a front view.

  Then, when the drive crank 2621 and the actuating link member 2622 rotate in the clockwise direction by a predetermined range by the drive of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, the lower right first decorative body 2602 supported at the upper end thereof and the lower right first one The second decoration 2603 is also rotated. Since the upper end of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are rotatably supported (pivoted), the rotational movement of the drive crank 2621 and the operating link member 2622 is accompanied by the rotational movement. Then, when the inertial force acts on the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 and the rotational movement stops, the upper end centered on the drive crank 2621 and the actuating link member 2622 is centered by the inertial force. It will swing with Yura Yura.

  On the other hand, when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is deenergized while the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is energized (state of FIG. 134 (b)), the plunger of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 becomes free. . At this time, the drive crank 2621 and the actuating link member 2622 supporting the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are inclined in the left direction in a front view from the state where the upper end side is vertical Since it is in the state, the load acting from the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 causes the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 to be counterclockwise when viewed from the front respectively As a result, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 rotate in the counterclockwise direction and return to the position of the normal state automatically. It will be done.

  Then, even when the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 return to the normal state, inertia forces act on the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603, respectively. When the rotational movement is stopped, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 will oscillate with Yura Yura.

  Therefore, the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center character 2500 of the present example repeats the energization and deenergization of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 appropriately to lower right first decorative body 2602 and lower right second decoration. The body 2603 can be swung with the head and the movement of the lower right first decoration 2602 and the lower right second decoration 2603 can be enjoyed, and the lower right first decoration 2602 and the lower right second decoration By swinging the body 2603, the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance or the like.

[2-6. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Subsequently, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 135 is a front view of the back unit in the game board, FIG. 136 is a perspective view of the back unit in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the back unit in the game board as viewed from the rear. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main components and seen from the back is there.

  The back unit 300 of this example is a box-like unit attached to the back side of the game panel 1150 and opened on the front side, and the back wall 3001 b has an opening 3001 c facing the display screen of the liquid crystal display 1900. A back upper left decorative unit 3050 which is disposed in the front view left corner above the opening 3001c near the front in the box 3001 and can be lighted and decorated according to the game state, and below the opening 3001c near the front in the back box 3001 A ball which is disposed on the side and guides the gaming ball received by the first start opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 and the second big winning opening 2552 of the center role 2500 to a predetermined position below. It is attached to the front side of the back wall 3001b of the induction unit 3060 and the back box 3001 and the opening 300 according to the game state. The back inside movable effect unit 3100 which closes a part of c, the back up back movable effect unit 3200 which is disposed on the upper side and the front side of the back inside movable effect unit 3100 in the back box 3000 and which moves according to the game state A back upper front movable effect unit 3400 disposed on the front side of the upper back movable effect unit 3200 and movable according to the gaming state, and disposed between the ball guiding unit 3060 and the back movable effect unit 3100 in the back box 3000 Back and back movable production unit 3500 movable according to the state, back lower front movable presentation unit 3600 attached to the front side of the ball guidance unit 3060 and movable according to the gaming state, and on the left side of the opening 3001 c of the back box 3000 A back left movable effect unit 3700 which is disposed on the front side of the movable effect unit 3100 during the back movement and is movable according to the gaming state. To have.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a horizontally long bottom substrate base 3010 attached near the lower end of the rear surface of the back wall 3001b of the back box 3001, a panel relay substrate 3011 attached to the rear side of the back bottom substrate base 3010, and a back box. 3001 is a plate-like oblong back base board base 3012 that is rotatably attached along the lower side of the opening 3001c on the rear face of the rear wall 3001b, a lamp drive board 3013 attached to the rear face of the back base board base 3012, and a back box 3001 is a vertically long rectangular back right substrate base 3014 attached to the left side in the rear view of the opening 3001c on the rear surface of the rear wall 3001b, a motor drive substrate 3015 attached to the rear side of the back right substrate base 3014, and a back box 3001 A laterally elongated plate-shaped back mounted on the upper side of the opening 3001c at the rear surface of the rear wall 3001b A substrate base 3016, and a back on the rear relay board 3017 attached to the rear side of the back substrate base 3016, a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is a shallow box-like back left upper substrate base 3018 that is attached to the upper left corner in a front view inside the back box 3001 and opened in the right direction, and a back left attached to the right side of the back left upper substrate base 3018. A relay board 3019 and a wiring support member 3020 extending in the vertical direction and attached to the vicinity of the front end of the right side surface in the back box 3001 are provided.

  Although not shown, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 on the right side of the opening 3001c in the rear view and substantially at the center in the vertical direction. A lock member is provided for holding the cover.

  Although detailed description of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 is omitted, the back upper left decoration unit 3050, the ball guiding unit 3060, the back middle movable effect unit 3100, the rear upper and rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper back are appropriately positioned. The front movable effect unit 3400, the back and back movable effect unit 3500, the back and front movable effect unit 3600, the back left movable effect unit 3700, the substrate bases 3010, 3012, 3014, 3016, and 3018, the wiring support member 3020, etc. It has mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting.

  Further, the back box 3001 is provided with a flange-like fixing portion 3001a extending outward from the front end, and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portion 3001a. Further, as shown in FIG. 139 etc., the back box 3001 has a fixed frame piece 3001 d that extends in a frame shape rearward at a position outside a predetermined width from the periphery of the opening 3001 c on the rear surface side of the back wall 3001 b The liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the fixed frame piece 3001 d from the rear side. The insertion recess is formed at a predetermined position of 3001 d and into which the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted.

[2-7. Back upper left decorative unit]
Next, the back upper left decoration unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the back upper decoration unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is disposed in the vicinity of the upper left front end in a front view of the back box 3001, and the upper end is attached to the upper front edge of the back box 3001. The lower end is attached to the upper portion of the back left movable effect unit 3700 described later. The back left top decorative unit 3050 is a shallow box-like light-transmitting back left top decorative member 3051 that is decorated on the front and opened at the back, and a base member 3052 that closes the rear end of the back left top decorative member 3051. And a rear upper left decorative substrate (not shown) mounted on the front side of the base member 3052 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  This back upper decoration unit 3050 is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 formed in a substantially circular shape, and the back left upper decoration board LED provided inside emits light. The upper left decorative member 3051 can be appropriately decorated with light emission in a planar shape. By light-emitting the back upper left decorative member 3051 in a planar shape, the corresponding part of the decorative seal 1102 attached to the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210) that defines the rear end of the game area 1100 can be brightly decorated. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 more conspicuous by making the inside of the game area 1100 brighter.

[2-8. Ball guidance unit]
Next, the ball guiding unit 3060 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. 140 is a front perspective view of the ball guiding unit in the back unit, and FIG. 141 is a rear perspective view of the ball guiding unit. The ball guiding unit 3060 of this example is arranged at the front end in the back box 3001 and below the opening 3001c in the back unit 3000, and in the state assembled to the game board 4, the rear side of the center accessory 2500 Thus, it is positioned below the stage 2510. In addition, the ball guiding unit 3060 includes the game balls received in the first starting port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000, and the second big winning port of the second attacker unit 2550 in the center accessory 2500. The game ball received in 2552 can be received and guided and discharged downward.

  The ball guiding unit 3060 includes a unit base 3061 attached to the lower part of the front end of the back box 3001 and extending in the left-right direction; A transparent substrate cover 3063 covering the front surface of the lower stage decorative substrate 3062, a lower stage left decorative member 3064 and a lower stage right decorative member 3065 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3061 along the lower edge of the substrate cover 3063, It has.

  As shown in the figure, the upper end of the unit base 3061 is formed in a loose V shape such that the center in the left-right direction is lower, as shown in the figure. It is formed in a loose V shape along the upper end of the base 3061. A unit base 3061 of the ball guiding unit 3060 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction, and is a passage hole through which the gaming ball received by the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and guided backward by the hook 2110b can pass. 3061a, a general discharge passage 3061b which is received by the general winning opening 2104 in the attacker unit 2100 and receives the game ball guided to the rear by the hook portion 2110b and guides it downward, and a second winning opening 2552 in the center character 2500 And a second discharge passage 3061c for receiving the game ball guided from the discharge port 2555 to the rear of the center character 2500 and guiding the game ball downward.

  The general discharge passage 3061b of the unit base 3061 is formed at a position corresponding to the four general winning openings 2104 in the attacker unit 2100, respectively, and the gaming balls received in the two adjacent general winning openings 2104 are separately provided. It is formed to be merged after receiving and discharged downward from one place. The general discharge passage 3061b is open at the front side, and the front end side is closed by the rear surface of the attacker unit 2100 and the rear surface of the panel plate 1210 so that the game balls do not fall forward. .

  In addition, after the second discharge passage 3061c of the unit base 3061 receives the game ball from the second large winning opening 2552 at the upper part of the unit base 3061, it is guided to the vicinity of the lower part of the unit base 3061 at the front side of the unit base 3061 The unit base 3061 is guided to the rear side of the unit base 3061 through the opening passing through the unit base 3061, and further guided to a position near the center in the lateral direction on the rear side of the unit base 3061 and discharged downward. The second discharge passage 3061 c is configured such that the front side is open on the front side of the unit base 3061, and the front end side is closed by a plate-like second discharge passage cover 3066.

  The ball guiding unit 3060 further includes a first discharge passage member 3067 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3061 and guides and discharges the game ball that has passed through the passage hole 3061a of the unit base 3061 downward. Although not shown in the drawing, the first discharge passage member 3067 is configured such that the front is open and the front end is closed by the rear surface of the unit base 3061. Further, the first discharge passage member 3067 is formed to guide the gaming ball having passed through the passage hole 3061a from the front side to the lower left direction in rear view and discharge it downward from the position adjacent to the second discharge passage 3061c. .

  Further, the ball guiding unit 3060 includes a back lower left relay board 3068 attached to the front end of the unit base 3061 and a back lower right relay board 3069 attached to the front end of the unit base 3061.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 3060 is attached to a predetermined position of the first discharge passage member 3067 and detects the gaming ball received by the first start hole 2101; a general discharge passage 3061c in the unit base 3061 General winning opening sensor 3071 for detecting gaming balls attached to the predetermined winning positions of the general winning opening 2104 and for detecting magnetism by being attached at a position adjacent to the passage hole 3061a at the center in the horizontal direction in the unit base 3061 And a magnetic detection sensor 3072.

  There are four general winning opening sensors 3071 in the ball guiding unit 3060 in this example, and for the general winning opening 2104 arranged at a position near the big winning opening 2103 on both left and right sides of the attacker unit 2100, In the discharge passage 3061a, only the general winning opening sensor 3071 is detected, and the general winning opening 2104 arranged at a position far from the big winning opening 2103 has two in the general discharge passage 3061a. It is detected by a general winning opening sensor 3071. This makes it possible to know which general winning opening 2104 has received the game ball.

  In addition, the magnetic detection sensor 3072 of the ball guidance unit 3060 can detect the magnetism that acts on the vicinity of the attacker unit 2100, and can detect fraudulent acts using a magnet or the like.

  The game balls guided downward by the general discharge passage 3061b, the second discharge passage 3061c, and the first discharge passage member 3067 of the ball guiding unit 3060 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160, and the substrate holder 1160 The out ball discharge portion 1161 is discharged below the game board 4. In addition, the ball guiding unit 3060 can emit light and decorate the stage 2510 in the center character 2500 by causing the LED mounted on the under-stage decoration substrate 3062 to emit light.

[2-9. Back-to-back movable production unit
Subsequently, the back-to-back movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 153. FIG. 142 is a front view of the back-to-back movable effect unit in the back unit, FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the back-to-back movable effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the back-to-back movable effect unit It is. Further, FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back-to-back movable effect unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is a back-to-back dismount of the back-to-back movable effect unit into main members. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 147 is a front perspective view of the back inside drive mechanism of the back inside movable effect unit, and FIG. 148 is a back perspective view of the back inside drive mechanism of the back inside movable effect unit. Further, FIG. 149 is an exploded oblique view of the back middle drive mechanism for each main member and is seen from the front, and FIG. 150 is an exploded view of the back middle drive mechanism for each main member and the rear view. It is a perspective view. In addition, FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back middle movable effect unit.

  The back middle movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the rear wall 3001b so as to close the opening 3001c from the front side in the back box 3001. The back inside movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front of the back wall 3001 b of the back box 3001 and has an opening window 3101 a which has substantially the same size as the opening 3001 c and which penetrates in the front and rear direction. A vertically elongated rectangular left door member 3120L and a right door member 3120R disposed on the front side of the back middle unit base 3101 and the back middle unit base 3101 and formed vertically higher than the height of the opening window 3101a, and left door member 3120L The right door member 3120R is moved in the lateral direction between the position outside the opening window 3101a and the position on the front side of the opening window 3101a according to the game state, and the unit base 3101 is below the opening window 3101a in the back And a back middle drive mechanism 3150 attached to the front side.

  Further, the back middle movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the upper front surface of the back middle unit base 3101 and restricts the upper ends of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120 R from moving forward, to substantially the entire width of the back middle unit base 3101 A plate-like back middle upper decorative member 3102 extending in the left-right direction, and a back middle unit base mounted along the lower end of the opening window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101 on the front side of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R A plate-like back-and-bottom lower decoration member 3103 extending in the left-right direction over substantially the entire width of 3101 and a back-to-back upper decoration member 3102 disposed on the right side of the opening window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101 A plate-like back middle right front decoration member 3104 and a left door member 3120L respectively attached to the front surface of the lower decoration member 3103 The rear middle unit base 3101 is attached to the left front surface of the opening window 3101a and is substantially the same height as the opening window 3101a and has a plate-like back middle left decorative member 3105 and the rear side behind the right door member 3120R. The unit base 3101 includes a plate-shaped back middle right decorative member 3106 which is attached to the right front surface of the opening window 3101a and is substantially the same height as the opening window 3101a.

  Further, the back middle movable effect unit 3100 has a position detection sensor attached to the rear side of the back middle unit base 3101 and below the opening window 3101a and capable of detecting the movement positions of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R. The back middle relay board 3108 and a board cover 3109 which covers the back surface of the back middle relay board 3108 and is attached to the back side of the unit base 3101 during the back side are provided. This back intermediate relay board 3108 relays the connection of the position detection sensor 3108a, the door decoration board 3125, the left door drive motor 3161, and the right door drive motor 3181 with the lamp drive board 3013 and the motor drive board 3015. It is. As shown in FIG. 145, the back middle relay board 3108 is provided with a position detection sensor 3108a, and the position detection sensor 3108a causes the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R to be on the left side of the opening window 3101a, respectively. The left door member 3120 </ b> L and the right door member 3120 </ b> R are arranged so as to be able to detect that the left door member 3120 </ b> L and the right door member 3120 </ b> R are located at the center appearance position where they are in contact with each other.

  In addition, the code | symbol 3110 in a figure is a wiring clamp for fixing the wiring which connects the door decoration board | substrate 3125 of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R which abbreviate | omitted illustration, and the middle back relay board 3108.

  The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R of the back-to-back movable effect unit 3100 are formed in a form imitating an eyebrow, and the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are formed in substantially symmetrical shapes relative to each other. ing. The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are arranged on the rear side of the frame body 3121 and the frame body 3121 in a form in which both the left and right sides extend vertically with respect to the vertically long rectangular frame shape imitating the soft brocade of the fence. A transparent plate-like door main body 3122 to be arranged, a movable base 3123 attached to the lower end of the door main body 3122 and guided to the left and right by a back middle drive mechanism 3150, and a back middle unit base attached to the upper end of the door main body 3122 An upper guide member 3124 that is slidably guided between the rear wall 3101 and the back middle upper decorative member 3102, and a through hole that is disposed on the rear side of the door body 3122 and corresponds to the central opening in the frame 3121. A door decoration board 3125 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and substantially the same shape as the door decoration board 3125 and between the door decoration board 3125 and the door body 3122 Light guide member for guiding light to the frame body from the LED in location to the door decorated substrate 3125 (not shown) is provided with a.

  The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R have a plate-like door body 3122 formed transparently, and are members (decorations) arranged on the rear side through a vertically long rectangular opening formed in the center of the frame 3121. Members and the liquid crystal display device 1900 etc.) can be visually recognized. In addition, the frame 3121 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED of the door decoration board 3125 to emit light.

  The movable base 3123 of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R penetrates in the left-right direction and into which the rail shaft 3151 of the back middle drive mechanism 3150 is inserted, and the drive belt 3165 of the back middle drive mechanism 3150 A belt fixing portion 3123b fixed to 3185, and a detection piece 3123c that extends rearward and can be detected by a position detection sensor provided on the back intermediate relay substrate 3108.

  The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are guided by the rail shaft 3152 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by inserting the rail shaft 3151 of the back middle drive mechanism 3150 into the guide hole 3123a of the movable base 3123. It has become. The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are guided in the left-right direction at the same position by the single rail shaft 3151, and the sides facing each other are brought into contact with each other. Thus, one large surface can be formed. Further, as described above, since the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are guided in the left-right direction by one rail shaft 3151, they cannot overlap each other in the front-rear direction and cannot be overtaken. There is.

  As shown in FIGS. 147 to 150, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 of the back middle movable effect unit 3100 is a long rail shaft that slidably guides the lower ends of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R in the left-right direction. 3151 and a main body base 3152 which supports both ends of the rail shaft 3151 and is formed by bending a metal plate. The rail shaft 3151 in the back middle drive mechanism 3150 is formed in a cylindrical shape. Further, the main body base 3152 of the middle back drive mechanism 3150 includes a main body 3152a having a substantially U-shaped cross-section with the front open and extending in the left-right direction, and extending upward from both upper ends of the main body 3152a. A rail support piece 3152b to be supported and a fixed piece 3152c extending forward from both lower ends of the main body 3152a are provided. The main body base 3152 is formed with mounting holes, openings, and the like at appropriate positions.

  Further, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 has a plate-like left base 3160 fixed to the upper side of the left fixed piece 3152c in the front view of the main body base 3152 and a left base 3160 penetrating from the lower side so that the rotation shaft is upward. A left door drive motor 3161 attached to the lower side of the left fixed piece 3152c in the main body base 3152, a left drive gear 3162 fixed to the rotating shaft of the left drive motor 3161, and a driven gear 3163a meshing with the left drive gear 3162 And a drive pulley 3163b that rotates integrally with the lower side of the driven gear 3163a and is rotatably supported by the left base 3160 and the main body base 3152, and the same as the drive pulley 3163b in the left drive rotator 3163 At the height, on the left side of the right fixed piece 3152c in the main body base 3152 The left driven pulley 3164, the left driven pulley 3164 wound around the left driven pulley 3164 and the driving pulley 3163b of the left driving rotating body 3163, the left driven pulley 3164 is rotatably supported and the main body base 3152 is supported. A pulley support member 3166 slidably mounted in the left-right direction, a spring fixing member 3167 fixed to the main body base 3152 at a position on the left side of the pulley support member 3166, and between the spring fixing member 3167 and the pulley support member 3166 A tension spring 3168 that urges the spring fixing member 3167 and the pulley support member 3166 away from each other, a gear cover 3169 that is attached to the upper side of the left base 3160 and covers the upper side of the left drive gear 3162, Is equipped.

  Furthermore, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 penetrates the plate-like right base 3180 fixed to the upper side of the fixed piece 3152 c on the right side in a front view of the main body base 3152 and the right base 3180 from the lower side A right door drive motor 3181 attached to the lower side of the right fixing piece 3152c in the extension main body base 3152, a right drive gear 3182 fixed to the rotation shaft of the right drive motor 3181 and a driven gear 3183a engaged with the right drive gear 3182 And a drive pulley 3183b integrally rotating on the upper side of the driven gear 3183a, the right drive rotor 3183 rotatably supported by the right base 3180 and the body base 3152 and the same height as the drive pulley 3183b in the right drive rotor 3183 On the right of the left fixing piece 3152c in the main body base 3152 The right driven pulley 3184, the right drive belt 3185 wound around the right driven pulley 3184 and the drive pulley 3183 b of the right drive rotating body 3183, and the right driven pulley 3184 are rotatably supported with respect to the main body base 3152. Between the spring fixing member 3187 and the pulley supporting member 3186. The pulley supporting member 3186 is mounted slidably in the lateral direction, and the spring fixing member 3187 fixed to the main body base 3152 at a position on the right side of the pulley supporting member 3186 A tension spring 3188 disposed on the right side and urging the spring fixing member 3187 and the pulley supporting member 3186 away from each other, and a gear cover 3189 attached to the upper side of the right base 3180 and covering the upper side of the right drive gear 3182; Is equipped.

  As shown in the figure, in the back-middle drive mechanism 3150, the right drive belt 3185 is disposed above the left drive belt 3165. Further, in the back-rear driving mechanism 3150, the belt fixing portion 3123b of the movable base 3123 of the left door member 3120L is fixed to a portion positioned on the front side of the left driving belt 3165 rotated by the driving pulley 3163b and the left driven pulley 3164. The belt fixing portion 3123b of the movable base 3123 of the right door member 3120R is fixed to a portion located on the front side of the right driving belt 3185 which is circulated by the driving pulley 3183b and the right driven pulley 3184 (see FIG. 143 etc.) ).

  In addition, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 is further attached to a predetermined position of the main body 3152 a in the main body base 3152 and further provided with a protection member 3153 for preventing the left drive belt 3165 and the right drive belt 3185 from coming into contact with the main body base 3152 ing. The protective member 3153 is vertically semi-cylindrical and extends forward and backward, and a portion projecting forward is attached so as to project forward from the vertically extending surface of the main body 3152 a of the main body base 3152, and the left drive When the belt 3165 or the right drive belt 3185 is bent, it comes in line contact earlier than the main body base 3152 and the left drive belt 3165 or the right drive belt 3185 comes in surface contact with the main body base 3152 Thus, it is possible to prevent early wear of the left drive belt 3165 and the right drive belt 3185.

  By driving the left drive belt 3165 to rotate by means of the left door drive motor 3161, the entire back door drive mechanism 3150 is moved to the left from the front end left end of the opening window 3101a in the back unit base 3101. It is possible to move in the left-right direction between the retracted position located and the maximum appearance position where the right end of the left door member 3120L is located slightly leftward from the right end of the opening window 3101a. Further, by driving the right drive belt 3185 to rotate the right drive belt 3185 by the right door drive motor 3181 in the back middle drive mechanism 3150, the entire right door member 3120R is made to the right from the front end right end of the opening window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101. Can be moved in the left-right direction between the retracted position where the rear door 3120 is located and the maximum appearance position where the left end of the right door member 3120R is positioned slightly to the right of the left end of the opening window 3101a.

  Next, the movement of the back movable movable effect unit 3100 of this example will be described. The back middle movable effect unit 3100 can move the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R in the left-right direction by rotationally driving the left door drive motor 3161 and the right door drive motor 3181 according to the gaming state. It is like that. In the normal state, the movable medium producing unit 3100 is in the retracted position where the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are positioned on the left side and the right side in front view of the opening window 3101a in the unit base 3101 during the reverse side. It has become. In this retracted position, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are positioned outside the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and do not block the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display means 1900. (See FIG. 108 and the like). In the retracted position, the left door member 3120L is positioned on the rear side of the back left movable effect unit 3700, which will be described later, and the right door member 3120R is positioned on the rear side of the back center right front decoration member 3104, The door member 3120R is hardly visible to the player.

  With the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R in the retracted position, respectively, the left drive belt 3165 and the right drive belt 3185 rotate when the left door drive motor 3161 and the right door drive motor 3181 are appropriately rotated. And the left door member 3120L moves in the right direction, and the right door member 3120R moves in the left direction. When the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R move in the right and left directions, respectively, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is gradually blocked from the left and right by the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R, and the display area is gradually narrowed. It is possible to perform such a movable effect. Then, when the right end of the left door member 3120L and the left end of the right door member 3120R are in contact at the approximate center in the left-right direction and the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R move to the central appearance position, display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 The screen can be closed (see FIG. 151 (a)).

  151B and 151C, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are independently moved in the left-right direction by the left door drive motor 3161 and the right door drive motor 3181, respectively. Therefore, only the left door member 3120L and only the right door member 3120R can be moved (appeared) to the front side of the liquid crystal display means 1900.

  By the way, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R of the back-to-back movable effect unit 3100 can be visually recognized through the vertically long rectangular opening of the frame 3121. Therefore, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R Is moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, an image corresponding to the opening of the frame 3121 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, as if it were the left door member 3120L or the right It is possible to make an illusion that an image is displayed on the door member 3120R. Therefore, the decoration (pattern of a rose) of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R can be changed variously, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made hard to get tired. In addition, a moving image may be displayed as an image, thereby making it possible for the player to illusion that the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R themselves are display means such as a liquid crystal display device or the like. Since this can be performed, collaboration effects of image effects and movable effects can be performed, and more colorful effects can be provided to the player.

[2-10. Back-to-back movable production unit]
Subsequently, the back-up-back movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 152 to 168. FIG. 152 is a front view of the back up rear movable effect unit in the back unit, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the back up back movable effect unit seen from the front, and FIG. 154 is a back view of the back up back movable effect unit. FIG. FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up rear movable presentation unit disassembled into an arm slide unit and an arm unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 156 is a back-up back movable presentation unit as an arm slide unit and an arm unit FIG. FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the arm slide unit of the back-up and back movable effect unit, and FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the arm slide unit of the back-up and back movable effect unit. It is a disassembled perspective view. Further, FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the arm unit of the rearward movable movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the arm unit of the rearward movable effect unit as viewed from the rear.

  FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the arm unit of the back-up rear movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the arm unit of the back-up rear movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear FIG. Also, FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the upper arm unit of the arm unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the arm unit of the arm unit disassembled and seen from the rear; FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the forearm unit of the unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the forearm unit of the arm unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 167 is an explanatory view showing the movement by the arm slide unit in the back-up movable effect unit, and FIG. 168 is an explanatory view showing the movement by the arm unit in the back-up movable effect unit.

  The back-up back movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is disposed above the opening 3001 c in the back box 3001 and above the back-middle movable effect unit 3100. The back-up rear movable effect unit 3200 is mounted on the front of the back wall 3001 b above the opening 3001 c of the back box 3001 and extends in the left-right direction over substantially the entire width of the back box 3001. The slide unit 3210 includes an arm unit 3250 disposed on the front side of the slide unit 3210 and slidable in the left-right direction by the arm slide unit 3210 and imitating an arm (a lower part from the shoulder) of a predetermined character.

[2-10A. Arm slide unit]
As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158 and the like, the arm slide unit 3210 in the rear rear movable production unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3001c in the back box 3001, and is a shallow box-shaped and horizontally long rectangular shape. A slide base 3211, a slide rail 3212 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the slide base 3211 and extending in the left-right direction, a rack gear 3213 a guided in the left-right direction by the slide rail 3212 and extending in the left-right direction at the upper end, and an arm unit 3250 on the front surface. Are mounted on the slider 3213, the rack gear 3213a of the slider 3213, and the pinion gear 3214 that is rotatably supported by the slide base 3211. The pinion gear 3214 is meshed with the slide base 3211 at the left side of the pinion gear 3214 when viewed from the front. A first transmission gear 3215 rotatably supported, and a second transmission gear 3216 meshed with the first transmission gear 3215 and rotatably supported by the slide base 3211 at a position on the left side of the first transmission gear 3214 in a front view; A small-diameter small gear 3217a that meshes with the second transmission gear 3216, and a large-diameter gear 3217b that rotates integrally with the rear side of the small-diameter gear 3217a and has a larger diameter than the small-diameter gear 3217a, and the second transmission gear 3216 on the slide base 3211. A transmission gear 3217 that is rotatably supported at a position on the left side of the front view, a driving gear 3218 that meshes with a large-diameter gear 3217b of the transmission gear 3217, and is disposed at a position on the left side of the transmission gear 3217, and a drive gear 3218. And an arm slide drive motor 3219, which is disposed on the front side of the drive gear and whose drive gear 3218 is fixed to the rotation shaft.

  The arm slide unit 3210 covers the front side from the pinion gear 3214 to the drive gear 3218 and is attached to the front left upper portion of the slide base 3211 and has a laterally long plate-shaped gear cover 3220 to which an arm slide drive motor is attached. A horizontally long slide guide 3221 disposed below the slide rail 3212 and attached to the slide base 3211 to slidably support the rear surface of the arm unit 3250, and disposed near the left and right ends on the front surface of the slide base 3211. A slide position detection sensor 3222 for detecting the position of the slider 3213, a sensor cover 3223 that covers the front side of the slide position detection sensor 3222 and is attached to the slide base 3211, and a slide base at a position on the right side of the front view of the pinion gear 3214. 211, an arm slide drive motor 3219, a slide position detection sensor 3222, and an arm unit relay board 3259, which are attached to the front face of 211, and a rear rear relay board 3224 for relaying the connection between the lamp drive board 3013 and the motor drive board 3015 And a wiring presser 3225 for holding a wire connecting the back-rear back relay board 3224 and the arm unit relay board 3259.

  The slide rail 3212 in the arm slide unit 3210 is an Acculide (registered trademark) slide rail. Further, detection pieces 3213 b extending upward are provided at both ends in the left and right direction of the slider, and the detection pieces 3213 b are detected by the slide position detection sensor 3222 so that the slider 3213 (arm unit 3250) The slide position can be detected. The gear cover 3220 of the arm slide unit 3210 cooperates with the slide base 3211 to extend around the pinion gear 3214, the first transmission gear 3215, the second transmission gear 3216, and the transmission gear 3217 in the longitudinal direction. Can be rotatably supported.

  The arm slide unit 3210 can move (slide) the slider 3213 in the left-right direction by the rack gear 3213 a meshed with the pinion gear 3214 when the pinion slide 3214 is rotationally driven by the arm slide drive motor 3219. The arm unit 3250 attached to the front can be moved in the left and right direction.

[2-10B. Arm unit]
As shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, the arm unit 3250 in the rear rear movable effect unit 3200 has an arm unit base 3251 attached to the front surface of the slider 3213 in the arm slide unit 3210 and a predetermined position in the arm unit base 3251. A first rotation shaft 3252 supported at the rear end side and extending in the front-rear direction, and an upper arm unit 3300 formed in a shape imitating the upper arm of a predetermined character with the base end side rotatably supported by the first rotation shaft 3252. An arm unit cover 3253 that covers the front surface of the base end side of the upper arm unit 3300 and is attached to the front side of the arm unit base 3251 and supports the front end side of the first rotation shaft 3252; The upper arm unit 3300 is rotated about the first rotation axis 3252. An upper arm driving motor 3254, and a forearm unit 3350 which is arranged on the front side of the upper arm unit 3300 and is rotatably supported on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300, and has a shape imitating the forearm of a predetermined character. I have.

  The arm unit 3250 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the upper arm drive motor 3254 and is disposed between the arm unit base 3251 and the arm unit cover 3253. The arm unit 3250 meshes with the drive gear 3255 and is larger than the drive gear 3255. A large-diameter gear 3256a having a diameter, and a small-diameter gear 3256b that is disposed so as to be integrally rotatable on the front side of the large-diameter gear 3256a and that has a smaller diameter than the large-diameter gear 3256a and meshes with the upper-arm drive gear 3302 of the upper-arm unit 3300. The transmission gear 3256 rotatably supported by the arm unit base 3251 and the arm unit cover 3253 is provided.

  The arm unit 3250 is attached to the front of the arm unit base 3251, and has an arc-shaped sliding ridge centered on the first rotation shaft 3252 which can contact the rear surface of the arm unit base 3251 of the upper arm unit 3300. An upper arm rotation guide 3257 having a 3257a, an upper arm rotation position detection sensor 3258 attached to a predetermined position of the arm unit cover 3253 and detecting rotation ends of the upper arm unit 3300 in both directions, and a first rotation shaft 3252 The arm unit relay substrate 3259 attached to the front surface of the arm unit base 3251 and the front surface of the arm unit relay substrate 3259 at a position on the left side in front view than the position where the A plate-like substrate cover 3260 that is disposed and attached to the arm unit base 3251. .

  Further, the arm unit 3250 is attached to the upper front surface of the arm unit cover 3253 and the substrate cover 3260 on the upper side of the upper arm unit 3300, respectively, and extends upward, and the distal end portion of the upper guide bracket 3261. And a guide roller 3262 that is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and that can be brought into contact with the rear surface of a unit base 3401 in a back-front-front movable effect unit 3400 described later.

  Also, the arm unit 3250 includes a back upper rear relay board 3224, an upper arm drive motor 3254, an upper arm rotation position detection sensor 3258, an upper arm decoration board 3305, a forearm drive motor 3307, a forearm rotation position detection sensor 3316, and a forearm decoration body 3352. An arm unit relay board 3259 for relaying the connection to the arm unit, and a wiring cover 3263 for fixing the wiring for connecting the arm unit relay board 3259 and the forearm decoration board 3353 provided in the forearm unit 3350.

  Also, the arm unit 3250 is inserted into the cylindrical first bush 3264 which is inserted into the first rotation shaft 3252 and rotatably supports the upper arm unit 3300, and is inserted into the second rotation shaft 3351a of the forearm unit 3350. A cylindrical second bushing 3265 for rotatably supporting the forearm unit 3350 with respect to the upper arm unit 3300.

  Arm unit 3250, arm unit cover 3253 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear surface, the left surface, and a part of the bottom surface open in a front view, and the base end side of upper arm unit 3300 is housed inside The upper arm unit 3300 extends outward from the open left side surface and part of the bottom surface. One end side of an upper arm assist spring 3303 in an upper arm unit 3300 described later is engaged with the arm unit cover 3253.

  The upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 is pivotably supported on the first pivot shaft 3252 whose proximal end is supported by the arm unit base 3251 and the arm unit cover 3253 as shown in FIGS. 163 and 164 etc. An upper arm base 3301 elongated in a plate shape in a predetermined direction, and a fan-shaped member mounted on the rear side of the first axial portion 3301 a of the upper arm base 3301 and centered on the first rotation shaft 3252 The upper arm drive gear 3302 that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3256b of the transmission gear 3256, one end side is locked to the arm unit cover 3253, and the other end side is locked to the upper arm base 3301, and the first rotating shaft 3252 is engaged. The upper arm base 3301 so that the tip side of the upper arm base 3301 rotates upward (clockwise in front view). An upper arm assist spring 3303 that applies a biasing force to 01, a, an upper arm decorative body 3304 that mimics the upper arm of the predetermined character covers the front with attached to the front of the upper arm base 3301.

  The upper arm base 3301 of the upper arm unit 3300 is formed in a cylindrical shape in which a first shaft portion 3301a provided on the base end side is elongated in the front-rear direction, and the first rotation is performed via the first bush 3264 inside. The shaft 3252 is to be inserted. The upper arm base 3301 has a cylindrical second shaft 3301 b extending in the front-rear direction with a second rotation shaft 3351 a of a forearm unit 3350 described later inserted at the tip end, and the axial center of the second shaft 3301 b And a slit 3301c which is formed in an arc shape and can regulate the rotation range of the forearm unit 3350. The upper arm base 3301 is formed of a translucent material.

  The upper arm drive gear 3302 of the upper arm unit 3300 has a portion that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3256b of the transmission gear 3256 so as to spread in a fan shape in a direction opposite to the tip side of the upper arm unit across the axis of the first rotation shaft 3252. Is formed. The upper arm drive gear 3302 also includes a detection piece 3302 a that is detected by an upper arm rotational position detection sensor 3258 (see FIG. 163) attached to the arm unit cover 3253.

  Although the upper arm assist spring 3303 of the upper arm unit 3300 is not shown in detail, it is wound in a coil shape with the first pivot shaft 3252 as a substantially axial center, and is bent so that the tip on one end side extends forward. The rear arm unit cover 3253 is locked at a predetermined position. In the upper arm assist spring 3303, the coiled portion is disposed on the front side of the upper arm base 3301, and the other end extends to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 through a through hole (not shown). It is locked on the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 (see FIG. 162).

  The upper arm decorative body 3304 of the upper arm unit 3300 is disposed at the proximal end side in the insertion hole 3304a through which the first shaft portion 3301a of the upper arm base 3301 can be inserted and in the vicinity of the insertion hole 3304a (upper left part in front view) A motor attachment portion 3304 b for attaching the forearm drive motor 3307 and a second shaft portion 3301 b of the upper arm base 3301 formed on the tip end side are passable, and a tip which penetrates fan-likely to the outer peripheral edge of the arcuate slit 3301 c An opening 3304c and a passage hole 3304d extending in an arc shape around the axis of the second shaft portion 3301b on the upper side of the tip opening 3304c in the drawing are provided. The upper arm decorative body 3304 is formed to have translucency.

  The upper arm unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 and mounted on the front surface with an upper arm decorative board 3305 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and is attached to the front side of the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 and the second shaft portion 3301b. And a plate-like protection plate 3306 having a protrusion protruding rearward.

  Further, the upper arm unit 3300 includes a forearm drive motor 3307 that is attached to the motor attachment portion 3304b on the front surface of the upper arm decoration body 3304 and has a rotation axis extending rearward, and an upper arm decoration body that is fixed to the rotation axis of the forearm drive motor 3307. A drive gear 3308 disposed between 3304 and the upper arm base 3301, a driven gear 3309 that meshes with the drive gear 3308 and is rotatably supported by the upper arm base 3301, and a large-diameter large-diameter gear that meshes with the driven gear 3309. 3310a, a transmission gear 3310 that rotates integrally with the front surface of the large-diameter gear 3310a and has a small-diameter gear 3310b smaller than the large-diameter gear 3310a, and is rotatably supported by the upper arm base 3301, and a small-diameter gear 3310b of the transmission gear 3310 And the center of the drive gear 3311a and the drive gear 3311a. A transmission rotating body 3311 that has a crankpin 3311b protruding forward from a position separated by a predetermined distance, and is rotatably supported by the upper arm base 3301, and a base end side is rotatable with respect to the crankpin 3311b of the transmission rotating body 3311 And a hook-like link member 3312 whose tip side is rotatably supported with respect to the transmission pin 3351b in the forearm unit 3350.

  The upper arm unit 3300 has one end attached to the intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction of the link member 3312 and the other end attached to a predetermined position of the upper arm base 3301, and the front end side of the forearm unit 3350 is upward (front) via the link member 3312. A forearm assist spring 3313 that is biased to rotate in a counterclockwise direction as viewed) and a forearm rotation position detection sensor 3316 that detects the rotation position of the transmission rotating body 3311.

  By rotating the transmission rotating body 3311 of the upper arm unit 3300, the crankpin 3311b revolves around a predetermined radius. Further, the transmission rotation body 3311 is provided with a slit 3311c extending in an arc shape around the rotation axis, and the restriction protrusion 3301d protruding from the upper arm base 3301 in the slit 3311c is inserted. Accordingly, the transmission rotating body 3311 can be rotated only within the range of the slit 3311c extending in an arc shape. The transmission rotator 3311 includes a detection piece 3311d extending rearward. The detection piece 3311 d extends to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 through the arc-shaped opening 3301 e of the upper arm base 3301, and the upper arm attached to the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 on the rear side of the upper arm base 3301. The rotation position detection sensor 3316 detects the rotation position.

  The upper arm unit 3300 further includes a lock bracket 3314 attached so as to cover a part of the forearm drive motor 3307 on the front surface of the upper arm decorative body 3304, and a lock pin 3315 extending forward from the front surface of the lock bracket 3314. There is. The lock pin 3315 has the upper arm unit 3300 in the retracted position extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the arm base 3401 in the back upper front movable effect unit 3400 when the arm unit 3250 is set to the origin position by the arm slide unit 3210. The upper arm unit 3300 can be prevented from rotating downward by being locked by the locking piece 3401e and being locked by the locking piece 3401e (see FIG. 174).

  As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the forearm unit 3350 in the arm unit 3250 has a predetermined amount of deviation from the second rotation shaft 3351a and the second rotation shaft 3351a extending backward from a predetermined position on the base end side. A plate-like forearm base 3351 having a transmission pin 3351b extending rearward at the centered position and rotatably supporting the distal end side of the link member 3312, and attached to the front side of the forearm base 3351 and the front surface And a forearm decoration 3352 which imitates the forearm of a predetermined character. In the forearm base 3351 of the forearm unit 3350, the transmission pin 3351b is disposed at a position obliquely lower left from the second rotation shaft 3351a in a rear view. In addition, the forearm decorative body 3352 is formed to have translucency.

  In addition, forearm unit 3350 is disposed between forearm decoration substrate 3353 disposed between forearm decoration 3352 and forearm base 3351 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and forearm decoration substrate 3353 and forearm decoration 3352 And a diffusing lens member 3354 for diffusing the light from the LEDs of the forearm decorative board 3353. The forearm unit 3350 irradiates the forearm decoration body 3352 with light from the LED of the forearm decoration board 3353 widely diffused by the diffusing lens member 3354, so that the entire forearm decoration body 3352 is substantially uniform. It can be made bright and decorative.

  The transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350 is inserted into the arc-shaped slit 3301c of the upper arm base 3301 of the upper arm unit 3300, and then a disk-shaped end member is attached to the rear end. Thus, the slit 3301c cannot be removed. The forearm unit 3350 rotates only within the range of the slit 3301c of the upper arm base 3301 extending in an arc shape around the axis of the second rotation shaft 3351a.

[2-10C. Arm unit movement]
Next, the movement of the arm unit 3250 in the back and rear movable production unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 167 (a) etc., the arm unit 3250 of this example is in a state of being moved to the rightmost side in the front view by the arm slide unit 3210 (state of the origin position) in a normal state. In a normal state, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 of the arm unit 3250 extend in a substantially horizontal direction, such that the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 overlap each other in a front view. It is in the state. In other words, in the normal state, the upper arm unit 3300 extends in a substantially horizontal direction (the storage position), and the forearm unit 3350 overlaps the upper arm unit 3300 (the storage position). ing. As a result, the player can hardly visually recognize the arm unit 3250. Although details will be described later, in this normal position, the lock pin 3315 of the upper arm unit 3300 of the arm unit 3250 is locked (locked) to the locking piece 3401 e of the unit base 3401 of the back upper front movable effect unit 3400. The upper arm unit 3300 can not be rotated in the direction of the standby position (counterclockwise direction in front view).

  First, the movement by the arm slide unit 3210 will be described. As described above, when the drive gear 3218 is rotated in an appropriate direction (in this example, a clockwise direction in the front view) by the arm slide drive motor 3219 of the arm slide unit 3210 from a normal state, the drive gear 3218 The rotation is transmitted to the pinion gear 3214 via the transmission gear 3217, the second transmission gear 3216, and the first transmission gear 3215, and the slider 3213 receives the left and right via the rack gear 3213a engaged with the pinion gear 3214 by the rotation of the pinion gear 3214. It slides in a direction (in this example, left direction in front view).

  When the slider 3213 of the arm slide unit 3210 slides, the arm unit 3250 attached to the front surface of the slider 3213 also slides together, and the entire arm unit 3250 is slid in the left-right direction (left direction) from the origin position. (See FIG. 167 (b)). Even if the upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decoration body 3304) of the arm unit 3250 and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decoration body 3352) overlap with each other, the arm unit 3250 can be slid in the horizontal direction by the arm slide unit 3210. The arm unit 3250 is almost invisible from the player side.

  In order to return the arm unit 3210 slid to the left from the origin position to the origin position, the arm slide drive motor 3219 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to that described above to allow the arm unit 3210 via the slider 3213. The whole can be slid in the right direction in a front view, and can be returned to the origin position.

  Next, the movement of the upper arm unit 3300 by the arm unit 3250 will be described. From the normal state where the upper arm unit 3300 of the arm unit 3250 extends substantially in the horizontal direction (in the storage position), the upper gear drive motor 3254 moves the drive gear 3255 in a predetermined direction (in this example, a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). , The rotation of the drive gear 3255 is transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 of the upper arm unit 3300 via the transmission gear 3256, and the entire upper arm unit 3300 together with the upper arm drive gear 3302 is centered about the first rotation shaft 3252. It turns so that the side moves downward (appearing position side).

  In this example, the transmission gear 3256 is disposed between the drive gear 3255 and the upper arm drive gear 3302, and the rotation from the upper arm drive motor 3254 is transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 while being decelerated by the transmission gear 3256. It is supposed to be That is, by interposing the transmission gear 3256, the rotational torque of the upper arm drive motor 3254 is amplified and transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 (upper arm unit 3300), and even if the weight on the upper arm unit 3300 is heavy, the upper arm The load applied to the drive motor 3254 can be suppressed.

  Further, in this example, the upper arm unit 3300 can be rotated within an angle range of about 90 degrees from the state of the substantially horizontal storage position to the state of the standby position hanging substantially vertically. (See FIG. 174 (c)). Further, by driving the upper arm drive motor 3254, the forearm unit 3350 is also pivoted about the first pivot shaft 3252 together with the upper arm unit 3300.

  When the upper arm unit 3300 is rotated from the storage position where the upper arm unit 3300 extends substantially horizontally to the appearance position where the distal end side is lowered below the base end side, the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 moves to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, It is visible from the player side. When the upper arm unit 3300 is rotated in the direction of the appearance position while the forearm unit 3350 is overlapped with the upper arm unit 3300, what is actually seen from the player side is not the tip side of the upper arm unit 3300. The proximal end side of the forearm unit 3350 can be seen, and most of the upper arm unit 3300 is hidden by the forearm unit 3350.

  When returning the upper arm unit 3300 to the storage position from the state where the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 is positioned lower than the base end side (state of the appearance position), the upper arm drive motor 3254 is reverse to the above direction By rotating the upper arm unit 3300, the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 can be rotated upward, and the upper arm unit 3300 can be returned to the storage position.

  Subsequently, the movement of the forearm unit 3350 in the arm unit 3250 will be described. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), when the forearm unit 3350 extends in a substantially horizontal direction and overlaps the upper arm unit 3300 (normal state), the forearm unit 3350 is rotatably supported by the weight of the forearm unit 3350. A rotational moment that causes the tip side of the forearm unit 3350 to move downward (rotate clockwise in a front view) about the second pivot 3351 a acts on the forearm unit 3350. Then, due to the rotational moment acting on the forearm unit 3350, the crankpin 3311b is directed to the crankpin 3311b of the transmission rotator 3311 via the link member 3312 connected to the transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350 in the direction of the transmission pin 3351b. A pulling force will act.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), in a state where the forearm unit 3350 overlaps the upper arm unit 3300 (in the storage position), the crankpin 3311b in the transmission rotating body 3311 is the center of the crankpin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b. The axis connecting the center of the transmission rotary body 3311 is located above the center of the transmission rotary body 3311 (a position slightly reciprocated to one side), and the restriction projection 3301 d contacts one end of the slit 3311 c of the transmission rotary body 3311 It is in a state of contact. Then, in this state, when a pulling force in the direction of the transmission pin 3351b is applied to the crankpin 3311b of the transmission rotation body 3311 by the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350, the crankpin 3311b approaches the transmission pin 3351b in a counterclockwise direction. In this state, the control protrusion 3301d is in contact with one end of the slit 3311c of the transmission rotation body 3311 so that the transmission rotation body 3311 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction. The crankpin 3311b continues to stop in the current state without revolving. Therefore, when the forearm unit 3350 is in the storage position, even if the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 acts on the crankpin 3311b via the link member 3312, the crankpin 3311b does not revolve and the transmission rotator 3311 rotates. The forearm unit 3350 does not rotate naturally.

  Then, the arm unit 3250 of this example moves the drive gear 3308 in an appropriate direction (in this example, the front face) by the forearm drive motor 3307 attached to the upper arm unit 3300 from the storage position where the forearm unit 3350 overlaps the upper arm unit 3300. When rotating in the counterclockwise direction as viewed), the rotation of the drive gear 3308 is transmitted to the drive gear portion 3311a via the driven gear 3309 and the transmission gear 3310, and the transmission rotator 3311 having the drive gear portion 3311a is transmitted. The crank pin 3311b provided on the transmission rotating body 3311 rotates and revolves at a predetermined radius around the axis of the transmission rotating body 3311. The base end side of the link member 3312 whose front end is pivotally supported by the transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350 is pivotally supported by the crankpin 3311b, and the crankpin 3311b revolves to transmit via the link member 3312. The pin 3351b revolves around the axis of the second rotation shaft 3351a, and the forearm unit 3350 rotates in a direction away from the upper arm unit 3300 (direction of the unfolded position, clockwise direction in front view). It becomes.

  As described above, when the forearm unit 3350 is in the storage position, the rotational position of the crankpin 3311b is the axis connecting the center of the crankpin 3311b and the center of the transmission pin 3351b. Since the position is slightly revolved to one side (counterclockwise direction) with respect to the center, when the transmission rotating body 3311 is rotated clockwise by the forearm drive motor 3307, the crank pin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b The crank pin 3311b pulls the transmission pin 3351b in the direction of the transmission rotation body 3311 through the link member 3312 until the axis line connecting the two passes through the center of the transmission rotation body 3311, and the forearm unit 3350 rotates in the second direction. It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction about the shaft 3351a. Then, when the crank pin 3311 b is further rotated in the clockwise direction, and the axis line connecting the crank pin 3311 b and the transmission pin 3351 b moves below the center of the transmission rotary body 3311, the crank pin 3311 b is the link member 3312. Thus, the transmission pin 3351b is pushed away from the transmission rotator 3311, and the forearm unit 3350 is rotated in the clockwise direction around the second rotation shaft 3351a.

  In this example, the forearm unit 3350 can be pivoted in a clockwise direction in a front view within a range of about 60 degrees from the storage position overlapping the upper arm unit 3300.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the back-up and back movable effect unit 3200 of this example, sliding movement of the arm unit 3250 in the left-right direction, rotation of the upper arm unit 3300 and rotation of the forearm unit 3350 are independent of each other Since the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be simultaneously rotated, or the upper arm unit 3300 or the forearm unit 3350 can be rotated simultaneously with the slide, movement of various patterns is possible. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make the motion more natural as a movable effect unit imitating the arm of a predetermined character, and to attract the player's interest strongly.

[2-11. Back-front front movable production unit]
Next, the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. FIG. 169 is a perspective view of the back up front movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 170 is a perspective view of the back up front movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper front movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper front movable effect unit as an exploded view. Further, FIG. 173 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back up front movable effect unit.

  The front back movable effect unit 3400 is disposed on the front side of the back rear rear movable effect unit 3200 and is attached to the front surface of the back box 3001. This back-up front movable production unit 3400 includes a unit base 3401 attached to the front surface of the back box 3001, and a back-up front where the rotary shaft extends forward through the unit base 3401 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3401. Drive motor 3402, drive gear 3403 fixed to the rotation shaft of front back drive motor 3402 and disposed on the front side of unit base 3401, gear portion 3404a meshing with drive gear 3403, and rotation on the front of gear portion 3404a A drive rotating body 3404 having a crank pin 3404b extending forward from a position eccentric from the center and rotatably supported by the unit base 3401, and the crank pin 3404a of the driving rotating body 3404 slide in the left-right direction. Of the first slit 3405a in the long hole shape which can be inserted and the positive of the first slit 3405a A pair of slide support shafts 3405b extending rearward from a position on the left side of the view and on the left side of the drive rotator 3404 and supported by the unit base 3401 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and disposed on the left side of the slide support shaft 3405b and in the horizontal direction A second slit 3405c having a long hole extending to the link member 3405 disposed on the front side of the drive rotating body 3404, and slidably inserted into the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 and extended backward. A transmission pin 3406a and a rotation shaft 3406b disposed at a position on the left side in front of the transmission pin 3406a and rotatably supported by the unit base 3401 are provided, and the side on which the rotation shaft 3406b and the transmission pin 3406a are disposed is based. A back extending in a predetermined direction as an end side and formed in a shape imitating a predetermined item And a before and ornamental body 3406, a.

  The unit base 3401 of the back upper front movable effect unit 3400 has a configuration in which the upper end extends in the left and right direction and the portion on the left side in front view extends downward from the substantially center in the left and right direction at the upper end. The pair of guide rollers 3262 of the arm unit 3250 in the upper / rear movable effect unit 3200 can contact and roll in the left-right direction. Further, the unit base 3401 is provided with a motor attachment portion 3401 a for attaching the back upper front drive motor 3402 to the rear side of the left end in rear view, and a pair of slide supports of the link member 3405 disposed on the left side in front view of the motor attachment portion 3401 a A vertically extending elongated slit vertically extending slit 3401b into which the shaft 3405b is slidably inserted, and a pivot shaft 3406b of the back upper front decoration 3406 disposed on the left side in a front view of the vertically oriented slit 3401b And a rotary guide slit 3401d penetrating in an arc shape around the axial center of the axial hole 3401c.

  The unit base 3401 of the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 is provided with a locking piece 3401 e which is disposed on the left side in a front view with respect to the rotation guide slit 3401 d and protrudes leftward. By disposing the lock pin 3315 of the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 of the back-up back movable effect unit 3200 above the locking piece 3401 e, it is possible to restrict the downward movement of the lock pin 3315. It is possible to lock the unit 3300 from pivoting naturally.

  In the link member 3405 of the back-front front movable effect unit 3400, a long slit-shaped first slit 3405a is formed to have substantially the same length as the revolution radius of the crankpin 3404b in the drive rotating body 3404. Further, in the link member 3405, a pair of slide support shafts 3405b spaced apart in the vertical direction are respectively disposed at substantially symmetrical positions with respect to the upper and lower sides with respect to the axis of the first slit 3405a extended in the left and right direction. Further, the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 is disposed at a position substantially coaxial with the axis of the first slit 3405a extending in the left-right direction.

  The link member 3405 is supported so as to be slidable in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of slide support shafts 3405b into the vertical guide slit 3401b of the unit base 3401, and is inserted into the first slit 3405a. The crank pin 3404b of the drive rotating body 3404 revolves to slide in the vertical direction. The pair of slide support shafts 3405b in the link member 3405 is slidably inserted into the vertical guide slit 3401b via guide bushes 3407 inserted on both front and rear sides with the unit base 3401 interposed therebetween. .

  The back top front decoration 3406 of the back top front movable effect unit 3400 is configured to extend in a predetermined direction, and is rotatably inserted through the bush 3408 from the rear face on the proximal end back to the axial hole 3401 c of the unit base 3401. A rotating shaft 3406b extends. Further, when the back upper front decorative body 3406 is extended in the left-right direction so that the base end side is the right side when viewed from the front, the back upper front decorative body 3406 is inclined obliquely to the lower right (about 45 degrees axis with respect to the rotation shaft 3406b. The transmission pin 3406a inserted into the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 extends rearward from the position on the line).

  Further, the back upper front decoration 3406 extends rearward from a position opposite to the transmission pin 3406a with the turning shaft 3406b interposed therebetween, and is a pair of guide pins arranged on a circle around the turning shaft 3406b. 3406c. A pair of guide pins 3406c of the back upper front decoration 3406 is slidably inserted into the rotation guide slit 3401d of the unit base 3401 via the guide bush 3409, and the rotation shaft 3406b is centered When the back upper front decoration 3406 is turned, swinging of the back upper front decoration 3406 can be suppressed as much as possible and can be smoothly turned on the same plane.

  Further, the back upper front decoration 3406 includes a detection piece 3406 d detected by a back upper front rotational position detection sensor 3410 attached to the front of the unit base 3401, and the back upper front decoration 3406 is substantially in the left-right direction. At the extended position (storage position), the detection piece 3406d is detected by the back upper front rotation position detection sensor 3410.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back upper front decoration 3406 in the back upper front movable effect unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 173 (a), the back front decorative body 3406 is in a storage position extending in the left-right direction in a normal state. In this state (in the storage position), the back front decoration 3406 is positioned above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and is hidden behind the center role 2500 so as to be hardly seen by the player.

  Further, when the back upper front decoration 3406 is in the normal position (housing position), the crankpin 3404b of the drive rotating body 3404 is positioned at the lowermost position (bottom dead center). In this state, the load of the back upper front decoration 3406 generates a rotation moment for rotating the back upper front decoration 3406 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view centering on the rotation axis 3406 b. Thus, a force is applied to raise the link member 3405 via the transmission pin 3406a. However, since the crankpin 3404b inserted in the first slit 3405a of the link member 3405 is located at the bottom dead center, the transmission rotary body 3404 is rotated even if an upward force is applied to the crankpin 3404b. Instead, the back top front decoration 3406 continues to maintain the state of the storage position against the rotational moment.

  The drive gear 3403 is driven to rotate the drive gear 3403 in a predetermined direction (in the present embodiment, in the counterclockwise direction in the front view) by the back-front drive motor 3402 when the back-front front decoration 3406 is in the storage position. The drive rotator 3404 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3404a engaged with the crankshaft, and the crank pin 3404b is revolved in the clockwise direction from the position of the bottom dead center. When the crankpin 3404b revolves, the crankpin 3404b rises, and the link member 3405 also rises as the crankpin 3404b rises. Then, when the link member 3405 ascends, the transmission pin 3406a of the back upper front decoration 3406 inserted into the second slit 3405 c of the link member 3405 rises, and the back upper front decoration 3406 It rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with the rotation shaft 3406b as the center.

  When the back front decorative body 3406 rotates counterclockwise, the front end side of the back front decorative body 3406 moves downward, and the front end side of the back front decorative body 3406 is the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is lowered to the player side and can be viewed from the player side. Then, when the crank pin 3404b of the drive rotator 3404 reaches the uppermost top dead center by the back front drive motor 3402, the rotation drive of the back front drive motor 3402 stops and the rise of the link member 3405 stops. At the same time, the pivoting of the back surface front decoration 3406 is also stopped.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 173 (b), assuming that the crank pin 3404b is revolved to the top dead center, the back top front decoration 3406 is approximately 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the storage position. It is configured to be in a pivoted state (a state of a standby position).

  In the case where the back top front decoration 3406 is returned from the state of the appearance position where the tip end side is positioned below the base end side to the state of the storage position where the base end side and the tip end side have substantially the same height, The link member 3405 can be lowered via the crank pin 3404b of the drive rotating body 3404 by rotating the back and front drive unit 3402 in the opposite direction to that described above. The decorative body 3406 can be turned clockwise in a front view centering on the turning shaft 3406 b and returned to the storage position.

[2-12. Relationship between the front-back movable production unit and the rear-upper movement production unit]
Next, the relationship between the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 and the back-up back movable effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. FIG. 174 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the back up front movable effect unit and the back up back movable effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 175 is the back up front movable effect unit and back up back movable effect unit following FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of.

  As shown in FIG. 174 and the like, the relationship between the back-up front movable production unit 3400 and the back-up back movable production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 is such that the back-up back movable presentation unit 3200 is directly behind the back-front front movable presentation unit 3400. It is in a state where it is arranged, the back top front decoration 3406 of the back top front movable effect unit 3400, the upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decoration 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (front arm decoration) of the back top back movable target unit 3200. And 3352) are formed in substantially the same size. The upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decorative body 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decorative body 3352) are in the storage position shown in FIG. 174 (a) in a normal state.

  In addition, the back up front movable effect unit 3400 and the back up back movable effect unit 3200 are in the normal state (back up front decoration 3406, upper arm decoration 3304, and forearm decoration 3352 in the storage position, FIG. 174 (a ), The upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are almost hidden behind the back decoration 3406, and the back decoration is located above the liquid crystal display device 1900. Hidden behind the 3406 and the center character 2500, the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are substantially invisible from the player side. Also, in this normal state, the lock pin 3315 of the forearm unit 3300 in the back-up back movable presentation unit 3200 abuts on the locking piece 3401 e of the unit base 3401 in the back-up front movable presentation unit 3400 and moves downward. Is regulated (locked).

  From this normal state, the arm slide drive motor 3219 of the arm slide unit 3210 in the back-up back movable presentation unit 3200 is driven to slide the arm unit 3250 leftward in a front view, and the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 The lock pin 3315 is moved to a position on the left side of the locking piece 3401 e of the unit base 3401 in the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 (see FIG. 174 (b)). As a result, the lock pin 3315 can be moved downward, and the lock is released.

  Subsequently, the back top front drive motor 3402 of the back top front movable effect unit 3400 and the upper arm drive motor 3254 of the back top back movable effect unit 3200 are simultaneously driven to set the back top front decoration 3406 and the upper arm decoration 3304 ( And the forearm decorative body 3352) are rotated about 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in front view (see FIG. 174 (c)). In the state shown in FIG. 174 (c), the standby position where the back upper front decoration 3406 and the upper arm decoration 3304 are substantially hanging down (rotation about 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the storage position) is obtained. Thus, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are almost hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406. When the back surface front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are in the standby position (FIG. 174 (c)), the back front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration in the standby position 3352 is located behind the second game area 2551 and the like so as not to be seen from the front. However, even when in the standby position, when the back upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304 or the forearm decoration 3352 vibrates or performs a small movement, for example, the back upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm Since a part of the decorative body 3304 or the forearm decorative body 3352 can be viewed from the front, it is possible to grasp vibrations and minute movements.

  The upper arm decorative body 3304 is rotated clockwise in a front view by the upper arm drive motor 3254 in a state where the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the forearm decorative body 3304 are rotated to the standby position. The forearm decoration 3352 is turned clockwise (see FIG. 175 (d)). Thus, the proximal end of the upper arm decorative body 3304 moves away from the back upper front decorative body 3406 in the left direction, and the distal end side rotates so as to move away from the upper arm decorative body 3304 from the state where the forearm decorative body 3352 overlaps the upper arm decorative body 3304 Then, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 appear from the rear side of the back upper front decorative body 3406.

  Then, in this state, when the arm unit 3250 is moved leftward in a front view by the arm slide drive motor 3219 of the arm slide unit 3210, the tip side of the forearm unit 3352 hidden behind the back upper front decoration 3406 is The back arm moves to the left with respect to the front decoration 3406 so that the entire forearm decoration 3352 is in the appearance position where it can be seen from the player side (see FIGS. 175E and 219).

  As described above, a high-impact movable effect is obtained by combining the front-upper front decorative body 3406 of the back-upper front movable effect unit 3400 with the upper-arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 of the back-upper rear movable effect unit 3200. And can entertain players. In addition to the above, the back upper movable decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 can be moved independently at various timings to perform various patterns of moving effects. It is possible to make it hard to get bored.

[2-13. Back and back movable production unit]
Subsequently, the back bottom movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 176 to FIG. FIG. 176 is a perspective view of the rear rear movable movable effect unit in the rear unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 177 is a perspective view of the rear lower rear movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 178 is an exploded perspective view of the back-to-back movable effect unit disassembled into the back-to-back decoration unit and the elevating unit etc., and FIG. 179 is a back-to-back back movable result unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled into the decoration body unit and the raising / lowering unit etc., and was seen afterwards. Further, FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back and back decoration unit of the back and back movable effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 181 is a disassembly and back view of the back and back decoration unit. It is a perspective view. Moreover, FIG. 182 is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back lower back decorative body unit. Further, FIG. 183 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the lifting and lowering unit in the back and forth rear movable effect unit. Furthermore, FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-downward movable rendering unit.

  The back and bottom back movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the opening 3001 c of the back box 3001 and on the front side of the back and inside movable effect unit 3100. This back-behind movable production unit 3500 includes a back-bottom post-decoration body unit 3510 having a decoration simulating a tiled roof, and the back-bottom back-decoration body unit 3510 ascending and descending in the vertical direction according to the gaming state. An elevator unit 3550 is mounted in the back 3001, and a back rear decoration substrate 3501 is mounted on the back side of the back rear decoration unit 3510. The back-bottom rear decoration substrate 3501 is provided with a plurality of LEDs that are turned on / off according to the number of lottery results held by the start winning.

  The back and back decoration unit 3510 in the back and back movable presentation unit 3500 is disposed below the first decoration 3511 and the first decoration 3511 which is formed to have a shape resembling the roof of a building extending in the left-right direction. It is disposed on the front side of the second decorative body 3512 and the horizontally long second decorative body 3512 formed in a shape imitating a wall of a building, and is formed in a shape imitating a building's blast and to the left and right from the center in the horizontal direction. The back rear movable decorative body 3513 (left movable body 3513 L, right movable body 3513 R) which can be separated and the back rear movable movable decoration body 3513 are supported slidably in the left and right direction and a second decorative body 3512 on the front surface. The unit cover 3514 has a shallow box-like unit cover 3514 attached horizontally and the rear side is open, and the rear side of the unit cover 3514 is closed. A laterally long plate-shaped unit base 3515 attached to the right seat 3561, and a.

  The first decorative body 3511 of the lower back rear decoration unit 3510 is provided with a plurality of hemispherical holding number display portions 3511 a arranged in the left and right direction at the upper end thereof, and is arranged on the rear side back lower back rear Light is emitted by LEDs for holding display provided on the decorative substrate 3501. The number-of-retentions display portion 3511a can display the number of reservations by the number of light emission.

  The second decorative body 3512 of the back-bottom rear decoration unit 3510 has a horizontally long opening 3512 a formed substantially at the center in the left-right direction as illustrated. The unit cover 3514 of the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 further extends downward from the lower left side of a rectangular portion extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a motor mounting portion for mounting the back back rear opening / closing drive motor 3516. 3514a, and a long slit-like left slit 3514b and a right slit which are formed in a lower portion of a rectangular portion extending in the left-right direction on the right side of the motor mounting portion 3514a and extending in the left-right direction and arranged in the left-right direction. And 3514c.

  The back lower back decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the left front surface of the unit cover 3514, passes through the unit cover 3514, and the rear back rear open / close drive motor 3516 has a rotating shaft extending rearward. A drive gear 3517 that is fixed to the rotation shaft 3516 and disposed between the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515, and a first transmission gear that meshes with the drive gear 3517 and is rotatably supported by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515. 3518, a second transmission gear 3519 meshed with the first transmission gear 3518 and rotatably supported by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515, and meshed with the second transmission gear 3519 and rotatable by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515. Left pinion gear 3520 supported by the And Ongia 3520 meshed with the left slider is slidably supported in the lateral direction by the unit cover 3514 has a left rack gear 3521a extending in the lateral direction 3521, and a.

  The left slider 3521 of the rear lower back decoration unit 3510 extends forward from the lower end of the plate-like hanging piece 3521b extending downward from the front end right end of the left rack gear 3521a extending in the left-right direction and the lower end of the hanging piece 3521b. And a pair of mounting bosses 3521c attached to the lower rear surface of the left movable body 3513L of the movable decorative body 3513 through the left slit 3514b of the unit cover 3514 and spaced apart in the left-right direction. Yes. The left slider 3521 can be slid in the left-right direction by inserting a pair of mounting bosses 3521c into the left slit 3514b of the unit cover 3514, and is attached to the mounting boss 3521c of the left slider 3521 The left movable body 3513L is also slidable in the left-right direction.

  The left slider 3521 is formed at the upper end of the hanging piece 3521b at the lower end right portion of the extending portion 3521d extending in a rod shape in the direction opposite to the left rack gear 3521a (right direction in front view) The right transmission rack gear 3521e extends in the left-right direction, and the detection piece 3521f protrudes forward from the left end of the extension portion 3521d. Note that the left slider 3521 is urged rightward as viewed from the front by a tension spring 3531.

  Further, the rear back decorative body unit 3510 meshes with the right transmission rack gear 3521e of the left slider 3521, and a right pinion gear 3522 rotatably supported by a unit cover 3514 and a unit base 3515, and a right pinion gear 3522 sandwiched between the right pinion gear 3522 and the right pinion gear 3522. A right slider 3523 which is disposed on the opposite side of the transmission rack gear 3521e and has a right rack gear 3523a extending in the left-right direction meshing with the right pinion gear 3522 and supported by the unit cover 3514 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is further equipped.

  The right slider 3523 of the rear back decorative unit 3510 extends forward from the left front surface of the right rack gear 3523a extending in the left-right direction and is spaced apart in the left-right direction so as to open the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514. It has a pair of attachment bosses 3523b which are attached to the lower rear surface of the right movable body 3513R of the back movable rear body 3513 at the front end thereof. The right slider 3523 is slidable in the left-right direction by inserting a pair of mounting bosses 3523b into the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514, and is attached to the mounting boss 3523b of the right slider 3523. The right movable body 3513R can also slide in the left and right direction.

  A pair of mounting bosses 3521c in the left slider 3521 and a pair of mounting bosses 3523b in the right slider 3523 are slidably supported with respect to the left slit 3514b and the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514 via the slide bushes 3530, respectively. It has become so.

  Further, the rear back decorative unit 3510 is disposed between the second decorative body 3512 and the unit cover 3514 so that the front side faces through the opening 3512a of the second decorative body 3512 and has a light-transmitting plate shape. A guide lens member 3524 and a rear back and middle decorative board 3525 which is disposed on the rear side of the guide lens member 3524 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted are provided. The front side of the guide lens member 3524 facing the opening 3512a of the second decorative body 3512 can be seen from the player side when hidden behind the back bottom movable movable body 3513 when the back bottom back movable decorative body 3513 is closed. There is no such thing.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted to the guidance lens member 3524, the predetermined | prescribed character and decoration according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are equipped, and light emission is carried out by making LED of the decoration board | substrate 3525 light It can be decorated. In addition, an open / close position detection sensor for detecting the slide position of the left slider 3521 (back and back movable ornament 3513) by detecting the detection piece 3521f of the left slider 3521 on the back surface of the back and back back decoration substrate 3525 3526 is attached.

  Further, the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 is driven by an auxiliary member 3527 attached to the lower front surface of the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R in the back lower back movable decorative body 3513 and the rear side of the unit cover 3514. The light from the gear cover 3528 covering the rear surface of the gear 3517 and the decoration LED mounted on the front surface side of the back lower back decorative board 3501 is guided to the rear surface of the first decorative body 3511 to emit the entire first decorative body 3511. A light guide member 3529 for decoration.

  In the normal state (in the closed position), the back-under-bottom movable decoration unit 3510 in the back-under-back movable effect unit 3500 of the present example is, as shown in FIG. The movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are in contact with each other, and the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R have a gust of wind. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are each provided with the magnet arrange | positioned in the mutually attracting direction, and when it mutually contacts, it is hard to leave | separate.

  In a normal state, the left rack gear 3521a and the right transmission rack gear 3521e of the left slider 3521 are engaged with the left pinion gear 3520 and the right pinion gear 3522 at a substantially left end position in a front view. Further, the right rack gear 3523a of the right slider 3523 is engaged with the right pinion gear 3522 at a position substantially at the right end in a front view.

  When the drive gear 3517 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction (in this example, a clockwise direction in a front view) from the normal state by the back lower back open / close drive motor 3516, the first transmission gear 3518 and the second transmission gear 3519 are As a result, the left pinion gear 3520 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the left slider 3521 moves leftward by the left rack gear 3521a meshed with the upper side of the left pinion gear 3520.

  When the left slider 3521 moves to the left in front view, the right transmission rack gear 3521e provided at the right end of the left slider 3521 also moves to the left, so that the right pinion gear 3522 whose upper side meshes with the right transmission rack gear 3521e. It will turn in the counterclockwise direction in a front view. Then, the right slider 3523 is moved in the right direction by the right rack gear 3523 a meshed with the lower side of the right pinion gear 3522.

  Therefore, when the drive gear 3517 is rotated in the predetermined direction (clockwise direction in front view) by the back and rear back open / close drive motor 3516, the left slider 3521 moves in the left direction and the right slider 3523 moves in the right direction simultaneously. Thus, the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R attached respectively to the left slider 3521 and the right slider 3523 move in directions of separating from each other.

  When the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R move in a direction away from each other, the rear back movable decorative body 3513 is separated from the center in the left-right direction, that is, the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are separated. By moving in a direction away from each other, the back and bottom movable decorative body 3513 operates to open, and the back side of the back and bottom back movable decorative body 3513 is located between the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R. Thus, the front side of the guide lens member 3524 arranged in FIG.

  When the left slider 3521 and the right slider 3523 reach the left moving end and the right moving end, respectively, the driving of the back and rear back open / close drive motor 3516 is stopped and the movement of the left movable body 3513 L and the right movable body 3513 R is also stopped. The back and bottom back movable decorative body 3513 is in the open state (see FIG. 182 (b)).

  In the case of returning from the open back position to the normal closed position, the back movable back and forth drive motor 3516 is rotated in the opposite direction to move the left movable back. The body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R can be moved in the direction in which they approach each other, and by moving until the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R abut, it is possible to return to the normal state. It has become.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 178, FIG. 179, FIG. 183, and the like, the elevating unit 3550 in the back-under-movable rendering unit 3500 includes a horizontally long plate-like unit main body base 3551 attached to the back box 3001, and a unit main body base 3551. The front and rear rack gears 3552 are mounted apart from each other in the left-right direction and extend in the up-down direction, and are disposed close to the left-side lift rack gear 3552 in front view and supported by the unit main body base 3551 and extend in the up-down direction. A rod-shaped lifting shaft 3553, a plate-shaped left pedestal 3554 supported by the lifting shaft 3553 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a box-shaped left gear box 3555 attached to the front surface of the left pedestal 3554 so as to extend forward. Attached to the left side surface of the left gear box 3555 when viewed from the front. Engage with the drive gear 3557, a rear back / up / down drive motor 3556 having a rotation shaft extending into the shaft 55, a drive gear 3557 fixed to the rotation shaft of the back / bottom rear lift drive motor 3556 and disposed in the left gear box 3555. A large-diameter large-diameter gear 3558a, a transmission gear 3558 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3558a, has a small-diameter gear 3558b that is smaller in diameter than the large-diameter gear 3558a, and is rotatably supported by the left gear box 3555. A left pinion gear 3559 that meshes with a small-diameter gear 3558b of 3558 and meshes with a lifting rack gear 3552 disposed on the left side in a front view and rotatably supported by a left gear box 3555.

  In addition, the lift unit 3550 in the back-rear movable effect unit 3500 is a guide support member 3560 extending vertically and attached to the front of the unit main body base 3551 adjacent to the lift rack gear 3552 on the right side in a front view A right pedestal 3561 slidably supported in the vertical direction by the 3560, a box-shaped right gearbox 3562 mounted to extend forward on the front surface of the right pedestal 3561, and a guide support penetrating the right gearbox 3562 One end (right end in front view) is rotatably and vertically slidably supported by member 3560, and the other end (left end in front view) is rotatably supported by left gearbox 3555 and left A pinion gear 3559 is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable, and a drive shaft 3563 extending in the left-right direction; And a, a right pinion gear 3564 meshing with the lift rack gear 3552 on the right is integrally rotatably fixed within the right gearbox 3562 in the drive shaft 3563.

  Furthermore, the lifting unit 3550 in the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3500 has a shaft cover 3565 attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 at the left and right ends respectively and covers the drive shaft 3563 and a lamp drive attached to the front surface of the left pedestal 3554 A relay substrate 3566 for relaying the connection between the substrate 3013 and the motor drive substrate 3015 and the back and back opening / closing drive drive motor 3516 of the back and back decoration unit 3510 and the back and back back and forth decoration substrate 3525 etc., unit body base 3551 And a wire holding member 3567 which is attached at a position on the left side in front view with respect to the left pedestal 3554 and which can hold a wire, and a lower portion of the wire holding member 3567. Elevation position detection sensor 3568 for detecting the elevation position of And referring to FIG. 184), and a. The elevation position detection sensor 3568 can detect the elevation position of the back rear decoration unit 3510 by detecting the detection piece 3555a (see FIG. 184) provided in the left gearbox 3555. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 183, the left pedestal 3554 of the lifting and lowering unit 3550 is vertically movably supported by a plurality of rollers 3569 in contact with the lifting and lowering shaft 3553. Further, the lifting unit 3550 has the left and right ends of the unit base 3515 of the back bottom rear decoration unit 3510 attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561, respectively.

  When the drive gear 3557 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction by the back-and-bottom lift drive motor 3556, the lift unit 3550 rotates the left pinion gear 3559 via the transmission gear 3558 that meshes with the drive gear 3557, and at the same time the left pinion gear The right pinion gear 3564 disposed on the right side via the drive shaft 3563 constituting the rotational shaft of 3559 is also rotated in the same direction as the left pinion gear 3559. Then, the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564 rotate at the same time, so that the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3559 are engaged with the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564, respectively, and are fixed to the unit main body base 3551. The pinion gear 3564 moves up and down.

  In other words, by rotating the back and forth rear elevation drive motor 3556, the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal are supported via the left gear box 3555 and the right gear box 3562 that rotatably support the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564, respectively. 3561 is moved in the vertical direction, and the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 can also be moved in the vertical direction.

  Next, a description will be given of the movement of the behind-the-bottom movable effect unit 3500. In the normal state, the back bottom rear decoration unit 3510 is positioned downward by the lifting unit 3550 and the back bottom back movable decoration body 3513 is closed (normal state) Closed state) (see FIG. 184 (a)). In this normal state, a part of the first decoration 3511 and the back and back movable decoration 3513 in the back and back decoration unit 3510 can be seen from the player side through the frame of the center character 2500 (see FIG. (See FIG. 108 and the like).

  Then, from the normal state, the back / rear back elevation drive motor 3556 is rotationally driven to raise the back / rear back decorative unit 3510 from the lowered position to the raised position (see FIG. 184 (b)). As a result, the first decorative body 3511, the second decorative body 3512, and the back lower back movable decorative body 3513 of the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 are located above the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 and are from the player side. Fully visible.

  With the back-under-bottom post-decoration body unit 3510 moved to the raised position, the back-bottom post-back opening / closing drive motor 3516 moves the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R of the back-under-bottom post-decoration movable decoration body 3513 away from each other. By doing this, the closed position in contact with each other is changed to the open position in which they are separated from each other. When the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are in the open position apart from each other, the front surface of the guide lens member 3524 disposed on the rear side between the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R is on the player side. It becomes visible from (refer to FIG. 184 (c)). In this state, the guide lens member 3524 can be illuminated and illuminated by emitting light from the LED on the back, bottom, and back decorative board 3525 disposed on the rear side of the guide lens member 3524. Can be made to suggest the arrival of opportunities etc.

  In addition to the above-described movement, the back-under-bottom movable effect unit 3500 moves in the back-under back-decoration unit 3510 before the back-bottom back-decoration body unit 3510 is moved to the lifted position by the lift unit 3550. After the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R of the rear movable decorative body 3513 are changed from the closed position to the open position, the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. May be.

[2-14. Back lower front movable production unit]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 185 to 189. FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the back-under-front movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 186 is a perspective view of the back-under-under-movable effect unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit as the disassembled state. Further, FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back bottom front movable effect unit.

  The back lower front movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the opening 3001 c in the back box 3001 and is attached to the front surface of the ball guiding unit 3060, and from the stage 2510 of the center character 2500. Also, the player can see the player from the player's side through the transparent game panel 1200 at the lower position (see FIG. 109 and the like). The back lower front movable effect unit 3600 includes a back lower front left unit 3600L and a back lower front right unit 3600R which are respectively provided on the left and right sides across the center of the game area 1100 in the left and right direction, as shown. The back bottom front left unit 3600L and the back bottom front right unit 3600R are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the left-right direction.

  The front-bottom front movable production unit 3600 (back-bottom front left unit 3600L and back-bottom front right unit 3600R) includes a shallow box-shaped unit base 3601 that is attached to the front surface of the ball guiding unit 3060 and is open to the front. In the 3601 box, the back front first decorative body 3602 formed in a shape imitating a lantern disposed at a position near the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 1100, and the gaming area 1100 in the back bottom front first decorative body 3602 A back second front decoration 23603 arranged on the opposite side (outside) to the center in the left-right direction and imitating a lantern and formed a size smaller than the first front decoration 3602 and a second back decoration It is arranged on the opposite side (outside) to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 in the body 3603 and imitates a lantern and has a lower back than the second decoration body 3603 in front and behind And around small under-formed back before the third decorative body 3604, and a.

  The lower back front first decorative body 3062 of the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 extends rearward from the vicinity of the upper end on the rear surface and the rear from a position below the rotational shaft 3602a. And an operating shaft 3602b. Further, the back lower front second decorative body 3063 includes a pivot shaft 3603a extending rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the rear surface, and an operating shaft 3603b extending rearward from a position lower than the pivot shaft 3603a. I have. Furthermore, the back lower front third decorative body 3604 includes a pivot shaft 3604a extending rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the rear surface, and an operating shaft 3604b extending rearward from a position below the pivot shaft 3604a. I have. These back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 are each attached with a weight near the lower end.

  The unit base 3601 of the back bottom front movable effect unit 3600 is a first bearing portion for rotatably supporting the back bottom front first decoration body 3602 with the pivot shaft 3602 a of the back bottom front first decoration body 3602 being inserted. 3601a, a first opening 3601b formed on the lower side of the first bearing portion 3601a and through which the actuating shaft 3602b of the back bottom first decoration 3602 can pass, and rotation of the back bottom second decoration 3603 The second bearing portion 3601c for inserting the shaft 3603a and rotatably supporting the back lower third decoration 3603, and the operation of the lower back second decoration 3603 formed under the second bearing 3601c The second opening 3601d, through which the shaft 3603b can pass, and the pivot shaft 3604a of the back third front body 3604 are inserted and thirdly for rotatably supporting the back front third wood 3604 Bearing portion 36 It includes a 1e, a third opening 3601f the operation shaft below the back are formed on the lower side of the third bearing portion 3601e front third decorations 3604 3604B is can pass through the.

  The first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third rear portion 3601f of the unit base 3601 are circular with the shaft centers of the first bearing portion 3601a, the second bearing portion 3601c, and the third bearing portion 3601e as the centers. In the first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third rear part 3601f, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and The operating shafts 3602b, 3603b, and 3604b of the third lower back front decoration 3604 can be moved freely. Further, the unit base 3601 has a first opening 3601b, a second opening 3601d, and a third opening with the shaft centers of the first bearing 3601a, the second bearing 3601c, and the third bearing 3601e as the centers. An arc-shaped guide groove 3601g is formed on the lower front surface of the portion 3601f.

  With respect to the first bearing portion 3601a, the second bearing portion 3601c, and the third bearing portion 3601e of the unit base 3601, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front front Respective pivot shafts 3602 a, 3603 a, 3604 a of the three decorative members 3604 are rotatably inserted and supported via the bush 3605. Further, through the first bearing portion 3601a, the second bearing portion 3601c, and the third bearing portion 3601e of the unit base 3601, the back bottom front first decorative body 3602, the back bottom front second decorative body 3603, and the back bottom front third The pivots 3602 a, 3603 a, 3604 a of the decorative body 3604 extend to the rear side of the unit base 3601. Furthermore, through the first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third rear portion 3601f of the unit base 3601, the back first front decorative body 3602, the back front second decorative body 3603, and the back front third The operating shafts 3602 b, 3603 b, 3604 b of the decorative body 3604 extend to the rear side of the unit base 3601.

  In addition, the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 has one end on the operation axes 3602b, 3603b, 3604b of the lower back lower first decorative body 3602, the lower back lower second decorative body 3603, and the lower back lower third decoration 3604. Each has a projection 3606a inserted into the corresponding guide groove 3601g of the unit base 3601 at the other end, and the back first front decorative body 3602, the back front second decorative body 3603, And a rotation restricting member 3606 attached to the rear side of the back third front body 3604. The rotation restricting member 3606 is a back decoration front first decoration body 3602, a back decoration front second decoration body 3603, and a back decoration front third decoration body by a projection 3606a inserted into the guide groove 3601g of the unit base 3601. The rotation range can be restricted so that the 3604 does not rotate beyond the range of the guide groove 3601g.

  In addition, the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 is disposed on the back side of the unit base 3601 and is a turn in the back lower front first decoration 3602, the back lower front second decoration 3603, and the back lower third decoration 3604. Crank pins 3607a, mounted at the rear ends of the moving shafts 3602a, 3603a, 3604a and the actuating shafts 3602b, 3603b, 3604b, respectively, and extending rearward from a position different from the axis of the rotating shafts 3602a, 3603a, 3604a, A first crank member 3607, a second crank member 3608, and a third crank member 3609 having 3608a and 3609a are provided. In this example, the crankpins 3607a and 3609a of the first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 3609 are coaxial with the operation shafts 3602b and 3604b of the back first back decoration 3102 and the back third back decoration 3604. The crankpin 3608a of the second crank member 3608 is disposed on the upper side, and at the opposite position across the pivot shaft 3603a with respect to the actuating shaft 3603b of the second lower back decorative member 3603. .

  Furthermore, the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 is slidable in the left and right direction in a front view, and the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609a of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 are provided. Each includes a slider 3610 having a transmission portion 3610a inserted in a loosely fitted state, and a lower back front drive solenoid 3611 that drives the slider 3610 to move in the left-right direction. By sliding the slider 3610 in the left-right direction by the back lower front drive solenoid 3611, the cranks of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 inserted in the transmission portion 3610 a of the slider 3610 The pins 3607a, 3608a, and 3609a are moved in the left-right direction to rotate the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 around the axis of the rotation shafts 3602a, 3603a, and 3604a. Back by rotating the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609, the first back decoration 3602, the second back decoration 3603, and the third back decoration The body 3604 can be turned.

  In addition, the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 is disposed between the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, the third crank member 3609 and the slider 3610 and attached to the rear side of the unit base 3601. A plate-like slide that has an opening 3612a through which the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, and 3609 of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 can pass, and supports the slider 3610 in the left-right direction. A base 3612 and a unit cover 3613 attached to the rear side of the slide base 3612 and covering the rear side of the slider 3610 and the back lower front drive solenoid 3611 are provided.

  Also, a back lower front movable effect unit 3600 is disposed between the unit base 3601 and the slide base 3612 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3601 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A substrate 3614 is provided. In this example, the unit base 3601, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 are formed so as to have translucency. The LED on the back lower front decorative board 3614 emits light appropriately, so that the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, the back lower front third decorative body 3604, and the like can be illuminated. It can be done.

  Next, the movement of the front back front movable effect unit 3600 will be described. In the back bottom movable effect unit 3600, in a normal state (in a state where the back bottom front drive solenoid 3611 is not energized), as shown in FIG. 189 (a), the plunger of the back bottom front drive solenoid 3611 is The coil spring (not shown) is in a state of being advanced (protruded) toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 when viewed from the front. In addition, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the second front decoration 3603 is arranged on the rear side of the back bottom front first decoration 3602 and the back bottom front third decoration 3604.

  In this normal state, when the back lower front drive solenoid 3611 is driven to move the plunger backward (move away from the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100), the slider 3610 connected to the tip of the plunger is also the same as the plunger It will slide a predetermined amount in the direction. When the slider 3610 slides, the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, and 3609a of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 inserted into the transmission portion 3610a of the slider 3610 are transferred to the transmission portion 3610a. Thus, the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 rotate around the axes of the pivots 3602a, 3603a, 3604a. Will be.

  The first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609a of the third crank member 3609 in the back movable front effect unit 3600 are the first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 3609. In the second crank member 3608, the crankpins 3607a and 3608a are disposed by the slider 3610, while the second crank member 3608 is disposed on the upper side than the pivots 3603a. , 3609a in the same direction, only the second crank member 3608, and the first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 3609 rotate in the opposite direction.

  The back of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 are connected by the rotation of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609, respectively. The front first decorative body 3602, the back and front second decorative body 3603, and the back and front third decorative body 3604 rotate respectively. That is, when the back bottom front drive solenoid 3611 is driven to slide the slider 3610, the back bottom front first decoration body 3602 and the back bottom front third decoration body 3604 are respectively rotated in the same direction, The two-decorative body 3603 is turned in the opposite direction to the back-front first decor body 3602 and the back-front third decor body 3604 (see FIG. 189 (b)).

  When the drive of the back lower front drive solenoid 3611 is released, the plunger of the back lower front drive solenoid 3611 moves forward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown), and the slider 3610 also moves to the normal position as the plunger moves. To move and rotate in the opposite direction to the first lower back decoration 3602 and the lower third lower decoration 3604 via the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 Then, the back bottom front first decoration body 3602, the back bottom front second decoration body 3603, and the back bottom front third decoration body 3604 rotate in the opposite direction to the above and return to the normal state.

  As a result, since the back bottom front drive solenoid 3611 can rotate the back bottom front first decoration body 3602, the back bottom front second decoration body 3603, and the back bottom front third decoration body 3604, the back bottom front is operated. By sliding the slider 3610 back and forth in the left-right direction by the drive solenoid 3611, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body are driven by the back lower front drive solenoid 3611. 3604 can be swung freely, and the player's interest can be attracted.

  In addition, the second lower front decoration 3023 disposed between the first lower back decoration 3602 and the third lower back decoration 3604 is the first lower back decoration 3602 and the third lower back decoration. Since it rotates in the opposite direction to the decorative body 3604, the first lower back decoration 3602, the second lower back decoration 3023, and the third lower back decoration 360 move to the player. It is possible to make it possible to enjoy the movement of the first back decoration before the second back decoration 3602, the second back decoration before the second back decoration 3603, and the third back decoration before the back decoration 3604.

[2-15. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 190 to 194. FIG. 190 is a perspective view showing a back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit. FIG. 191 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left movable effect unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 193 is an explanatory view showing the movement of one movable unit in the back left movable effect unit, and FIG. 194 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back left movable effect unit.

  The back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is disposed on the front side of the back inside movable effect unit 3100 on the left side of the opening 3001 c of the back box 3000. The back left movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the unit base 3701 attached to the left of the opening 3001 c on the front side of the back inside movable effect unit 3100 in the back box 3001 and to the front of the unit base 3701 side by side in the vertical direction. Three movable units 3710 (back left upper movable unit 3710 A, back left middle movable unit 3710 B, back left lower movable unit 3710 C), and a light transmitting plate disposed on the front side of the movable unit 3710 and attached to the unit base 3701 Decorative base 3702, a back left decoration substrate 3703 mounted on the front side of the decoration base 3702 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the front side of the back left decoration substrate 3703 is mounted on the decoration base 3702 and the back side is open Shallow box-like, translucent left back A member 3704, and a side decoration substrate 3705 disposed along the right side in a front view between the back left decoration member 3704 and the decoration base 3702 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the right direction; It has.

  The back left movable effect unit 3700 of this example can emit light of the back left decorative member 3704 in a planar shape by causing the LEDs of the back left decorative substrate 3703 to emit light. Although the back left decoration member 3704 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 is not shown in detail, it is arranged on the rear side of the left area of the center character 2500 in front view in the gaming area 1100. By making the back left decorative member 3704 emit light in a plane, the corresponding part of the decorative seal 1102 attached to the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210) partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 is brightly decorated. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous by making the inside of the game area 1100 brighter.

  The unit base 3701 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 is substantially the same as the three first shaft portions 3701a extending forward from near the right end in front view and separated from each other in the vertical direction and each first shaft portion 3701a It has three second shaft portions 3701b arranged at height and extending forward from a position slightly to the right from the left end, and three solenoid attachment portions 3701c arranged at the upper right of each second shaft portion 3701b. . The unit base 3701 is also provided with a forwardly extending mounting boss for mounting the decorative base 3702.

  The three movable units 3710 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 are configured by substantially the same mechanism. The movable unit 3710 has a back left drive solenoid 3711 attached to each of the three solenoid attachment portions 3701 c of the unit base 3701 so that the plunger protrudes downward, and a connecting portion to which the tip of the plunger in the back left drive solenoid 3711 is connected. 3712a, flange 3712b extending in the left-right direction with the connection 3712a halfway, shaft hole 3712c formed on the left end side in front view of the flange 3712b and into which the second shaft 3701b of the unit base 3701 is rotatably inserted, The movable lever 3712 has an elongated hole-like engagement hole 3712d which is formed at the opposite end of the collar 3712b and extends in the same direction as the collar 3712b, and the engagement hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712. Engaging pin 371 rotatably and slidably inserted therein a, a first collar portion 3713b extending rightward in a front view from one end side of the engagement pin 3713a, and a first shaft portion 3701a of the unit base 3701 formed rotatably on the right end side of the first collar portion 3713b An operation lever 3713 having a rotation hole 3713c, and a second collar portion 3713d which is longer than the first collar portion 3713b in a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction in which the first collar portion 3713b extends from the rotation hole 3713c; It has.

  As shown in the figure, the movable lever 3712 of the movable unit 3710 has a connecting portion 3712a that is connected to the plunger of the back left drive solenoid 3711 formed at a position close to the shaft hole 3712c on the base end side. The distance between the engagement hole 3712 d on the tip end side and the connection portion 3712 a is formed longer (four to six times in this example) than the distance between the connection portion 3712 a and the connection portion 3712 a. Thus, the moving distance of the engagement hole 3712 d in the movable lever 3712 is larger than the advancing and retracting distance of the plunger of the back left driving solenoid 3711.

  Further, the movable unit 3710 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 is rotatably supported at the tip of the second collar portion 3713d of the operating lever 3713, and the back left first movable decorative body 3714 provided with a three-dimensional decoration on the front side. The back left first movable decorative body 3714 and the second collar part 3713d are disposed between the second collar part 3713d and rotatably supported at a position substantially in the center in the longitudinal direction of the second collar part 3713d. The back left second movable decorative body 3715 and the back left which is disposed on the rear side of the back left second movable decorative body 3715 and is attached to the front surface of the second collar portion 3713d and has a three-dimensional decoration on the front surface side. A third movable decorative body 3716, and a rear left movable decorative board 3717 mounted on the rear side of the second flange 3713d on the rear side of the rear left third movable decorative body 3716 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing.

  In this example, the actuating lever 3713, the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are each formed to have a light transmitting property, By making the LED of the back left movable decoration substrate 3717 emit light, the back left first movable decoration 3714, the back left second movable decoration 3715, and the back left third movable decoration 3716 can be made to emit light. It has become.

  Next, the movement of the back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described. As shown in FIG. 193 (a), the back left movable effect unit 3700 has a plunger of each back left drive solenoid 3711 projecting downward in three movable units 3710 arranged in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. The distal end side (engagement hole 3712d side) of the movable lever 3712 is positioned below the proximal end side (shaft hole 3712c side). The distal end side (engagement pin 3713a side) of the first flange 3713b of the operation lever 3713 is connected to the rotation hole 3713c (first shaft) via the engagement pin 3713a inserted into the engagement hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712. Part 3701a) is positioned below the rotation hole 3713c, and the second flange part 3713d extending upward from the rotation hole 3713c is positioned on the left side of the rotation hole 3713c in front view.

  Thus, in the normal state, the second flange 3713d of the actuating lever 3713 is located on the left side of the pivot hole 3713c (the first shaft 3701a), so the back left supported by the second flange 3713d The first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are also located on the left side as a whole. Therefore, in the normal state, most of the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are located on the left side of the right end of the unit base 3701. It is difficult to see from the person side (see FIG. 194 (a) and the like).

  When the back left drive solenoid 3711 is driven from this normal state to move the plunger upward, the movable lever 3712 rotates counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3712c as viewed from the front, and engages on the tip side. The hole 3712 d rises and moves to a position higher than the shaft hole 3712 c. When the engaging hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712 is raised, the engaging pin 3713a of the operating lever 3713 inserted into the engaging hole 3712d is also raised, and the entire operating lever 3713 is moved along with the raising of the engaging pin 3713a. It will rotate in the clockwise direction in front view. As a result, the second collar 3713d of the operating lever 3713 moves to a position on the right side of the rotation hole 3713c, and the back left first movable decorative body 3714 supported by the second collar 3713d, the back left second The movable decorative body 3715 and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 also move to the right (see FIG. 193 (b)).

  The actuating lever 3713 is rotated clockwise in a front view by the drive of the back left drive solenoid 3711 and the back left first movable decoration 3714, the back left second movable decoration 3715, and the back left third movable decoration When the 3716 moves to the right, most of the back left first movable decorative body 3714, back left second movable movable body 3715, and back left third movable decorative body 3716 are positioned to the right of the right end of the unit base, It appears on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and can be seen well from the player side (see FIG. 194 (b)).

  When the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are moved by the rotation of the operation lever 3713, the back left first movable decorative body 3714, Since an inertial force acts on the back left second movable decorative body 3715 and the back left third movable decorative body 3716, it is rotated by the inertial force applied to the operation lever 3713 when the rotation is started or when the rotation is stopped. The back left first movable decorative body 3714 and the back left second movable decorative body 3715 supported so as to be able to swing freely.

  When the back left drive solenoid 3711 stops driving (energization) with the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 appearing, The movable lever 3712 is rotated by gravity so that the tip side (engagement hole 3712d side) moves downward, and the plunger of the back left drive solenoid 3711 returns to the normal state protruding downward.

[2-16. Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 139 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from the left and right sides, and is mounted to the back box 3001 via the fixing pieces 1902.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 112 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 195), and the like, and a lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from each speaker 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the like can be adjusted. It has become.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light-brightness white LED as a backlight.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As illustrated, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main substrate 4000 and a group of the peripheral control substrate 4010, and various control is shared by these two groups. The group of main substrates 4000 is configured to include a main control substrate 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game), and a payout control substrate 4110 that controls payout of gaming balls and the like. In addition, the group of peripheral control boards 4010 has a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100 and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g, and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”). . In addition to its built-in ROM 4100 d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100 d”) and main control built-in RAM 4100 e, main control MPU 4100 a monitors a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and prevents fraud. The function of etc. is also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first start port sensor 3022 for detecting a game ball received in the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second start port 2102. 2127 and the detection signal from the second count sensor 2556 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or the magnetic sensor attached to the gate sensor 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3071, the count sensor 2128, and the back unit 3000. A detection signal from the detection sensor 3072 is input via the panel relay board 3012 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100 b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, whereby the starting port solenoid 2121 and the attacker solenoid via the panel relay board 3012 2124, and outputs a drive signal to the second attachment solenoid 2561, or the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3012, the back and back movable presentation unit 3500 back and back decoration board 33501, and the function display board 1191 1st special symbol display 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol storage display 1184, second special symbol storage display 1187, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol storage display 1188, game Drive signal to status indicator 1183 and round indicator 1190 Output to or.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2127, the gate sensor 2402, the count sensor 2128, and the second count sensor 2556. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3071 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2401, so the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2127, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2402 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2127, and the gate sensor 2402. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2103 and the second big prize opening 2552 are opened and the game balls frequently enter, so the count sensor 2128 and the second count sensor 2556 The detection of gaming balls also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 2128 and the second count sensor 2556. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3071 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2104 where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3071 uses a mechanical switch that has a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. To Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness not shown). Although the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the detailed description thereof will be described later, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Describe) BC0 (see FIG. 169). The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e by the capacitor BC0 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851 and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Disbursement control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of game balls and the like controls the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls relating to payout, and the launch solenoid 654, and also sends the ball by the ball feed solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 that performs control, an error LED display 4130 that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error cancel switch 860a for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720 , A ball rail 731 and a ball removing switch 860b for discharging the gaming balls in the winning ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball releasing operation.

[3-2A. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 195, the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. A payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. It is equipped with. The payout control MPU 4111a includes a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), in order to prevent fraud. The function etc. are also built in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c from 4100 being input through the payout control I / O port 4111 b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 may be input, or the ball out switch 750 The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input through the prize ball relay substrate 754 or the like.

  A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e via the winning ball relay substrate 754 of the winning ball device 740 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first sent via the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 4111 e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is first sent to the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay substrate 754, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED indicator. A signal for displaying on 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The serial number is transmitted to the main control board 4100, and the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game arcade (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100 Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 4110), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, announcing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the winning ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, at the inlet of the distribution space 741b in communication with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, the payout rotating body 748 When Informs that it is difficult to rotate the payout rotating body 748) by meshing with the technical ball in the vicinity of the entrance, and indicates that it is a "counting switch error" when the number "3" is displayed (specifically, And, based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, notifying that the counting sensor 751 has a problem), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, the payout Informing that the number of retries for the operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that it is “full” (specifically, from the full detection sensor 550 Based on the detection signal, a notification is issued indicating that the storage space 546 of the fal cover unit 540 is full with the stored gaming balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (payout control Informing that the electrical connection is broken anywhere in the range from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number “9” is displayed, it indicates “in stock” (specifically, That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are firstly transmitted through the frequency display plate 365, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Are input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the gaming ball to be lent according to the ball rental request signal to the payout control board 4110 in a serial system via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received by the port 4111 b and input to the payout control MPU 4111 a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of lent gaming balls, and a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number indicator 365c is a CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the plate 874, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is, as shown in FIG. 195, a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the clock signal, and this A firing solenoid driving circuit 4120d that outputs a driving signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the firing reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit 4120e that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. . The firing timing control circuit 4120 c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120 b so that 100 gaming balls per minute can be shot toward the gaming area 1100 and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 for detecting whether a palm or finger is touching the front of the rotating handle main body 506 and a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the intention of the player The detection signal is first input to the emission control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay substrate 192 and the main side relay terminal plate 880, and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input as a CR connection signal to the emission control input circuit 4120 a and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120 c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 which electrically adjusts the strength to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 is the handle device relay board 192 first, and the main side relay terminal The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d through the plate 880.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d emits a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506 based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120 e receives a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal board 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is inputted. The ball feed member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 by outputting, and the constant current is triggered when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is finished. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, peripheral control board 4010 performs peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from main control board 4100, and liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 195, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from main control board 4100, each decoration board of game board 4 is based on these various commands. Transmit the game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc provided from the lamp driving board serial I / O port to the lamp driving board 3013 or the motor driving board 3015 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 or each decoration provided on the game board 4 A game board side driving light emission data comprising game board light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, a gradation lighting signal, etc. to a color LED etc. of a substrate The dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 transmits the data from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board to each of the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 etc. attached to the back surface of the back box 3001. And other door drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source, and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 5. Door side light emission data for the door side drive light emission data from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port through the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. Transmit control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to 194 or displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the serial I / O port for liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 In addition to or, or output control signal for extracting the sound information from the sound ROM4140d (sound command) to the sound source IC4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detecting sensors for detecting original positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are respectively relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. Via the peripheral control MPU 4140a. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are door frame base substrates. A peripheral control MPU 4140 a is input through the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and is provided to the main frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. matched to various effects flow from the speaker 821 and provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the door frame base board 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control substrate 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control substrate box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4140 a, peripheral control unit 4140 is an external watchdog timer not shown (hereinafter “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its system is running out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side on / off blink command, game board side on / off blink command, movable body outputted from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the respective relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 etc. attached to the back surface of the back box 3001 This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the drive command and the display command, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 are supplied with a lighting signal or a blinking signal through the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 based on the received door frame side lighting blink command. A lighting signal or flickering based on the game board side lighting flickering command that is output to the LEDs such as the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided on the door frame 5. Output a signal to the LEDs on the decorative board 2153, 2310, 2311, 2511, 2610, 2611, 3062, 3125, 3305, 3353, 3501, 3525, 363, 3703, 3705, 3717, etc. provided on the game board 4 To do. Also, each of the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 receives the drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body, and the door frame 5 through the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. Output to the dial drive motor 414 provided in the drive motor, each drive motor 3161, 316, 3219, 3254, 3307, 3402, 3516, 3556, etc. provided in the game board 4, and the drive solenoid 2330, 2630, 3611, 1371 etc. To do.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the tray unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It is input through the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc. attached to the rear surface of the 3001.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 and peripheral side relay terminals Speakers of the main body frame 3 from the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 through the plate 882 or through the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, and 3069 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. From 821, control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers disposed on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 disposed above the gaming window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2-channel stereo signal, a 4-channel stereo signal, a 2.1-channel surround signal or a 4.1-channel surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added, etc.) to a low-pitch speaker 821 Thus, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) with a sense of reality more than before.

[3-4. Liquid crystal control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 195, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the peripheral control substrate 4010 stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands and various data. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d. And a character RAM 4150e to which various stored data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw on the liquid crystal display device 1900. I have control. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an execution signal (to be described later) from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the top screen data. Extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs a running signal indicating that fact to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a method to output.

  The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. As the capacity of the character ROM 4150 d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150 d can not be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150 d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150 e having a high access speed, and sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150 e. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150 d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. The sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the positions to be arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap with each other.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats main scanning to set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front, and repeats main scanning in the direction intersecting the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the liquid crystal display device 1900 receives the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the main scanning is sequentially performed for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It outputs to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the pixels are output to pixels for one line sequentially from left to right.

[4. Game contents]
The game contents in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, the functional configuration relating to the game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that a functional configuration relating to payout of game balls will be omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game control, effect control, and the like are embodied by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a. When a game ball detection signal is input from the gate sensor 2402 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 for generating a predetermined normal random number that is a lottery result for the normal symbol, and the generated normal random number are determined in advance. ROM of main control board 4100 for normal symbol hold storage means 4202 temporarily stored according to the above condition, and normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result based on the normal random number stored in normal symbol hold storage means 4202 Normal symbol variation pattern selecting means 4204 for selecting from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in the normal symbol display control means for variably displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern 4206 and displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 by the normal symbol display control means 4206. When the random number (ordinary lottery result) is “normal hit”, the start opening solenoid 2121 is driven to expand the pair of movable pieces 2105 and the normal symbol hold storage means 4202 is stored. An ordinary symbol storage number display control means 4210 for displaying on the ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188 the number of the ordinary drawing random numbers as the storage number is provided.

  The normal symbol holding storage unit 4202 described above has a predetermined number (for example, four) of the normal random numbers generated by the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate sensor 2402 while the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display control unit 4206 ) And hold the execution of the stored random number until the variable display of the symbol is possible.

  In addition, on the main control board 4100, the first predetermined lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first starting opening sensor 3022 by the start winning to the first starting opening 2101 A first special random number generation means 4212 for generating a special random number, and a first special symbol hold storage means 4214 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated in the first special random number generation means 4212 according to a predetermined condition; Generated based on the first special lottery result based on the first special random number stored by the first special symbol reserve storage means 4214 and the detection signal detected by the first starting opening sensor 3022 by the start winning to the first starting opening 2101 The first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the changed random number is selected from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. The first special symbol of the first special symbol display 1185 is variably displayed based on the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 and the first special symbol variation pattern selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 The number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol display control means 4218 and the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 is displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 as the number of first special symbols stored number Display control means 4220.

  Furthermore, on the main control board 4100, a second predetermined special lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start opening sensor 2127 by the start winning to the second start opening 2102 A second special random number generating means 4222 for generating a special random number; a second special symbol holding storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated by the second special random number generating means 4222 according to a predetermined condition; The second special lottery result based on the second special random number stored in the second special symbol retention storage means 4224 and the occurrence based on the detection signal detected by the second starting opening sensor 2127 by the start winning to the second starting opening 2102 The second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the changed random number is selected from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. The second special symbol of the second special symbol display 1186 is variably displayed based on the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 and the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 Second special symbol memory number display to display the second special symbol memory display 1187 as the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol display control means 4228 and the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 Control means 4230.

  These first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and second special symbol hold storage means 4224 are newly added special symbols such as the first and second special symbol display control means 4218 and 4228 are variably displayed. When the first special random number and the second special random number are triggered by the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2127, respectively. ) And the execution of the stored first special random number and second special random number is suspended until the special symbol can be changed.

  The main control board 4100 receives the first special random number and the second special random number held by the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 for the start winnings 2101 and 2102. Priority reserved digesting means 4231 for executing (digesting) the second special random number in preference to the timing is provided, and the priority reserved digesting means 4231 relates to the second special random number; The lottery result hold is prioritized (digested).

  The main control board 4100 also includes a first special random number (first special lottery result) and a second special random number (second special random number) stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224. Advantages of generating a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the special lottery result based on the special lottery result is “big hit” and generating a small hit gaming state when the special lottery result is “small hit” Based on an instruction from the gaming state generation means 4232 and the advantageous gaming state generation means 4232, the opening / closing member 2106 or the second opening / closing member 2553 for closing the grand prize opening 2103 or the second big prize opening 2552 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. And a special winning opening / closing control means 4234 for controlling the driving of the attacker solenoid 2124 or the second attacker solenoid 2561. In this example, the special winning opening / closing drive control means 4234 drives, for example, the attacker solenoid 2124 when the special lottery result is "big hit", and the second attacker solenoid 2561 when the special lottery result is "small hit". It comes to drive.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 includes a first special symbol variation pattern table and a second special lottery result according to a special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the first special random number or the second special random number. A variation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the special symbol variation pattern table is further provided. The variation pattern table changing means 4236 changes to a variation pattern table (for example, a variation pattern table in a low probability non-short-time state or a variation pattern table in a high-probability time-short state) according to the gaming state.

  Furthermore, the main control board 4100 has a special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the first special random number and the second special random number, the first special lottery result and the variable random number. Based on one special symbol variation pattern, the second special symbol variation pattern according to the second special lottery result and the random number, and the first special symbol memory, the second special symbol memory, etc. Command generating means 4238 for generating a command for use, and command transmitting means 4240 for transmitting the command generated by the command generating means 4238 to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is transparent by the player rotating the handle device 500 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game is started with a game ball by being driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged on the front surface of the panel 1200. A game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the left or right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. It should be noted that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted at a suitable position in the front of the game panel 1200 with a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball is in contact with the obstacle nails to allow the game balls to flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 flows down the left side from the approximate center in the left-right direction and reaches the peripheral wall 2503 of the center character 2500, the peripheral wall 2503 descends from the left side. It is guided to the area on the left. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2500 enters and passes through the gate portion 2401 of the gate member 2400 disposed on the left side of the center character 2500 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402, the detection signal is Therefore, the main control board 4100 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result by the normal random number generation means 4200. Then, based on the ordinary random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), Normal symbols extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) elapse and based on normal random numbers (normal lottery results) are stop displayed (normal symbol indicator 1189 emits either red or green) . The normal symbol fluctuation display is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 4204.

  Specifically, in the case where the drawn normal random number is a "normal hit" random number, stop display is made with a normal symbol that suggests a hit (normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the drawn normal random number is a "normal loss" random number In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second start port 2102 are expanded for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the first A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2102.

  The fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second start opening 2102 may be changed according to the game state, for example, when controlled to a non-short time state The fluctuation time may be changed to a short time or the expansion time may be changed to a long time as compared with the case where control is performed in the short time state. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern in the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 can be easily changed by selecting it after replacing it with a table different for each gaming state it can.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, an area where a game ball can flow down from the center in the left-right direction is provided on the upper side of the center accessory 2500, but the right side from the center extends along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 And enter the second game area 2551 disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 through the arc-shaped passage extending downward, and then from the first outlet 2578 to the top of the shelf 2601a of the front right movable effect unit 2600. Are released to the upper right of the attacker unit 2100 below the stage 2510 in the gaming area 1100 and flow down in the gaming area 1100. Thus, in the normal gaming state, when the game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center character 2500 without having an opportunity to enter the gate member 2400 or the warp entrance 2504. As the number decreases, the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable.

  Therefore, the player plays the game by appropriately adjusting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 so that the game ball flows down the left side region from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 2500, and strongly strengthens the game ball against the dark clouds. It is possible to suppress the game operation such as driving and entertain the game by the operation of the original handle device 500 of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent the interest from deteriorating. Note that the second game area 2551 can be easily driven into the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 simply by operating the handle device 500 to be driven strongly without adjusting the rotation amount of the handle device 500 as appropriate. When the second big prize opening 2552 is in the open state, it becomes easy to aim at the second big prize opening 2552, and the second big prize opening 2552 is surely received to entertain the player. It is possible to

  By the way, in this example, when passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2402 while the normal symbol is being changed and displayed in the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol during the change is stopped and the ordinary generated and extracted earlier Until the result of the random number is determined, the ordinary random number (including the ordinary pattern variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2402 is temporarily stored by the ordinary symbol storage means 4202 and its display is performed. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of reservations) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 1188. This ordinary symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit indicates the number of memories, and in this example, it is possible to store and display up to four. ing. When the number of memories exceeds four, the normal random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2402 is discarded.

  In addition, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 and has flowed down the left side of the center role 2500 is moved toward the center of the game area 1100 below the center role 2500 by the shelf 2301a of the front left movable effect unit 2300. It is like that. When a game ball wins a general winning opening 2104 arranged below the center bonus 2500 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3071, the main control board 4100 pays out a payout control board 4110 based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is sent to the payout control board 4110 according to the payout command, and the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 is controlled so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are placed on the upper plate 301. To be paid out.

  In addition, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning opening 2104, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the large winning opening 2103, and the second large winning opening 2552 In this case, it is provided at the center lower end in the left-right direction of the game area 1100, and is discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 from the out port 1232 (1151). In addition, even if the game ball is won in any of the general winning opening 2104, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the special winning opening 2103, and the second large winning opening 2552, the gaming balls that have won are The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear side without being returned to the area 1100.

  On the other hand, when the gaming ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2504 opened on the left side of the center character 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500. Then, the gaming balls supplied onto the stage 2510 roll on the stage 2510 in the left-right direction, are mainly discharged forward from the guiding surface 2511, and are returned to the inside of the gaming area 1100.

  On the other hand, when the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2410 enters the chance entrance 2514 which opens to the rear side at the approximate center in the horizontal direction, the gaming area 1100 starts from the chance exit 2515 which opens immediately above the first starting opening 2101. It is discharged inward and can be received to the first starting port 2101 with high probability. Then, when the gaming ball is received by the first starting opening 2101 and detected by the first starting opening sensor 3022, a predetermined number (for example, three) of gaming balls are received from the winning ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 etc. Is to be dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first start port 2101, the second start port 2102, and the big prize opening 2103 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls released from the stage 2510 are The first start port 2101 and the like are received with a high probability, and when the second start port 2102 and the grand prize winning port 2103 are acceptable, there is a high possibility that the game ball will be received when it is released from the stage 2510. Therefore, not only the first start port 2101 but also the second start port 2102 and the big prize opening 2103 can be expected to have an expectation regarding the acceptance of the game balls, thereby enhancing the interest.

  By the way, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2401 of the gate member 2400 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402 and the "normal hit" is drawn as a normal lottery result, as described above, the second starting opening 2102 is closed. When the pair of movable pieces 2105 is expanded for a predetermined time to be able to win, and the game ball is accepted by the second start opening 2102 and detected by the second start opening sensor 2127 when the winning is possible, main control A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 301 from the winning ball device 740 via the substrate 4100 and the like.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, and detected by the first starting opening sensor 3022 and the second starting opening sensor 2127, the first starting The first special random number generation means 4212 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number in the mouth 2101, and the second start random number 2102 generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number by the second special random number generation means 4222. It will be. Then, after the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started based on the extracted special random number, The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as the special lottery result.

  In the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode indicating "big hit", the opening / closing member of the attacker unit 2100 according to the big hit mode A big hit game state occurs in which the second opening / closing member 2553 of the 2106 or the second attacking unit 2550 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and in the meantime, the game ball is won to the big winning opening 2103 or the second big winning opening 2402 , You can get more game balls. In addition, when one game ball wins the big winning opening 2103 or the second big winning hole 2402, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the winning ball device 740. .

  In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 in a manner suggesting “small hit”, the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 has a predetermined pattern. A small hit gaming state that opens and closes at the time of occurrence occurs, and in the meantime, a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2103 so that more game balls can be obtained. When a single game ball wins the big prize opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  In addition, also in these 1st starting opening 2101 and 2nd starting opening 2102, the 1st special symbol indicator 1185 and the 2nd special symbol display as well as the fluctuation indication of the normal design by passage of the game sphere to gate component 2400 The game ball wins in the starting opening 2101 and 2102 when the special symbol in the special symbol in the container 1186 is fluctuatingly displayed or the special symbol such as in the big hit gaming state can not be variably displayed, and the first starting opening sensor 3022 and the second starting The first special random number or the first special random number extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 3022 and the second starting opening sensor 2127 until the variation display of the special symbol becomes possible when the opening sensor 2127 detects it or The second special random number is stored in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 or the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 and the display thereof is put on hold, the memory The number of special random numbers, and displays in the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 or the second special symbol memory indicator 1187.

  Each of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 consists of two LEDs, and the combination of the light-emitting states of the light-off, light-on, and blinking LEDs indicates the number of memories. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded. In addition, the second special random number stored (held) by the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 by the priority hold and digest unit 4231 has priority over the first special random number stored by the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 Are to be carried out (digested). That is, withholding of the lottery result relating to the second starting port 2102 and the third starting port 2415 is executed (digested) in preference to holding of the lottery result relating to the first starting port 2101.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting port sensor 3022 and the second starting port sensor 2127 and the special random number of the second special random number are used in a predetermined jackpot determination table. , It is determined whether the special random number is “lost”, “small hit”, or “big hit”, and is detected by the first start port sensor 3022 when the first start port 2101 is started. The first symbol random number extracted on the basis of the detected signal and the second symbol random number extracted on the basis of the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 2127 by the start winning to the second start port 2102 and the symbol determination table By checking, “big hit” is either “10R big hit” or “15R big hit”, or “probable change short no hit” “probable variable hit”, “short time hit”, “probable change short time” Ri "and the like is adapted to also be determined.

  When the special lottery result based on the first special random number or the second special random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 is “small hit” The main control board 4100 closes the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 in an open state for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds; in this example, approximately 0.5 seconds). The opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

  On the other hand, when the special lottery result based on the extracted first special random number and the second special random number is "big hit", the main control board 4100 is opened or closed member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second After the second opening / closing member 2553 of the unit 2550 is in an open state, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds for a long time opening, about 0.5 seconds similar to a small hit for a short time opening), or An opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that closes the opening / closing member 2106 when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy the winning prize opening 2103 when any of the winning conditions is satisfied. , And repeats a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds), 10 rounds for “10R big hit”, 15 rounds for “15R big hit”, respectively. , It adapted to generate a favorable jackpot gaming state to the player. In addition, after the end of the predetermined number of rounds, the "big hit" exchanges the big hit determination table with one of the big hit determination table at the high probability and the big hit determination table at the low probability according to the gaming state determined by the symbol random number. It is supposed to be.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special random number and the second special random number which are extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102 and the third starting opening 2415 In addition to the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 fluctuatingly displayed (according to the special lottery result), the special random number (also in the liquid crystal display device 1900) The effect image according to the special lottery result) is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, each decoration is displayed in such a manner that a series of decorative symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol and right decorative symbol) Variation display of the symbol row is started, and then stop display is sequentially displayed (in this example, it is stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol), and finally all decorative symbol rows are stopped and displayed Then, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state is suggested to the player side. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning combination, after the plurality of decorative symbol rows are variably displayed, the effect image to be stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed. In addition, since the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is larger than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol displays 1185 and 1186, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. We will pay attention to the decorative pattern.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 231). The variation display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. ing. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the player particularly pays attention to is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command to increase the symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Further, in the peripheral control unit 4140, in addition to the control of the effect image, the drive motors 3161, 3181, 3219, 3254, 3307, 3402, which are provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, based on the command related to the lottery result. The decorative boards 2153, 2310, 2311, 2511, 2610, 2611, 3062, 3125, 3305, 3353, 3501 provided on the game board 4 while appropriately operating 3516, 3556 and drive solenoids 2330, 2630, 3611, 3711. , 3525, 3614, 3703, 3705, 3717 are adapted to emit light appropriately, and the player can be entertained by a movable effect and a light effect.

[5. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (in particular, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 197 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment first stores various registers and RAMs as processing in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100 c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can not be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a receives the clear signal. When it is determined that there is, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is executed. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). And execute recovery processing to recover the state according to the information. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100 c is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is set in the initial state by executing the initialization process without executing the recovery process.

  Next, as the process of step S2, the update of the random number which is the number updated within a predetermined numerical range is performed. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. Reach by the variable random number used for the lottery process for a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the display, the decorative symbol variable display executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the special symbol variable display (Left decorative design and right decorative design are stopped in the same design and the middle decorative design is not yet stopped, or the left, middle and right decorative designs are all displayed in the same design. Reach random numbers used in lottery processing for determining whether or not to win, symbol random numbers used in lottery processing to determine the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is based on the special random number ( One symbol random number, the second symbol random number), and a random number counter for storing random numbers such like, random numbers to be subjected (usually random) in accordance lottery processing operation triggered become per the Toraku of the movable piece 2105.

  In this example, the first random symbol common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used, that is, even when the first start opening 2101 is started, the second start opening 2102 is started. Even if it is configured, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach ratio of the reach effect is obtained by acquiring from the counter in which the random number range for updating the reach random number is different. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 197 (b) is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 197 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as processing of step S12, detection signals from various switches such as the gate sensor 2402, the first start port sensor 3070, the second start port sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, the general winning port sensor 3071, and the like are received. It is input. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) relating to the display mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are updated Counter operation is performed.

  And after updating the random number in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs a special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the above special symbol as the process of step S14. Execute. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (a first special symbol process flag, a first special symbol process flag, the first special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a) Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on (2) special symbol process flag).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a winning win as an operation trigger of the movable piece 2105 as the process of step S15. Also in this normal symbol process processing, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is configured so that the drive frequency of the movable piece 2105 is higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state (excluding a part of the 10R big hit gaming state). A lottery process is executed (so-called short-time state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game state, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is shortened, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained. When a hit is made, such a short time state is realized by extending the opening time of the movable piece 2105 and increasing the number of times the movable piece 2105 is opened.

  When the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next performs the special symbol process process as a process of step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in the predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information (15R big hit, 10R big hit) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the process of step S18. .

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the first start port sensor 3070, the second start port sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, the general winning port sensor 3071, etc. as the process of step S19. When the signal is in the on state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 1186 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signal is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4110a mounted on the payout control board 1186 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 so as to pay out a prize ball to the player.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next executes a storage process of checking the increase and decrease of the number of starting memories as the process of step S20. Next, test terminal processing, which is processing of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed as the process of step S21. After that, while performing drive control of the actuator which always operates (step S22), the contents of the above register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt enabled state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag may be set to indicate that an interrupt has occurred. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 198, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first uses the first starting opening sensor 3070. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first start port 2101) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first starting opening passage process such as storing in one special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S32). In addition, the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number under the condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 2127 is in the on state (the second starting opening 2102 is present) (step S33) A second start port passage process is performed such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S40) is performed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the stop of the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is "15R (right) positive variation big hit (specific 1)", "10R (Right) When it comes to a mode that suggests definite variation big hit (specification 2) or "15R (right) rank up certainty variation large hit (specification 3)", the above 2nd big winning opening according to 15R or 10R big hit gaming state When 2552 is controlled to be open and “10R (left) probability variation big hit (specific 4)” or “15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit (specific 5)” is suggested, 15R or long open In response to the 10R big hit game state of the game, the winning prize opening 2103 is controlled to be in an open state, and when it becomes a mode that suggests “10R (left) latent probability change big hit (specific 6)”, a short release 10R big hit game State In response to execute a process of controlling the open state the special winning opening 2103.

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S36), and the small hit execution flag is set. If is set, a small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) has become a mode that suggests "small hit", A process of controlling the large winning opening 2103 to the open state is executed in accordance with the small hit gaming state similar to the 10R big hit gaming state which is open for a short time.

  If neither big hit execution flag nor small hit execution flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “ On the condition that it is “0” (step S37), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol is suspended. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not “0” (step S37), the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is applied. The second special symbol process process including the lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3070 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2101, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value by the first special reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S41. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of the above-mentioned 1st special symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put variable display control of the first special symbol into a state of suspension The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the process of step S44, the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as each random number acquired in this way To store.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S42 to S44, the first special symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S43. Whether or not, if the big hit is a big hit type, if the big hit or small hit is not, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or the type type of the game effect to be executed After performing the effect predetermination process for determining the predetermination information such as before the start of the variable display according to the start winning (step S45), the process ends.

  FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start port passing process (step S34).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2127 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2102, as shown in FIG. 200. In step S51, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S51, if it is determined that the second special symbol hold count is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. Processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, in the process of step S52, the second special hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the processing in step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the process of step S54, the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as each random number thus acquired To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S52 to S54.

  FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect pre-determination process (steps S45 and S55). When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 starts the effect advance determination processing, the advance determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A) and the acquired random numbers, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, Whether it will be a big hit or a small hit by comparing it with the fluctuating random number, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, reach production as a game effect to be executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 if it is not a big hit or a small hit. To identify the type of game effect to be executed (step S61).

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first starting opening passage process, a high probability flag indicating that control of the high probability state is being executed is set. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit by comparing the high probability big hit judgment value with the first special random number, and if the high probability flag is not set, the low probability big hit judgment value and the first By comparing with one special random number, it is specified whether or not it is a big hit. This high probability big hit judgment value (3819-3918) is the same as the big hit judgment value set in the high probability big hit judgment table (see FIG. 206 (A) to be described later) and compared with the first special random number. The jackpot judgment value (3909-3918) of low probability and low probability is set in the jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 206 (A) at low probability described later) and is used as a jackpot judgment value to be compared with the first special random number. The same random number is assumed. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number and the predetermination table in step S61, whether or not to be a big hit is accurately identified, and "big hit 1 to 12" to be a big hit as predetermination information, not a big hit It can be classified into either “losing” or “reach 1 to 4”.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first start port passage process, the same randomness is obtained regardless of whether or not the high probability flag is set. It is also specified whether or not it will be a small hit by comparing the small hit judgment value set in the numerical value with the first special random number. These small hit determination values (3800-3818) at the time of high probability or low probability are set in a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 206 (A)) at the time of high probability or low probability, which will be described later, and the first special random number. It is set to the same random number as the small hit determination value compared with. Therefore, by comparing the first special random number and the predetermination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it will be a small hit, and classified into "big hit 12" that includes a small hit as the predetermination information. be able to.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second start port passing process, a high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit by comparing the high probability big hit judgment value with the second special random number, and if the high probability flag is not set, the low probability big hit judgment value It is determined whether or not it becomes a big hit by comparing the second special random number with the second special random number. This high probability big hit judgment value (3819-3918) is the same as the big hit judgment value to be compared with the second special random number set in the high probability big hit judgment table (see FIG. 206 (A) described later). The jackpot judgment value (3909-3918) of low probability is a numerical value and the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 206A) at a low probability described later and compared with the second special random number. The same random number is assumed. For this reason, by comparing the second special random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it is a big hit, and "big hit 1 to 12" to be a big hit as the prior determination information. It can be classified into either “losing” or “reach 1 to 4”.

  In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), if it is determined in step S61 that the first special random number is compared with the pre-determination table and a big hit is specified, a determination value indicating which big hit is to be made. And the first symbol random number are used to identify the type of jackpot. Specifically, the determination value (64-175) indicating that the jackpot of the specific 1 is to be set is a determination value to be set in the symbol determination table (see FIG. 206C) to be described later and compared with the first symbol random number. The judgment value (0-63) which is made the same random value as the judgment value which shows that it makes the big hit of the specific 1 among them, and shows that it makes it as the specified 2 to 5 or the non specified big hit is the symbol determination table (described later) Among the determination values set in FIG. 206C (see (C)) and compared with the first symbol random number, it is a random number value identical to the determination value indicating that it is specified as specified 2 to 5 or non-specified big hit. The determination value (176-199) indicating that it is a big hit is a specific big hit among the determination values that are set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 206C) described later and are compared with the first symbol random number. It is the same random value as the judgment value indicating

  In addition, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when it is determined that a big hit is made, a plurality of types of reach effects are obtained by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. Which of the reach productions is executed to identify the big hit. Specifically, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the specific 1 big hit is the same as the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. A determination indicating that a super-reach effect (hereinafter also referred to as weak SP reach) with a low jackpot expectation level (expectation level at which the big-hit mode is displayed, that is, an expectation level at which the jackpot game state is displayed) is executed. The value (5-29) is set to the same random value as the determination value indicating that the super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation degree is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers, and the super-reaching effect having a high jackpot expectation degree. A determination value (30-216) indicating that a part other than a specific super reach production (also referred to as a specific strong SP reach) is executed (hereinafter also referred to as a strong SP reach). Among the determination values compared with the random numbers, the same random number value as the determination value indicating that the super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation level other than the specific super-reach effect is executed, and the super reach with a high jackpot expectation level Among the effects, the determination value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed is the same value as the determination value indicating that the specific super reach effect is to be executed among the determination values compared with the random numbers. It is considered as a numerical value.

  Further, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the specific 2-5 or non-specific big hit is the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The determination value (5-29), which is the same random number value and indicates that the super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation level is to be executed, is a super-reach effect having a low jackpot expectation level among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (30 to 216) indicating that the determination value (30-216) other than a specific super reach effect is executed is compared with the random number value, which is the same random value as the determination value indicating execution. The same random number value as the judgment value indicating that a super-reach production with a high degree of expectation of jackpots other than a specific super-reach production is performed, A determination value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super-reach effects having a high waiting level indicates that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The random number is the same as the judgment value.

  The determination value (0-89) indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed in the big hit of 6 is the same random value as the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The determination value (90-189) indicating that the super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation level is to be executed indicates that the super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation level is to be executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. A determination value (190-216) indicating that a random value that is the same as the determination value and that is not a specific super reach effect among the super reach effects with a high expectation degree of jackpot is performed is a determination value that is compared with the variable random number. Out of a specific super reach production, it is the same random number as the judgment value indicating that a super reach production with a high expectation level of big hit is performed, and the big hit expectation degree Among the high super reach effects, a determination value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed is a determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the determination values that are compared with the variable random numbers. The same random number is used.

  For this reason, by comparing the first symbol random number and the prior determination table in step S61, and comparing the variable random number and the prior determination table, the type of the big hit is accurately identified, and from the normal reach as the prior determination information Specific 1 big hit as "big hit 1", specific 1 big hit from weak SP reach "big hit 2", specific big hit from strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach "big hit 3" , "Big hit 4" as a specific one big hit from a specific strong SP reach, "big hit 5" that includes a specific 2-5 or non-specific big hit from a normal reach, a specific 2-5 from a weak SP reach or non "Big hit 6" that includes a specific big hit, "big hit 7" that includes a specific 2-5 or non-specific big hit from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach, a specific strong SP “Big hit 8” that includes specified 2 to 5 or non-specified big hit from Ji, “big hit 9” that sets the big hit for specified 6 from normal reach, and “big hit 10” that sets the big hit for weak SP reach It can be classified as either "big hit 11" as a specific 6 big hit from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach, or "big hit 12" as a specific 6 big hit from a specific strong SP reach.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), if it is determined in step S61 that the second special random number is compared with the prior determination table and the big hit is specified, the determination value indicating which big hit is to be determined. And the second symbol random number are identified. Specifically, the determination value (64-199) indicating that it is a big hit of the specific 1 is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 206C) described later and is compared with the second symbol random number. Among them, the determination value (0-63) indicating that it is the same random number as the determination value indicating that it is a specific 1 big hit, and the specific 2-5 or non-specific big win is a symbol determination table (to be described later) Among the determination values set in FIG. 206C (refer to FIG. 206C) and compared with the second symbol random number, it is a random value identical to the determination value indicating specification 2 to 5 or non-specific big hit. In addition, when comparing the second symbol random number and the preliminary determination table in step S61, as in the case of comparing the first symbol random number and the preliminary determination table described above, a determination value indicating which reach effect is executed. By comparing the random number with the variable random number, it is specified which reach effect is to be performed among the plurality of reach effects to be a big hit. For this reason, in step S61, by comparing the second symbol random number and the advance determination table, and by comparing the variable random number and the advance determination table, the type of the big hit is specified accurately, It can be classified into any one of “1” to “12 jackpots”.

  Also, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when a high probability flag indicating that control of a high probability state is being executed is set when it is specified that it is out, reach is displayed. Specify whether to display reach by comparing reach reach value at the time of probability change and reach random number, which indicates that the time is displayed, and the time-shortening flag indicating that control of time-shortening state (low probability time-shorting state) is executed If it is set, it is determined whether or not the reach is displayed by comparing the reach determination value indicating that the reach is displayed and the reach random number, and the high probability flag or the time flag is not set. In the case where it indicates that the control in the normal state is being executed, whether or not the reach is to be displayed is specified by comparing the reach determination value at the normal time indicating that the reach is displayed with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change is set to a reach determination table at the time of probability change (see FIG. 206B), which will be described later, and is the same random value as the reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number. The reach judgment value (0-5) at the time is set as a reach judgment value to be compared with the reach random number set in the reach judgment table (refer to FIG. 206 (B)) at the time of short. The reach judgment value (0-6) at the time is set to the same random judgment value as the reach judgment value set in the normal reach judgment table (see FIG. 206 (B) described later) and compared with the reach random number . For this reason, by comparing the reach random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, it is accurately determined whether or not the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the big hit is not made. It can be classified into any of “reach” in which reach is not displayed (information for performing reach effect) and “reach 1 to 4” in which the effect is indicated (execution of effect effect).

  In addition, the reach judgment value (0-5) at the time of short time and the reach judgment value (0-6) at the normal time include the same judgment value (0) as the reach judgment value (0) at the time of probability change. When the same reach determination value and the reach random number match, it is classified whether the reach is displayed (reach effect is executed) in any of the game states at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal time. Therefore, by comparing the reach random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is specified whether the reach effect is executed as the game effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 in any game state at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal time. can do.

  202A, when a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a determination value indicating which reach effect is executed is compared with a variable random number. The mode classification of the game effect to be executed is specified. Specifically, the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed is set in a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later, and the normal reach effect among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (164-222) indicating the execution of the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree is a random value that is the same as the determination value indicating execution of the reach, and a reach variation pattern table (not shown) described later ) Is set to the same random value as the determination value indicating that the super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation level is to be executed among the determination values to be compared with the variable random numbers, and the super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation level is specified. The determination value (223-235) indicating that the other than the super reach effect is executed is a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later. ) Is set to the same random number as the determination value indicating that a super-reaching effect having a high jackpot expectation level other than a specific super-reach effect is performed, and the jackpot expectation degree A determination value (236-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super reach effects having a high value is set in a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach, which will be described later, and compared with a variable random number. Of the values, the same random value as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be performed is used. For this reason, by comparing the variable random number with the advance determination table in step S61, the mode type of the game effect to be executed is accurately specified, and “reach 1” for executing the normal reach effect as the advance determination information, the jackpot expectation degree “Reach 2” for low super-reach production, “Reach 3” for high-reach super-reach production (other than specific super-reach production), High-reach super-reach production (specific super reach production) ) Can be classified into any one of “reach 4”. Then, by comparing the reach random number with the advance determination table in step S61, the advance determination information can be classified into any one of “reach 1” to “reach 4”.

  As described above, as a result of comparison between the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A) and the acquired random number (special random number, symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) If it does not, the reach effect is executed as the game effect to be executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 if it does not become the big hit or the small hit, or the prior determination information such as the type of game effect to be executed is specified. As shown in FIG. 202 (B), the pre-determination information is classified into one of 17 types: “lost”, “big hit 1” to “big hit 12”, “reach 1” to “reach 4”.

  Then, in the production prior determination process (steps S45 and S55), the specified prior determination information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, if it is not a big hit or a big hit or a small hit) The reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or the type of the game effect to be executed), and the acquired special random number type (either the first special random number or the second special random number) Then, a hold number (value of the hold number counter) stored in correspondence with the acquired special random number and a hold number command corresponding to the set number are set. For example, in the production pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the number of first special symbols held A first special symbol hold number command corresponding to (the value of the first special hold number counter) is set (step S62). Note that in the fourth digit of the number-of-holds command (for example, 620XH when the prior determination information regarding the first special symbol is “losing”), when the number of held = 1, X = 2 and the number of held = 2. Sometimes X = 3, X = 4 when the number of holds = 3, and X = 5 when the number of holds = 4. For this reason, when the hold number command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010, the start opening (one of the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102) where the start winning is generated, the start In addition to the number of holds stored corresponding to the mouth, whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is a big hit or a small hit, When it is not a small hit, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or prior determination information such as a type type of a game effect to be executed is started to be displayed in accordance with the start winning. The peripheral control MPU 4140a previously mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 can be grasped.

  In this example, the same random number as the jackpot determination value in the prior determination table and the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table described later is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot determination value of the pre-judgment table includes only a part of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table, or a part or all of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table is different from the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table. It may be configured to include a random number of numbers, and the degree of possibility of being a big hit in the effect pre-determination process may be determined.

  Specifically, a part of the big hit judgment value and the outlier judgment value (which may include the small hit judgment value) different from the big hit judgment value can be distinguished as a high probability random number group, and the high probability random number group A high probability random number determining means having a ratio of the jackpot determination value that can be discriminated as to the outlier determination value set higher than a ratio of the jackpot determination table in which the winning probability of the jackpot is determined, and random number acquisition Of the random numbers acquired by the means, the winning random number (first special random number, second special random number) is classified into either the above-mentioned loss determination value or the above jackpot determination value, and this is not executed. Value of the high probability random number provided to the same judgment while belonging to the high probability random number group in which the big hit judgment value and the out judgment value are mixed. It is provided with pseudo-probability advance determination means that makes it possible to execute an advance determination on the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the jackpot winning for each determination process that is put on hold by determining whether or not there is The above-described pseudo-probability advance determination means may determine in advance the degree of expectation related to the big win.

  In this way, by providing means for determining the high probability random number having the big hit judgment value and the negative judgment value mixed, there is a risk that confidential information about the success result of the big hit judgment still in the pending state may be leaked. While maintaining the conventional effect structure excluding the above, with regard to the degree of expectation (pseudo-wining probability) relating to the above-mentioned big hit corresponding to the mixture ratio of the big hit judgment value and the falling judgment value in the high probability random number determination means The precedent determination can be made executable. For example, prior to the execution of the above-mentioned big hit judgment (digestion of the judgment processing), the prior judgment that the success random number provided for the big hit judgment is a value belonging to the high probability random number group (specific hit judgment value) was not made When the decision processing based on a random value (a value belonging to a low probability random number group which is paired with a high probability random number group) which is not the precedently determined special hit judgment value is expected, the expectation pertaining to the jackpot winning It is determined that the degree (pseudo-winning probability) is lower than the expected value of the jackpot (winning probability) (pseudo-lowered winning probability).

  According to the preceding determination method for such a high probability random number group, when the specific determination process is put on hold, the jackpot determination is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). In addition, the expected degree (pseudo-winning probability) can be notified in advance, for example, at a predetermined timing such as at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display corresponding to the hold-up. Will be

  FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process processing (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process treatments will be selectively executed in accordance with the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and a lottery process for a display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol (step S81 )
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped (step S83)
5. The first special symbol display mode 1185 is displayed as the first special symbol display 1185 when the first special symbol variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variation control suspension of the first special symbol. First special symbol stop processing to stop the variation display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 197).

  FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 204, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first executes step S101. As processing of, it is judged whether there is fluctuation display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the same RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stored in each storage area. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas of 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  After that, as the process of step S105, the big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the above big hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81) (step S106), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is in the high probability state shown in FIG. 206A if the current gaming state is the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short state) (step S111) The jackpot determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is the low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 206A is selected (step S113), and the selection is made. The determined big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 206 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state) and short time state (low probability short state)). And a jackpot determination table for a high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability (a high probability non-short-time state, a high-probability short-time state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability, similarly to the above-described pre-determination table, the ten types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and the nineteen types of first special random numbers are small. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the small hit determination value indicating that the winning is won, and to match the loss determination values indicating that the 3890 types of first special random numbers are out of place. In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, a small hit determination value is set in the low probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It has not been won and there is no chance to win a small hit. In the jackpot determination table at the low probability, similarly to the above-described pre-determination table, 10 types of second special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and 3909 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-range determination value indicating that

  Also, in the big hit determination table at high probability, like the above-mentioned prior determination table, 100 types of first special random numbers including the first special random number identical to the first special random number set in the big hit determination table at low probability Matches the jackpot determination value, matches the small hitting judgment value indicating that the 19 kinds of first special random numbers are won in the small hitting, and the 3800 kinds of first special random numbers match the losing judgment value. One special random number is associated with each. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability short time state), when the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won is low probability (normal state (low probability short time state ) And time-short state (low probability time-short state)). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the small hit judgment value is set in the high probability big hit judgment table to be referenced to compare with the second special random number. It is not done and you won't win a small hit. In the high probability big hit determination table, as in the above-mentioned prior determination table, 100 types of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won, and to match with the falling judgment value indicating that the 3909 types of second special random numbers are the above.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), The big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set and the process is terminated (step S116), and the first special read out in step S102 of the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that a small hit is made (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the change is won for the small hit is set and the process is ended (step S118). The result of comparison between the selected big hit judgment table and the first special random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing If it is determined that the off compares the reach random read Reach determination table and step S102 shown in FIG. 206 (B) (step S119).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 206 (B) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and the probability change used when the game state is a probability change (high probability state (high probability non-short time state, high probability short time state)). Reach determination table at the time, reach determination table at short time to be used when the gaming state is short time (low probability time short state), and normal reach determination to be used when the gaming state is normal time (normal state) And a table. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability change, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reached and 238 types of reach random numbers are not reached, as in the prior determination table. The reach random numbers are associated with one another so as to coincide with the above.

  Further, in the reach determination table at the time reduction, similarly to the above-described determination table, the reach determination indicating that six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the reach determination value indicating that the reach and the 233 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach is increased in the short time (low probability short time state) than in the probability change (high probability state).

  Furthermore, in the normal reach determination table, as with the above-described pre-determination table, seven types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the probability determination time and short-time reach determination tables are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the indicated reach determination value and to match the reach determination value indicating that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal state (normal state), the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the short time (low probability time short state).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (step S120a), the fluctuation Sets a reach flag indicating that it is a reach, and the process ends (step S120b).

  FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 207, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S121 and S124).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU 4100a compares the first symbol random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 206 (C). (Step S122) The type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of the big hit is determined (step S123).

  As shown in FIG. 206 (C), in the symbol determination table, similar to the prior determination table, each determination result (specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, specific 3 The 15R (right) rank up probability variation hit, the 4 specific 10R (left) probability variation big hit, the 5 specific 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, the 6 specific 10R (left) probability probability variation big hit, the non-specific 10R (left) (Usually big hit)) is stored in a form associated with a design random number (first design random number, second design random number). The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1. The 15R big hit gaming state using the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is controlled (the opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the second opening / closing member 2553 is repeated 15 times (15 rounds)), and after the 15R big hit gaming state ends. The specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit which controls to the high probability time short state until it becomes a big hit again. The 10R big hit gaming state using the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is controlled (the opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the second opening / closing member 2553 is repeated 10 times (10 rounds)), and after the 10R big hit gaming state is finished. Specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit which controls to the high probability time short state until it becomes big hit again 3. The big hit gaming state is controlled as if the game is finished in the 10R big hit gaming state using the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550. However, by continuing the big hit gaming state thereafter, a total of 15R big hit gaming state is obtained. Control (rank up) to become, after the end of the 15R big hit gaming state until the big hit again to control to the high probability time reduction state specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit The 10R big hit game state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is controlled (the opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the open / close member 2106 is repeated 10 times (10 rounds)). 4. 10R (left) probability variation big hit to control to high probability short-time state 5. The big hit gaming state is controlled as if the game was ended in the 10R big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, but the big hit gaming state is continued thereafter, so that the total 15R big hit gaming state is controlled. (5 ranks up), and after the end of the 15R big hit gaming state, until the big hit again becomes the high probability time and short state control of the specified 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit. Controlling the 10R big hit game state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 in such a manner that it is difficult for the game ball to enter, and controlling the high probability non-short state until the big hit again after the 10R big hit game state ends In the liquid crystal display device 1400, it is difficult to determine whether or not the game is in a high probability state. Control is made to a 10R big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, and after the 10R big hit gaming state is finished, a predetermined number of times (50 times) of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) are displayed. Among the seven types of jackpots of non-specific 10R (left) jackpots that control the low probability time-short state until execution is determined to be any jackpot.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the determination value allocation is set differently compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 206 (C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the specific 1 15R (right) positive variation big hit, the specific 2 10R (right) positive variation big hit, the specific 3 15R (right) rank-up probability variation big hit, specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, specific 6 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit, non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit are set. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, specific 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, non The distribution of judgment values is set for a specific 10R (left) normal big hit.

  Further, in this example, when the specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, and the specific 3 15R (right) ranked up probability variation big hit, the second attacker unit 2550 The big hit gaming state is controlled so as to open and close the two opening / closing members 2553, while the specific 4 10R (left) probability change big hit, the specific 5 15R (left) rank up positive change big hit, and the specific 6 10R (left) latent probability change The big hit gaming state is controlled so as to open and close the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 when the big hit is a non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit. Therefore, during the control of the big hit game state in which the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened / closed, the center accessory 2500 is arranged so that a large number of game balls win the second big prize opening 2552. The game ball must be fired (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side. On the other hand, during the control of the jackpot gaming state of opening and closing the opening and closing member 2106 of the attack unit 2100, the game ball aiming at the left side of the center character 2500 so that many game balls win the big winning opening 2103 Must be fired (so-called "left-handed").

  As described above, during the control of the jackpot gaming state of opening and closing the opening and closing member 2106 of the attack unit 2100, the game ball will be shot at the left side of the center role 2500 but the center feature 2500 In the game area 1100 on the left side of the game board, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in the front of the game panel 1200 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball contacts the obstacle nails to Various movements are given and it flows down. Therefore, even if the game ball is hit on the left side of the center role 2500 aiming at the large winning opening 2103 when opening the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacking unit 2100, a winning in the large winning opening 2103 Not only the game balls that have not won the prize winning opening 2103 are discharged to the outside from the out opening 1232 (1151) provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100.

  On the other hand, during the control of the big hit game state for opening and closing the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550, a game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. In the second game area 2551 on the right side of 2500, no obstacle nail is implanted on the front of the game panel 1200. Further, due to the structure of the game board 4, when the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened, when a game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second big prize opening 2552 The second big winning opening 2552 is always to be won. For this reason, in the big hit gaming state in which the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened / closed, the game ball that has been struck into the second gaming area 2551 is wasted (discharged to the outside through the out port 1232 (1151)). ), And the game ball is more efficiently won in the second big prize opening 2552, compared to the big prize opening 2103 in the big hit gaming state in which the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and closed. The jackpot game state can be digested with.

  Moreover, in this example, the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round in the big hit gaming state in the specific 1 to 5 and the non specific and the specific 6 (time to open and close the opening and closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100) or The opening time of the second big prize opening 2552 (the time for controlling the opening of the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550) is varied. Specifically, when specified 1 to 5 and a non-specified big hit, the large winning opening 2103 per round or the second large winning opening 2552 is in a long open state where the opening time is 30 seconds. In contrast to the control, when it becomes a specific six 10R (left) latent probability big hit, the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round is made extremely short of 0.05 seconds than the long opening state. Controlled to short open state. Even in the case of a small hit, the short winning state is controlled to a short open state in which the open time of the big winning opening 2103 per round in the small hit game state is 0.05 seconds. As described above, when the specified six 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit or small hit, the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round is too short. Even if the opening control is recognized, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 2103. That is, during the control of the short open state in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the game ball hardly wins in the big winning opening 2103, and unlike in the long open state control, many game balls Can not be expected.

  Further, in this example, a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the gaming state are prepared, and when the gaming state is switched with the big hit (including when the gaming state is not switched with the small hit) The production mode is also shifted. In this effect mode, dedicated game effects (reach effects, effects during a big hit game, etc.) are set for each effect mode, and when the effect mode shifts, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs liquid crystal display corresponding to each effect mode. The effect display by the background color of the device 1900 and the characters (including the aspect of the decorative symbol) is executed, and the impression of the game is changed into a gully in each of the effect modes. Specifically, when controlled to the low probability non-short state (normal state), the normal mode (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to the blue background color) is set, and the high probability time short state (probability variation) Mode is set to the positive variation mode (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to a red background color), and when controlled to the low probability time short state (time short state) (In this example, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to a yellow background color) and the high probability non-short state (positive change state) or the low probability non short state (normal state) is controlled In this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to a light blue background color). In this manner, the player can distinguish which effect mode is controlled by visually recognizing the background color of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, a predetermined mode (a character etc. may be sufficient as a character etc. corresponding to each production mode may be sufficient as a liquid crystal display device 1900 so that a player can discriminate | determine which production mode it is controlled. May be displayed.

  And, in the normal mode according to the low probability non-short state, the specific 1 15R (right) positive variation big hit, the specific 2 10R (right) positive variation big hit, the specific 3 15R (right) rank up positive variation big hit, the specific 4 In the case of 10R (left) probability variation big hit, as it is controlled to high probability time short state after the end of the big hit gaming state transition from normal mode to positive variation mode, non specific 10R (left) normal big hit In the case of becoming, when it is controlled to the low probability time short state after the end of the big hit gaming state, it moves from the normal mode to the time saving mode, and becomes the specific six 10R (left) latencies certainty big hit or small hit In such a case, the control mode is changed from the normal mode to the probability change latent mode as it is controlled to the high probability non-short state after the end of the big hit gaming state or to the low probability non short state after the end of the small hit gaming state. It is. Also, in the case of the probability 1 in the definite variation mode according to the high probability time reduction state, the specific variation 15R (right) probability variation big hit, the identification 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, the identification 5 15R (left) rank increase probability variation big hit Continues to change to the high probability time short state again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and continues to be in a non-specific 10R (left) normal jackpot, the jackpot is low after the jackpot gaming state is over The mode is changed from the indeterminate mode to the time mode in accordance with control to the probability time short state.

  In the above-mentioned odd change mode, if the specific 4 10R (left) positive variation big hit, the specific 5 15R (left) rank up positive variation big hit, and the non-specific 10 R (left) normal big hit, until the start of the big hit gaming state It is difficult to determine whether or not to control to high probability time short state (probable change state) after the end of the big hit gaming state, and starts the big hit gaming state using the opening and closing member 2106 of the above-mentioned attacker unit 2100 As a game effect in the big hit game state which is executed until the game state ends, a definite change bonus effect of whether to control to a high probability time short state after the end of the big hit game state is executed. In this definite variation bonus effect, for example, the player operates the pressing operation unit 405, and the effect of determining whether the main character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 succeeds in judging the villain character is performed a plurality of times (four times ) If the specified 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit and the specified 5 15 R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, the main character judges the villain character until multiple effects are executed. In the case of a non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit, the main character is a villain in all of a plurality of renditions while it is controlled to a high probability time and short state after the end of the big hit gaming state by success. By failing to judge the character, after the end of the jackpot gaming state is controlled to low probability time short state. As described above, in the definite variation bonus effect, there is an opportunity for the main character to succeed in judging the bad character, since the effect of judging whether the main character succeeds in judging the bad character is executed plural times (four times). It is possible to increase the expectation of being increased and controlled to the high probability time reduction state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  Further, in the above-described normal mode, when the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit and the specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability big hit are hit, the 10R big hit gaming state or the 15R big hit by the start of the big hit gaming state It is difficult to determine which of the gaming states is controlled, and the big hit gaming state using the second opening and closing member 2553 of the second attachment unit 2550 is started, but it is executed by the end of the 10 R big hit gaming state As a game effect during the big hit gaming state to be played, a rank up effect of whether to control continuously from the end of the 10 R big hit gaming state to the 15 R big hit gaming state is executed. In this rank-up effect, for example, an effect of whether or not the object detection means 2530 succeeds in defeating the predetermined number of enemy characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 by detecting the movement of the player's hand If it is a specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state continuously until the 15 R big hit gaming state by succeeding in the defeat of a predetermined number of enemy characters. In the case of the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, it is controlled to end the big hit gaming state in the 10R big hit gaming state by failing to destroy a predetermined number of enemy characters.

  In the normal mode described above, when the specified 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit and the non-specified 10R (left) normal big hit, the 10R big hit gaming state after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state It is difficult to determine whether to control to high probability time short state (probable change state), and start 10R big hit gaming state using the opening and closing member 2106 of the above-mentioned attacker unit 2100, but until 10R big hit gaming state is over As a game effect during the big hit gaming state executed at the time, a probabilistic challenge effect as to whether or not to control to the high probability time-short state after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state is executed. In this definite variation challenge effect, for example, the effect of whether or not the door is successfully opened is operated by rotating the dial operation unit 401 as instructed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the specific four 10R is performed. (Left) In the case of a probability variation big hit, when it is non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit while it is controlled to high probability time short state after the end of 10R big hit gaming state by succeeding in opening the door. In the case of failure to open the door, the low probability time-short state is controlled after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state.

  Further, in the above-mentioned normal mode, when it becomes a specific 6's 10R (left) latent probability change big hit, it is controlled to a high probability non-short state until it becomes a big hit again after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state. In the case of a small hit, since the gaming state at the time of the small hit is continuously controlled after the end of the small hitting game state, the small hit when it is controlled to a low probability non-short time state If it becomes, it will be controlled to the low probability non-short time state after the end of the small hit gaming state set equal to the 10R big hit gaming state. In this way, when it becomes a specific six 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit or small hit, after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state or after the small hit gaming state is both controlled to non-time saving state However, as the effect mode executed after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state or the end of the small hit gaming state, the probability variation latent mode which is difficult to determine whether or not it is the high probability state is executed. In addition, in the definite variation latent mode, two types of presentation mode of definite variation latency A mode and definite variation latency B mode are set, and when entering into definite variation latency A mode is higher than when entering into definite variation latency B mode The degree of expectation that is a probability state is set to be high. That is, when it is controlled to a low probability non-short time condition and it becomes a specific probability of 10R (left) latency probability big hit, the probability variation latent A mode and the probability variation latency B mode Among them, the probability of determining the probability variation latency A mode is increased.

  In the above-mentioned probability variation latent A mode, for example, the object detection unit 2530 detects the movement of the player's hand, and moves away from the enemy characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 one after another, thereby raising the rank, the friend character If it is a big hit, it will control the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit by succeeding in saving the ally's character. On the other hand, when it comes off, control is made so that the enemy characters are only rejected one after another, or the ally characters fail to be rescued. Further, in the above-mentioned probability variation latent B mode, for example, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect of whether or not the ally character succeeds in catching the enemy character is executed, and if it becomes a big hit, the ally character The character is controlled to the big hit game state according to the type of the big hit by successfully capturing the enemy character, but when it is lost, the ally character can not find the enemy character, Alternatively, even if an ally character finds an enemy character, control is performed so as to fail in capture.

  Moreover, if the kind of big hit is determined, the stop design according to the kind of big hit will be determined as a mode at the time of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when a specific 1 15R (right) probability variation jackpot is determined, the first special symbol 15R (right) probability variation jackpot symbol is determined, and when a specific 2 10R (right) probability variation jackpot is determined. Is determined to be the 1R special symbol 10R (Right) probability variation jackpot design, and if it is determined to be a specific 3 15R (Right) rank increase probability variation jackpot, it is determined to be the first special symbol 15R (Right) rank increase probability variation jackpot symbol. If the 10R (left) probability variation jackpot of the specific 4 is determined, the 10R (left) probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol is determined, and if the 10R (left) probability variation jackpot of the specific 6 is determined, the second The 10R (left) latent probability variation jackpot symbol of one special symbol is determined, and if it is determined to be a non-specific 10R (left) normal jackpot, it is determined to be a 15R normal jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S124). If the small hit flag is set, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. If the small hitting flag is not set as the aspect of the first special symbol (step S126).

  After the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as a process of step S127, these lottery results (indicating one of the types of big hits, small hits, reach losing, or losing (stop symbol of the first special symbol) The judgment result notification command according to each of the lottery results is set so that the mode of (1) may be sent to the peripheral control board 4010). Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S128, the process is terminated. The peripheral control MPU 4140a performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a specific 1R 15R (right) probability change from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at which the decoration symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped. When the big hit is specified, it is determined to be the 15R (right) probable big hit symbol (a combination of the same decorative symbols of “gold”), and at the time when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect) The display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the combination of the same decorative design of “gold” as the decorative design displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops variably, it is a specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit from the stopped design of the decorative design, It is possible to determine that the acquisition of the 15R big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 that has the largest number of rounds and is easy to win a game ball to the big winning opening 2103 is confirmed.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies a specific 10R (right) probable big hit out of the big hits from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are stopped. In this case, 10R (right) probability variation big hit symbol ("1", "3", "5", a combination of the same decorative symbols of the odd number of "7") is decided and 15R (right ) When a rank-up probability variation jackpot is specified, 15R (right) rank-up probability variation jackpot symbol ("1", "3", "5", "7" odd combination of the same decorative symbols. 10R (right) When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the liquid crystal display device 1900 controls display of the determined stop symbol. As described above, when the combination of the same odd number of “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, the decorative symbols are stopped. However, it is not possible to discriminate between the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit and the specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit, but the 15R big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 or the 10R big hit It can be determined that the high probability state is controlled after the gaming state is ended.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies a specific 10R (left) probable big hit out of the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are stopped. In this case, the 10R (left) probability change big hit symbol ("2", "4", even combination of the same decorative symbols of "6") is determined, and the 15R (left) rank up probability change of the big hit is specified. When a big hit is specified, it is determined to be a 15R (left) rank-up probability variation big hit symbol (a combination of an even number of the same decorative symbols of “2”, “4”, “6”. Common with 10R (left) probability variation big hit symbol) When a non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit is specified among the big hits, a combination of 10R (left) normal big hit symbols (even numbers of “2”, “4”, “6” and the same decorative symbols. (Left) Ri symbol and determines common), and displays controls the determined stop symbols at the time lapse of the variation time specified from the variation pattern command (when the game effects termination) in the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, when the combination of the same decorative symbols of even numbers “2”, “4”, and “6” as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped variably, the specified symbols are selected from the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols. Any one of 10R (left) probability variation big hit, specific 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, and non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit cannot be determined, and the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 Until the effect result in the 10R big hit gaming state (or 15R big hit gaming state) using is derived, it is not possible to determine whether or not to control to the high probability state after the end of these big hit gaming states.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit of the specific 6 out of the big hits from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stopped symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are stopped. If specified, the 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit symbol (predetermined combination of decorative symbols out of symbols (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols of “357”), specifically “decorative symbol combination”) When the hit is specified, it is determined as a small hit symbol (a combination of predetermined decorative symbols out of symbols (split), common with 10R (left) latency probability variation big hit symbol) and specified from the variation pattern command. The liquid crystal display device 1900 performs display control of the determined stop symbol when the fluctuation time elapses (when the game effect ends). As described above, when the combination of the decorative symbol “357” as the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops variably, any one of the 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit or the small hit from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is selected. The 10R jackpot gaming state (10R jackpot gaming state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball) using the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550, the liquid crystal even after the end. Since it is difficult to determine whether or not the display device 1400 is in a high probability state, it is impossible to determine whether or not to control to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, as peripheral control MPU 4140a, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on liquid crystal display device 1900, when the reach is specified from the received judgment result notification command, the symbol is accompanied by reach symbol (A combination of decorative designs that are not identical, but the left and right decorative designs are the same.) A combination of non-identical outlying designs (not identical), but with left and right decorative designs if outliers are specified. Is determined to be non-identical, and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command elapses (when the game effect is ended), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 208, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the big hit flag. If so (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step S141). If the small hit flag is set (step S143), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the small hit according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and the reach flag is set. (Step S145), the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state If the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are not set, that is, if the normal release (the reach effect is not performed), the variation pattern table at the time of release is selected. (Not shown) is selected (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150). As a result, effect control is performed on the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the determined fluctuation time.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a selects the variation pattern table selected from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, as in the above-described prior determination table, the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variation random number Is set to determine. Specifically, one of 164 types of variable random numbers coincides with the judgment value (0-163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are any of the super reach effects whose jackpot expectation is low Match the judgment value (164-222) indicating that the 18 kinds of variable random numbers coincide with the judgment value (223-240) indicating that any of the super reach effects having a high hit probability is performed. As described above, the above random numbers are associated with each other. Note that the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

  When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, it is next determined in step S151 whether or not the counter value of the short time counter in which the short time state continuation number is set is “0”. Do. If the counter value is not “0”, the time counter is counted down (step S152), and it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is “0” (step S153). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the control of the time saving state is ended is set (step S154).

  If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S153 that the time reduction counter is not “0”, At the time, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 209, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S171. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop processing (step S84) in the processing of step S173, this processing is ended.

  FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 211, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S181. As the processing, display control for causing the first special symbol display 641 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing is performed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 has the first special symbol. A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 resets the time reduction flag (step S184) and resets the time reduction flag (step S185) when the time reduction completion flag is set (step S183). As a result, control of the low probability time-short state is ended, and control of the low probability time-short state (normal state) is started.

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187). The standby time until the start of the state (the time for displaying a message to start the big hit gaming state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that a big hit gaming state is being executed is set and the above-mentioned short time flag is reset (step S189), and the first special symbol process flag is an initial value to the first special symbol normal processing When the process transfer is updated (step S190), this process ends. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and the jackpot type (15R (right) high probability time short, 10R (right) high probability time short, 15R (right) rank up high probability time short Hit per, 10R (left) high probability time per shot, 15R (left) rank up high probability per time short, 10R (left) high probability per hour short, 10R (left) low probability per time short) individually prepared . In step S187, the type of jackpot (15R (right) per high probability short-time, 10R (right) per high-probability short-time, 15R (right) rank-up per high-probability short-time, 10R (left) per high-probability short-time, 15R (left) Big hit start command (15R (right) high probability time short start command, 10R (right) high probability according to rank-up high probability time-short, 10R (left) high probability non-time-short, 10R (left) low probability time-short) Hourly start command, 15R (right) rank up high probability time short start command, 10R (left) high probability time short start command, 15R (left) rank up high probability time short start command, 10R (left) high probability time low Set hit start command, 10R (left) low probability time-short hit start command). As a result, the effect of the jackpot gaming state according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S191), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started (step S192). The standby time until the start of the small hit gaming state (the time for displaying the small hit gaming state to be displayed, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S193). Then, the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S194), and the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag (Step S190), this process ends. The small hitting start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. In step S195, the small hitting start command is set, so that the effect of the small hitting gaming state instructed by the small hitting start command is liquid crystal. It is performed by the display device 1900, the lamp / LED, and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

[6. Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, a process performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 211, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes 2 ms steady processing. In the 2 ms steady process, a process to count up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (1 ms added to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, 16 ms elapsed. While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 212 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of step S601 to step S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second fluctuation pattern setting process)). Control processing related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

  In the sound control process in step S603, a control process related to the speakers 130, 222, and 262 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, control processes related to the lamp and LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 are performed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving substrate 3013 is executed. In the random number update process in step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, pre-read random numbers) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  The process of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms steady process ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process starts immediately after the 16 ms elapses from the start of the 16 ms steady process (the command in step S601 Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and after it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 after the 16 ms steady process is completed, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is performed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

[7. Melody reach]
Next, the winning type notification executed during the variable display will be described. In this example, the gaming state (rendering mode) after the end of the jackpot gaming state executed based on the jackpot symbol being derived and displayed in the variable display under execution is output from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. during the variable display. It is suggested by the voice mode. This will be described in detail below.

  As described above, during the high-probability time-short state, the shift control to the probability changing mode is performed. Then, when controlled in this probability changing mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the background color of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to be red, and continuously outputs a predetermined special voice mode. Therefore, the player can grasp that the high-probability time-short state is controlled by determining whether or not the special voice mode is output.

  In this example, the variation pattern for executing “Melody Reach” (for example, “Melody Reach Probability Big Hit”, which executes “Melody Reach”, and “Melody Reach” executes “Melody Reach”, and “Melody Reach” executes “Melody Reach” as a latent probability change big hit. This is executed when a “Leach latency probability change big hit”, “Melody reach” is executed, and “Melody reach normal big hit”, “Melody reach” is executed, and “Melody reach is lost” is received. Voice modes similar to the special voice mode (for example, the first half of the special voice mode that is intermittently output during the high probability time short state control). Or No. 1) or may be completely the same as the special voice mode), and when the variation display results in a jackpot Compared to the case where a big hit is made by executing a fluctuation display based on a fluctuation pattern other than “Melody Reach”, the transition control to the high probability time-short state (probability changing mode) is performed at a higher rate after the big hit gaming state ends. "When it is a big hit by performing" ", the ratio controlled to high probability time short state (probable changing middle mode) after the end of big hit gaming state is controlled to another playing state (reproduction mode other than positive changing mode) Notify that the rate is higher.

  Specifically, the big hit determination process (step S81) is determined to be a big hit, and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process) The big hit game state after the end of high probability time control to control the probability big hit (for example 15R (right) positive variation big hit, 10R (right) positive variation big hit, 15R (right) rank up positive variation big hit, 10R (left) positive variation big hit, 15R (left ) If it is decided to rank up probability variation big hit) will be a big hit (for example 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit, 10R (left) usually big hit) to control to gaming state other than high probability time short state after the big hit gaming state end Compared to the case, execute “melody reach” in the above variation pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing, second variation pattern setting processing). Ratio the change pattern setting process to be higher for determining the dynamic pattern (first shift pattern setting process (step S82), the second change pattern setting process) constitutes a variation pattern table used in. As described above, the player can output the voice mode similar to the special voice mode that is output in the high probability time short state (probable mode) while the specific variation display is performed. Mode) easily, and the expectation for the high probability short-time state (probability change mode) is improved.

  In addition, the special voice mode is composed of "Intro", "A Melo" and "Sabi", and when the variation pattern for executing "Melody reach" is received, the variation display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. The above "intro" is output when starting the, and the right decorative symbol variably displayed at the timing of ending the "intro" is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol to generate reach. Then, when the reach effect of "melody reach" is started, the above "A melody" is output, and normally the decoration symbol in the variation display is displayed at a timing when the "A melody" ends, and the display result is derived and displayed. .

  On the other hand, when executing a reach development effect that has a higher percentage of jackpots than the executed reach effect, that is, executing a “melody development reach” that has a higher percentage of jackpots than the variation pattern that executes “melody reach”. When the variation pattern to be received is received, as shown in FIG. 213, “A Melo” is ended at the timing to end the reach effect, and “Sabi” is output when the reach development effect is started. Then, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed at the timing when the “rust” is finished, and the display result is derived and displayed. When a variation pattern for executing “Melody Development Reach” is received, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (slowly changes up and down and is not completely stopped) in synchronization with the end of “A melody”. Thus, the medium decorative symbol may be re-variably displayed at the timing of starting the output of “rust”.

  As described above, in this example, the larger the number of the configuration modes output in the variable display among the special audio modes including the plurality of configuration modes of “Intro”, “A melody”, and “Crust”, the ratio of the big hit ("Melody reach" has a higher percentage of big hits (expectation for big hits) than "Melody reach"). More specifically, the melody development is better than the jackpot expectation rate of “melody reach” {(appearance rate of “melody reach”) / (appearance rate of “melody reach out” + appearance rate of “melody reach”)}. The above fluctuation so that the expectation of big hit of “reach” {(appearance rate of “per melody development reach”) / (appearance rate of “out of melody development reach” + appearance rate of “per melody development reach”)} is higher The variation pattern table used in the pattern setting process (the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) and the second variation pattern setting process) is configured. Therefore, as the configuration mode of the special display mode is switched, the expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the high probability time-short state can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is made in the variable display in which "melody reach" is executed, transition control to a high probability time saving state is always performed after the big hit gaming state ends. Specifically, it is determined that the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination process (step S81), and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process). Run the "melody reach" in the above variation pattern setting process (the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process) only when it is decided on the probability variation big jack to control to high probability time short state after the big hit gaming state end If it is decided to be a variation pattern to be performed and it becomes a big hit to control to a gaming state other than the high probability time-short state after the big hit gaming state end, it is not decided to the fluctuation pattern for executing "melody reach". Therefore, when "melody reach" is executed, the expectation for the high probability time-short state can be improved, and attention can be paid to the variable display during execution.

  In addition, even when the big display is a big hit in the variability display in which “melody reach” is performed, after the big hit gaming state, the transition control to a gaming state other than the high probability short-time state may be performed. In this case, the “melody reach” It is configured so that the rate of transition control to the high probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state is higher than when the big hit in the variable display executed by other reach when the big display is a big hit. May be. Specifically, it is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot determination process (step S81), and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process) `` Melody Reach '' is not only for the case where the probability is changed to a high probability short-time control after the big hit gaming state, but also when the big hit is controlled to a gaming state other than the high probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state. `` Melody reach reach '' at a higher rate than `` Melody reach ''. In the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process (step S82), second variation pattern setting process) to be selected It may constitute a variation pattern table use.

  Further, in this case, the larger the number of configuration modes output in the variable display among the special audio modes consisting of a plurality of configuration modes of “Intro”, “A melody”, and “Crust”, the bigger the hit. When the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be configured such that the ratio of controlling to the high probability time reduction state is high. Specifically, when controlling to a high probability time-short state after the big hit gaming state ends, the above variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting) is performed so that “melody development reach” is selected at a higher rate than “melody reach”. You may comprise the fluctuation pattern table used by a process (step S82) and a 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process. Thereby, the expectation for the high-probability short-time state can be improved as the special display mode is switched.

  Furthermore, in this example, “melody reach” that outputs the same voice mode as the special voice mode that is output in the high-probability time-short state is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the low-probability non-time-short state (normal mode) A voice mode that is output in a low-probability non-short-time state (normal mode) when the “normal melody reach” is executed during the variable display and a big hit is made by executing the same voice mode as that output in Low probability after the big hit gaming state at a higher rate (including those controlled to the low probability non-time-short state (normal mode)) at a higher rate than when the other hits that do not output during the fluctuation display is executed Execute “Time-Short Melody Reach” that outputs the same voice mode that is controlled in the non-time-short state (normal mode) and the voice mode that is output in the low-probability time-short state (time-short mode) during the variable display. When a big hit is made, the voice mode that is output in the low-probability time-short state (time-short-medium mode) is higher than when the big hit is made by executing another reach that does not output during fluctuation display (be sure to be in the low-probability short-time state) (Including things controlled in the time-short / medium mode)), and those that control to the low-probability time-short state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the sound modes similar to the sound mode output in the high-probability non-time-short state (probability variation latency mode) Execute the “latent melody reach” that is output during fluctuation display and execute other reach that does not output the voice mode that is output in the high probability non-time-short state (probability variation latent mode) when the big hit is made It is possible to execute something that is controlled to a high probability non-short-time state (probability variation latency mode) at the end of the big-hit gaming state at a higher rate (including those that are controlled to a high probability non-time-short state). It may be the one.

  In the high probability non-short state and the low probability non-short state, it is controlled to the probability variation latent mode of an aspect (so-called latency probability change) which is difficult to determine whether the control is controlled to the high probability non-short state or the low probability non-short state. There is a case. In this case, the percentage of voices that are output in the probability variation latent mode when performing a “latent melody reach” and become a big hit is higher than when performing another reach that does not output during variation display (a big hit ( Be sure to control the high probability non-short state after the end of the big hit gaming state in the high probability non-short state including the thing to be controlled), or when the "normal Melody reach" is performed and the big hit is output in the normal mode Voice mode is not output during the fluctuation display high probability non-time short after jackpot gaming state end at a higher rate (including those to be controlled to low probability non-time short state always) than when the other reach that does not output during variable display Control to the state (for example, when you become a latent probability variation big hit to control the high probability non-short state after the end of the big hit gaming state When the big hit to control the low probability non-short state after the big hit gaming state is usually a big hit Execute "Hinting Melody Reach" at a higher rate than when, or when it becomes a normal big hit to control the low probability non-time short state after the big hit gaming state end When the big hit gaming state to control the high probability non-time short state The “normal melody reach” may be executed at a higher rate than when In this way, if the "latency melody reach" is a big hit, it is controlled to the probability variation latent mode that it is difficult to determine whether the high probability non-short state control or the low probability non-short state control is performed after the big hit gaming state ends. It is possible to recognize that there is a high probability non-short state or a high probability that the high probability non-short state is controlled, and the expectation for the big hit gaming state can be improved. In addition, when "latency melody reach" is executed, there is a high probability that the high probability non-short state or the high probability non-short state is controlled after the big hit gaming state ends, so the player is more likely to generate a big hit. Desired, the game interest is improved.

  Further, in this case, the larger the number of configuration modes output in the variable display among the special audio modes consisting of a plurality of configuration modes of “Intro”, “A melody”, and “Crust”, the bigger the hit. When the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be configured such that the ratio of controlling to the high probability non-short state becomes high. Specifically, in the case of controlling to the high probability non-short-time state after the big hit gaming state, the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern) is selected so that “melody development reach” is selected at a higher rate than “melody reach”. You may comprise the fluctuation pattern table used by a setting process (step S82) and a 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process. Special display mode that is switched during variable display that is a big hit even if it is controlled to the probability variation latent mode where it is difficult to determine whether it is controlled to high probability non-time short state or low probability non-time short state by this It can be recognized that there is a high possibility of being controlled to a high probability non-time-short state, and the expectation for the big hit gaming state can be improved.

  Moreover, in this example, the switching time of the configuration mode and the switching time of the effect (occurrence of reach, end of reach effect (if the reach development effect is not performed, stop display of the inside decorative symbol), end of the reach development effect The display of the special voice mode can be easily recognized by the player, such as switching of effects, occurrence of reach, and derivation display of display results. Since the mode and the content of the production are made to correspond one-to-one, the player can grasp the content of the production from the configuration mode of the special voice mode that is output without viewing the content displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible (for example, when "A melody" is output, it is possible to grasp that reach production is performed).

  In this way, in this example, even if the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not visually recognized, it is suggested that the mode is controlled to the probability changing mode after the big hit gaming state by naturally changing the sound mode that comes in from the ear. Therefore, not only the player who is visually recognizing the liquid crystal display device 1900 but also the player who has diverted his / her line of sight from the liquid crystal display device 1900 can surely recognize that the “melody reach” variable display is being executed. For example, it is possible to prevent a problem of oversight that occurs when some information is suggested by display contents such as displaying a character or the like on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Furthermore, by making the player who is looking away from the liquid crystal display device 1900 recognize that “melody reach” is being performed, the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is made to pay attention with anticipation for the big hit gaming state. Can.

  In the present embodiment, the special sound mode including the plurality of configuration modes is described. However, the special sound mode including one configuration mode may be used. In this case, it may be configured such that the longer the output period of the special sound mode is, the higher the percentage of jackpots is, and the output of the special sound mode is terminated and restarted in synchronization with the changeover timing of the effect. May be

  Also, in the above-described example, the voice mode output during the variable display is configured to indicate the gaming state after the big hit gaming state end, but a period during which the voice mode indicating the gaming state after the big hit gaming state end is output The time period and time are not limited to those described above. A part of the variable display (for example, from the start of the variable display to the generation of reach, any one of the reach production, the reach development production, or any A plurality of combinations) may be executed.

  In addition, as a result of this fluctuation indication, when it is a big hit, it is not limited to the one that suggests the gaming state after the big hit gaming state end, but as a result of the fluctuation indication executed after next time, a big hit game when it becomes a big hit You may make it suggest the game state by which transfer control is performed after a state completion. Specifically, when it is determined in the effect predetermination process (steps S45 and S55) to be executed at the start winning occurrence that it is determined to be a probability change big hit to control to the high probability time short state after the big hit gaming state end, The start winning combination determined to be a probability variation big hit in the effect pre-determination processing after performing "Melocity reach" and executing variation display that is off by one change indication before starting or over multiple change indications. In the variable display based on the above, the variable display that is a big hit may be executed in a mode other than “melody reach” or “melody reach”. In addition, even if it is determined to be a big hit other than a probability change big hit to control to high probability time short state after the big hit gaming state end in the effect pre-determination processing (steps S45, S55), the start also at a predetermined ratio In the variable display before the start of the variable display based on the winning, "melody reach" may be executed to execute the variable display which is the departure. Also, in this case, the ratio of executing "melody reach" in the variable display based on the starting winning combination is lower than the ratio of executing "melody reach" in the variable displaying based on the starting winning combination determined to be a probability change big hit. By configuring, when performing a "melody reach", if a big hit occurs, the rate of performing transition control to the probability change mode after the big hit gaming state ends can be made higher than the rate of performing transition control to another effect mode .

  Moreover, although the above-mentioned example showed the thing which suggests the game state (rendering mode) after the end of the big hit game state by the voice mode outputted from the speakers 130, 222, 262 etc. during the variable display, a specific effect mode ( For example, a mode (for example, a specification similar to the mode executed by rendering means (for example, at least one of a means for executing effects such as a speaker, a movable body, a lamp or an LED) other than the liquid crystal display device 1900) A part of the mode executed during the production mode (for example, the first half or the like may be completely the same as the mode executed during the specific production mode) is executed during the variable display. Anything to do. When the game state (rendering mode) after the big hit gaming state end is suggested by the light emission mode (for example, light emission color or blinking pattern; special light emission mode) of the lamp or LED, or the movable aspect of the movable body (for example, specific effect A variable display related to a specific effect mode is also executed when a movable body movable only during the mode; a special movable aspect) indicates the gaming state (rendering mode) after the end of the big hit gaming state Can be easily recognized by the player.

  In addition, as described above, in this example, during the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state), the effect that emphasizes the probability changing mode (high probability time-short state) (in this example, the special voice mode is intermittent (repeated). Output) is executed. In this way, the effect executed during the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state) is imprinted on the player's mind, and this effect and the probability changing mode (high probability time-short state) are strongly associated with each other and stored. When an effect to be executed during (high probability time reduction state) is executed, it is possible to immediately recall the probability variation middle mode (high probability time reduction state). In addition, in this example, the special voice mode is output intermittently (repeatedly) as an effect emphasizing that it is in the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state). For example, the light emission mode (for example, light emission color or blinking pattern) of the lamp or LED, the movable mode of the movable body (for example, high probability time short state) Movable body), an audio aspect (special audio aspect) of a speaker, or the like, or any combination thereof (which may all be performed) may be executed.

  In addition, in the case of suggesting by the planar display mode of the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is difficult for the player to notice that it is suggested that the display content is not watched, but the player naturally enters the ear as in this example. Liquid crystal display depending on the mode of movement of the movable body that is easy to notice the movement if it is in the field of view by physically operating the three-dimensional shaped object that comes in, the light emission mode of the lamp and LED that naturally enters the eye Even if the display content of the device 1900 is not closely watched, the player feels uncomfortable and is controlled to be different from the normal mode. As a result, it is controlled to the same mode as that executed during a specific performance mode. You can easily make them notice.

  That is, the other gaming machine is controlled to transition to the high probability state for the first time to the player who is playing a game in the gaming machine for the first time and the player who does not know the contents of the effect of the gaming machine A voice mode different from the voice mode is output, and a voice mode output in an advantageous state can be notified by listening to a voice mode output from a gaming machine that has acquired a large number of winning balls. And if the same voice aspect as the voice aspect output in the above-mentioned advantageous state is output from the gaming machine in which the player is playing, will my gaming machine also be in an advantageous state? I can have the expectation that In addition, since the player does not always keep looking at the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be overlooked by paying attention to whether the game ball is won in the starting openings 2101 and 2102. Even by making the voice mode the same voice mode as the voice mode to be executed during the specific effect mode, it can be made to notice that a chance has come to the gaming machine in which the player is playing, again The display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be focused on.

  Further, the same effect is obtained when the light emission mode of the lamp / LED is set to the same light emission mode as the light emission mode executed during the specific effect mode. In other words, because the transition control to the high probability state is controlled and the mode is changed to the probability changing mode, the light emission of the gaming machine that has acquired a lot of prize balls by controlling the light emission of the lamp / LED in a manner different from other game machines. If you know the light emission mode of the lamp or LED that is executed in an advantageous state by looking at the mode, you want to be in that state as the player's mind. In this state, when a gaming machine that is suddenly playing is controlled to emit light in the same manner as the lighting mode that is executed during a specific production mode, it is expected that the gaming machine that you are playing will have a chance. Do. For example, during an effect mode other than the specific effect mode, the lamps / LEDs provided mainly on the game board 4 are controlled to emit light, and during the specific effect mode, the lamps / LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are controlled. Light emission is controlled over a wide range with the lamps and LEDs provided, the brightness of the lamps and LEDs is increased during a specific production mode than during a production mode other than the specific production mode, or during a specific production mode Lamps / LEDs blink at shorter intervals than during a production mode other than a specific production mode, or during a specific production mode, a flashing luminescent color (for example, a specific production mode) The player may have noticed that the liquid crystal display device 1900 has not been viewed, for example, by using a red light emission color and a blue or green light emission color in other production modes. It is Rukoto can be again attracted attention to the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 1900, it can appeal that has been controlled to a specific production mode to turn a third party.

  Furthermore, the same effect can be obtained when the movable aspect of the movable body is the same as the movable aspect performed during the specific effect mode. That is, the movable aspect of the gaming machine in which the movable body is movably controlled in a manner different from that of the other gaming machines by transition control to the high probability state and being controlled to the definite variation mode, and acquiring a large number of winning balls. Have a desire to be in the same state if they know the movable aspect of the movable body to be executed in an advantageous state by watching the, and suddenly their own gaming machine is executed during a specific effect mode When the movable body is movably controlled in the movable mode similar to the movable mode, it is expected that a chance has come to the gaming machine in which the player is playing. For example, a movable body provided in the game area 1100 and not moving in a rendering mode other than a specific rendering mode is operated at a predetermined interval, or a movable body not moving in a rendering mode other than the specific rendering mode is liquid crystal displayed The liquid crystal display device 1900 is viewed by causing the movable body to appear forward so as to overlap with the device 1900, or by operating the movable body at a shorter interval during a specific effect mode than during an effect mode other than the specific effect mode. The player who was not able to notice that something is happening can be made to pay attention to the display contents of the liquid crystal display 1900 again, and the third party is also controlled to a specific effect mode. I can appeal to you.

  Further, unlike the display content of the flat liquid crystal display device 1900, since it is suggested by the sound mode, the operation mode of the movable body, and the light emission mode, the control mode of these rendering means in other game machines can be easily viewed The control mode of the rendering means can be grasped by visually recognizing the control states of other gaming machines in the specific rendering mode, and the rendering means is suddenly in the specific rendering mode in a state other than the specific rendering mode. When it is controlled in the same manner as the control mode, it can be expected that it will be controlled to a specific effect mode, and the fun of the game is improved.

  In this way, by controlling the production means that makes it easy for a third party to recognize the drive state to a mode similar to the mode executed during the specific production mode, the special production mode is entered when a big hit is achieved. In order to suggest that the rate of transition is high (or to transition to a specific performance mode), it is possible to receive a look of envy by executing the performance and give the player a sense of superiority.

  In addition, it is desirable that such an effect is to be executed even in the player's own game machine by visually recognizing that the effect means is controlled in the same mode as the mode executed in the specific effect mode in other game machines. While strongly giving a desire, I can also give a desire to be immersed in a sense of superiority.

  In addition, the above-mentioned performance is further improved by suggesting that after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is controlled to a more advantageous state (a state in which the expected value of winning a prize ball is high) among a plurality of types of gaming states. It is also possible to For example, when controlling to the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state) after the big hit gaming state is finished, the big hit gaming state (the number of rounds in which the winning ball can be obtained is larger) Control to a large jackpot gaming state (for example, the sum of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the jackpot gaming state, such as the 5R jackpot gaming state and the 15R jackpot gaming state to be controlled to the 15R jackpot gaming state) When a big hit is made, the same mode as the probability change mode is executed during the fluctuation display (the big hit with a large number of winning balls is higher than the small winning jack with a small number of winning balls in the big hit gaming state) It may be executed in proportion), the number cut off after the end of the jackpot gaming state (when the variable display of the number of times determined in advance is executed to end the control of the high probability state Of the so-called "ST machine" in the case of controlling in the mode (high probability time short state) a big hit (for example, 50 times in the probability mode) in which more variable display can be performed in the positive time mode (high probability time short state) When it becomes possible to execute one of the 100 variable displays, the same mode as the positive variation mode is executed during the variable display when it becomes the large hit that can be executed 100 times (in the positive variation mode) The game interest can be further improved by performing the big hit with a large number of variable displays that can be performed rather than the big hit that can be performed with a small number of possible variable displays.

  Specifically, if the 15R (right) probability variation is determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process or the corresponding process of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the first variation pattern setting process and In the second variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern table is selected by selecting the variation pattern table at the time of 15R (right) probability variation big hit, and “melody reach” is determined in the variation pattern table at the time of 15R (right) probability variation big hit. It is selected when the ratio is determined for another probability variable big hit that is controlled to a big hit gaming state in which the number of winning balls that can be acquired is less than the big hit gaming state executed when the 15R (right) probability variable big hit is reached. Set higher than the fluctuation pattern table (determine the fluctuation pattern table to be selected if it is determined to be another probability change big hit) as "melody reach" May also be) as configured not be. 15R (Right) In the jackpot gaming state executed when the odd hit is a big hit, the player can acquire a larger amount of prize balls than in the jackpot gaming state executed when the other big hit is hit. By performing the "reach", it is possible to improve the game interest.

  Similarly, in the definite variation during the definite variation mode (high probability time short condition) in the corresponding processing of the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing and the second special symbol stop symbol setting processing, the probability variation big hit that can be executed 100 times If determined, the first variation pattern setting process and the second variation pattern setting process are configured to select the variation pattern by selecting the variation pattern table in the ST100 times jackpot, and the variation pattern table is determined in the ST100 number variation pattern table. The percentage to be determined as “melody reach” is higher than the variation pattern table selected when it is determined to be a probability variation big hit that can execute variation display less than 100 times in the probability variation mode (high probability time short status) Set (determine the probability variation big hit that can be executed less than 100 times of variation display in the probability variation mode (high probability time short status) It may also be) as configured not determined variation pattern table is selected in the "melody reach" when it is. In the probability variation big hit that can perform 100 times of variation display in the probability variation mode (high probability time short status) occurrence of the big hit gaming state again than the probability variation big hit (for example 50 times) that can execute the variation display less than 100 times Because the player is more likely to play a game and is in a more advantageous state, the game interest can be improved by executing "melody reach".

  Note that transition control from the high probability state to the low probability state is performed when the variable display of the predetermined number of times is executed (for example, 50 times) by controlling in the definite variation mode (high probability time short state) of number cut At this time, control of the time saving state may be ended simultaneously and transition control may be made to the low probability non-time saving state, or until a predetermined number of variable display is executed without ending control of the time saving state (for example, big hit gaming state end) After that, it may be controlled to shift to the low probability time short state continuously until the variable display is performed 100 times) or until the big hit gaming state is reached again. In this case, when the variable display of a predetermined number of times is performed as the certain change mode of the number cut, control of the short time state is simultaneously ended and transition control to the low probability non-short state is performed in advance. If it is configured to control to either the 2nd ST jackpot to shift control to the low probability time / short state without ending the control of the short time state when the variable display of the number of times is executed, the first special If it is decided in the second ST big hit in the processing corresponding to step S123 of the symbol stop symbol setting processing and the second special symbol stop symbol setting processing, the second fluctuation in the second fluctuation pattern setting processing in the first fluctuation pattern setting processing and the second fluctuation pattern setting processing The pattern table is selected to be configured to determine the variation pattern, and “melody reach” is determined in the second ST jackpot variation pattern table. The ratio is set higher than the variation pattern table selected when other jackpots including the first ST jackpot are determined (the variation pattern table selected when other jackpots including the first ST jackpot are determined) May be configured not to be determined as "melody reach". Even if control is shifted from the high probability state to the low probability state at the end of the second ST big hit, control of the short time state continues without ending, so the starting opening per unit time As the number of winning prizes in 2101 and 2102 increases, the chances of a big hit lottery increase, and since the player is in an advantageous state, the “melody reach” can be executed to improve the game interest.

  In the example described above, drive control of the rendering means (for example, at least one of a speaker, a movable body, and a means for executing effects such as a lamp and an LED) in the same manner as in the specific effect mode during the variable display. , And when it is a big hit in the variable display, it is controlled to a specific effect mode after the end of the big hit gaming state, and at least one of the means (for example, a speaker, a movable body, a lamp, LED, etc. executes effects) To start the drive control in a mode during the specific effect mode of), but performing "melody reach" to be a big hit when it is a big hit and running a big hit gaming state It is before the big hit symbol is derived and displayed while executing the effect which is hard to be understood by the player and the situation similar to the aspect in the specific effect mode continuously from before the transition control to the specific mode In the representation section may be controlled drive. This will be described below with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215.

  Peripheral control MPU4140a receives the fluctuation pattern of the melody reach 2R probability variation big hit which performs the transition control to the high probability short-time state after executing the “melody reach” and controlling to the 2R big hit gaming state of short-time release (about 0.5 seconds) Then, the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is started and the output of the sound mode similar to the special sound mode is started from the speakers 130, 222, 262 etc. (FIG. 214 (A)). At a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative symbol on the right (in the example shown in FIG. 214 (B), the timing at which the left and right decorative symbols stop at the same symbol and reach the middle decorative symbol is not displayed yet) The liquid crystal display device 1900 is suddenly blacked out (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off to cause the display to disappear) (FIG. 214 C).

  Then, after blacking out the liquid crystal display device 1900 for a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), white out gradually from near the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is extinguished to display white) (Figs. 214 (D) and (E)) and the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays white as "full The player is notified of transition control to (FIG. 214 (F)), and control of the probability variation middle mode (high probability time reduction state) is started (FIG. 214 (G)).

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 215, the big winning opening is opened twice for a short time during the period until the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out and then gradually whitened out and displayed as "certain change mode entry!" 2R jackpot gaming state is executed. That is, a predetermined effect (in this example, an effect of gradually making a white out after blacking out the liquid crystal display device 1900 in this example) is executed without displaying and displaying the display result of the decorative symbol and without notifying that a big hit has been made. By making the 2R big hit gaming state during the effect, it is difficult for the player to realize that the 2R big hit gaming state is reached. Then, the player is given unexpectedness by being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as “probable inside change mode rush!” Without the display result of the decorative symbol being derived and displayed.

  In addition, the voice mode may be the same as the special voice mode (for example, a part of the special voice mode (for example, the first half or No. 1) before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, or is completely the same as the special voice mode. May be output), and then the output of the special voice mode is continued (repeatedly executed) until the control in the probability changing mode ends. Therefore, the special voice mode is output during the variable display, so that the player can be reminded of the indeterminate mode and can be recognized as being controlled to the indeterminate mode at any time, giving unexpectedness and improving the amusement effect be able to.

  In the above example, as shown in FIG. 215, the output of the special voice mode is started when the variable display based on the variation pattern of Melodyreach 2R probability variation big hit is started, but the variation display, ie the special symbol The output of the special sound mode may be started within a period from the start of the variable display of to the derivation display of the display result of the special symbol.

  Further, it may be executed in combination with the execution of the “melody reach” for outputting the special sound mode during the variable display to stop the display of the big hit symbol of the decorative symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the mode is suddenly shifted to the probability changing mode or whether the big hit gaming state occurs, and the variation in performance increases, so that the player is not bored.

  In the above example, the high probability non-short state is always controlled to the probability variation latent mode, but the high probability non-time short state is configured to control either the probability variation latent mode or the positive number non-short time mode. When controlling to the probability variation latent mode in the high probability non-short state, the presentation means (for example, the speaker, the movable body, the lamp, the LED, etc. are continuously displayed in the same manner as the probability variation non-time short mode At least one of the means to be executed may be drive-controlled to shift control (promotion) from the probability variation latent mode to the probability variation non-time-short mode.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the variation pattern of the promoted melody reach in the probability variation latent mode during the high probability non-short-time state and receives the variation pattern of the promoted melody reach, the left, middle, and right decorations are received. Start the variation display of the symbol and start the output of the same voice aspect as the specific voice aspect output from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. in the probability variation non-short mode, and the variation display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols The liquid crystal display device 1900 is suddenly blacked out at a predetermined timing (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display disappears).

  Then, after blacking out the liquid crystal display device 1900 for a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), white out gradually from near the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is extinguished to display white) To make a transition to a probability variable non-short mode (high probability non-short state) by displaying “probable non-time short mode rush!” Based on the liquid crystal display device 1900 being completely white out. In addition to notifying the player, control of the positive / negative short time mode is started.

  In this way, when the high probability non-short-time state is controlled and the production mode is controlled to the probability variation latent mode, the same voice mode as the specific voice mode during the variable display (for example, one of the specific voice modes) Part (for example, the first half or number 1 may be completely the same as the specific voice mode), and then the specific voice mode is controlled until the control of the probabilistic non-short-time mode ends. Continue output (repeat). Therefore, it is possible to remind the player that the certain variation non-short-time mode has been controlled by the output of the specific voice mode during the fluctuation display, and to recognize that it has been controlled to the certain variation non-short-time mode for some time. It can be improved.

  In the example described above, although the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out after being displayed in the variation display in which the specific voice mode is output, and the transition control to the probability variation non-time-short mode is indicated without displaying the out-of-design symbol. The present invention is not limited to this, and normal change display may be performed without blacking out the liquid crystal display device 1900 to derive and display an out-of-place symbol, and to notify transition control to the probability variation non-time-short mode. Thus, even if the display result is out of place, the game entertainment can be improved by promoting the player from the probability variation latent mode to the probability variation non-short-time mode to a state advantageous to the player. Further, in this case, a predetermined combination (for example, a combination of symbols including all of “1”, “3”, and “5”) may be displayed.

  In addition, even when the transition control (promotion) is not performed from the probability variation latency mode to the probability variation non-short-time mode, the specific voice mode may be output during the variation display at a predetermined rate (so-called gas). In this case, the output period of the specific voice mode during the variation display may be shorter when the probability variation latent mode is continued than when the transition control (promotion) is performed to the probability variation non-short mode. For example, when the transition control to the probability variation non-short-time mode is performed, the output of the specific voice mode is started at a predetermined timing after the start of the variation display (may be simultaneously with the start of the variation display), and then the probability variation is not performed. While the specific voice mode is continuously output until the time reduction mode is ended, when the probability variation latent mode is continued without performing the transition control to the probability variation non-time reduction mode, a predetermined timing (after the start of the variable display) The output of the specific voice mode may be started at the same time as the start of the variable display), and the output of the specific voice mode is stopped before the symbols are stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not blacked out. The symbols may be stopped and displayed. As a result, even when the transition control (promotion) is not performed to the probability variation non-time reduction mode, the expectation for the probability variation non-time reduction mode can be improved.

[8. Arm accessory production]
Next, the arm accessory effect executed during the variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 219. FIG. 216 is a diagram illustrating a normal state before a specific movable effect described later is performed. FIG. 217 is a diagram illustrating a process of moving the arm unit 3250 to the standby position through the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a stage before the specific movable effect described later. FIG. 218 is a diagram showing a state in which the arm unit 3250 moves from the storage position to the standby position and is held at the standby position. FIG. 219 is a diagram illustrating an aspect of a specific movable effect described later. In this example, when the arm unit 3250 is displayed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the variable display (that is, in front of the display area where the predetermined effect image is displayed), the reach effect with high expectation level (reach development) is expected. It is supposed to shift to production). This will be described in detail below.

[8-1. Drive control by scheduler]
The peripheral control MPU 4140a controls a control program, and the control program includes a CA unit 4141 (hereinafter referred to as “command analysis unit”) and an SC unit 4142 (hereinafter referred to as “scheduler control unit”) as shown in FIG. ing. The command analysis unit 4141 analyzes the command received from the main control board 4100, and writes command information for each identifier included in the command to the work 4144.

  On the other hand, based on the command information for each identifier written in the work 4144, the scheduler control unit 4142 determines the first output device 4145a, the second output device 4145b, the third output device 4145c, and the third output device 4145b corresponding to the identifier. The drive control information regarding any of the four output devices 4145d can be acquired, and each drive target can be controlled based on the drive control information.

  Here, the first output device 4145a corresponds to, for example, any one of the above-described speakers 821, 130, 222, and 262 or a combination thereof, and the second output device 4145b may, for example, drive the lamp described above It corresponds to a lamp driven through the substrate 3013. Further, the third output device 4145 c may be, for example, a drive motor (not only the left drive motor 3161 but also an arm slide drive motor 3219, a forearm drive motor 3307, and an upper arm drive). The fourth output device 4145d corresponds to, for example, the liquid crystal display device 1400, and corresponds to the motor 3254 and the arm slide drive motor 3219).

  The scheduler control unit 4142 selects command information written for each identifier in the work 4144 and schedule data 4143 corresponding to the identifier. The schedule data 4143 is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4140 b.

  Here, the schedule data 4143 includes first schedule data related to sound output control (hereinafter referred to as “sound schedule data”) 4143a (corresponding to “first SD” shown in the figure), and second schedule data related to lamp output. Schedule data (hereinafter referred to as “lamp schedule data”) 4143b (corresponding to “second SD” in the figure), third schedule data relating to motor driving (hereinafter referred to as “motor schedule data”) 4143c (in the figure “ 3rd SD ”) and fourth schedule data (hereinafter referred to as“ display schedule data ”) 4143d (corresponding to“ fourth SD ”shown in the figure) related to the display operation by the liquid crystal display device 1400. There is. In this embodiment, as an example, the scheduler control unit 4142 uses the motor schedule data 4143c. The scheduler control unit 4142 controls the motor drive board 3015 based on the schedule data 4143.

  In the present embodiment, the identifiers described above are assigned to distinguish, for example, the arm slide drive motor 3219, the forearm drive motor 3307, the upper arm drive motor 3254, and the arm slide drive motor 3219 (hereinafter also simply referred to as “motor”). Has been. Based on the schedule data 4143a, 4143b, 4143c, and 4143d, the scheduler control unit 4142 controls a plurality of motors controlled by the schedule data 4143a, 4143b, and 4143c, speakers, lamps, motors and lamps, etc. Control is performed so that the display operation of the liquid crystal display device 1400 controlled by the display schedule data 4143d is synchronized with each other.

  When a plurality of command information is written in the work 4144, the scheduler control unit 4142 obtains a plurality of corresponding drive control information based on the plurality of command information, and the plurality of driving information along the schedule data 4143c. A plurality of drive targets are synchronized and controlled in a drive mode based on control information. The scheduler control unit 4142 controls the motor drive board 3015 based on the motor schedule data 4143 c, and causes the motor drive board 3015 to drive the arm-like slide of a pulse-like excitation signal whose excitation has been updated for each 16 ms interrupt. The motor 3219, the forearm drive motor 3307, the upper arm drive motor 3254, the arm slide drive motor 3219, or any combination thereof (hereinafter also simply referred to as “motor”) is output.

  Here, the scheduler control unit 4142 performs control for outputting an excitation signal when driving the motor (hereinafter referred to as “drive control by the scheduler”). The scheduler control unit 4142 performs control to synchronize the movable bodies with each other with regard to the arm character product effect executed during the variable display as follows. According to the configuration as described above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by adopting a natural movable mode in which these movable objects are synchronized with each other and a rendering mode that does not give a sense of incongruity to the player's eyes. It becomes. Examples of such movable objects that should be synchronized can be exemplified by the following combinations of operations.

  First, as described above, the back-to-back movable effect unit 3200 is disposed directly behind the back-to-front movable effect unit 3400, and the back-to-front decoration 3406 of the back-to-front movable effect unit 3400 and the back-to-back movable presentation unit 3200 Since the upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decoration 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decoration 3352) are formed to have substantially the same size, the back up front movable effect unit 3400 and the back up back movable effect unit 3200 In the normal state (back-up front decoration 3406 and upper-arm decoration 3304 in the retracted position, and forearm decoration 3352 in the storage position), upper-arm decoration 3304 and forearm decoration 3352 on the back side of back-up front decoration 3406 Are almost hidden (see FIG. 174). Although the front part of the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 has a flashy pattern that can be appealed to the player's vision, the upper arm decorative body 3304 on the back side of the back upper front decorative body 3406 And the forearm decorative body 3352 are almost hidden, the pattern on the front surface of the arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 is hidden by the forearm decorative body 3352 and can be viewed in front view. Not possible (see Figure 217). Hereinafter, the generic name of the upper fore decoration body 3406, the upper arm decoration body 3304, and the forearm decoration body 3352 is referred to as “movable means”.

  In the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process) executed by the main control MPU 4100a, an arm accessory reach variation pattern that causes the arm unit 3250 to be displayed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is selected. The peripheral control MPU 4140a starts the variable display based on the reception of the change pattern command instructing the change pattern (see FIG. 216). After the predetermined period, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the decorative symbol reach (in this case, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped with the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol is still displayed. ), A character in a mode of swinging his / her arm is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 without executing a reach effect, and in connection with the display, first, as shown in FIG. In the state where the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden on the rear side of the upper front decorative body 3406, the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is passed as a preliminary stage of the specific movable effect to be described later, and FIG. A standby position (see FIGS. 174 (c) and 218) rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the storage position (initial position) is set. Hereinafter, a state where the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406 is referred to as a “superimposed state”, and the upper front decorative body 3406 and the upper arm decorative body in the superimposed state are referred to as “superimposed state”. The 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 will be referred to as "moving means in a superimposed state".

  Here, as described above, when the movable means is in the standby position (see FIG. 174 (c) and FIG. 218), these (upper front decoration 3406, upper arm decoration 3304 and forearm decoration 3352) can be viewed from the front It has become invisible. When the movable means in the superimposed state passes the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is superimposed in the superimposed state in synchronization with the advancement of the movable means in the superimposed state to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. A predetermined display effect (in this example, a display effect such as emitting light from the upper front decoration 3406) which the player can gaze at is displayed rather than the passage in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 of a certain movable means. Thereby, a player's gaze can be brought to a predetermined display effect rather than passing in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the movable means in the superimposed state. That is, when passing the movable means in the superimposed state in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, in synchronization with this, the player pays attention more than the movable means in the superimposed state passes in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. By displaying on the liquid crystal display device 1900 a predetermined display effect that can be made, the passage of the movable means in the overlapping state in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed in a mode in which be able to. Moreover, since the passage of the movable means in the superimposed state in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not performed in a mode (a mode such as a specific movable effect described later) expected to be a big hit, the movable means in the superimposed state is The player can only keep track of the fact that the player has passed the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this embodiment, the upper arm unit 3300 is in a state in which the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back surface front decorative body 3406 (that is, the plurality of members are compactly folded). And the movable means in a form in which the light emission effect of the plurality of LEDs provided in the forearm unit 3350 is not exhibited (the state in which the LED is turned off and / or the plurality of LEDs is hidden in the back front decoration 3406) Is advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and passes through the liquid crystal display device 1900 so as not to be a big hit. Further, the volume of sound is suppressed more than when a specific movable effect described later is performed so that the acoustic effect is not expected to be a big hit.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the entire backarm front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 from the storage position to the standby position based on the received variation pattern, and then the entire forearm decoration 3352 is A specific movable effect is performed to make the appearance position visible from the player side (see FIGS. 175 (e) and 219). When this specific movable effect is performed, it is highly possible that the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit", and therefore, the player can be highly expected. However, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not always always perform the specific movable effect after moving the movable means in the overlapping state from the storage position to the standby position. That is, the specific movable effect is performed only when the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for executing the specific movable effect. Therefore, even if the movable means in the superimposed state moves from the storage position to the standby position, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed without performing the specific movable effect, and the current variable display is ended. Sometimes.

  When the received variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a specific movable effect that can give the player a sense of expectation that it is a big hit, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the superimposed movable means from the storage position to the standby position. The forearm decoration body 3352 is immediately brought into the appearance position where it can be seen from the player side (see FIG. 175 (e) and FIG. 219), or is held at the standby position for a predetermined period of time. At a predetermined timing in relation to the display, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is brought into a state of appearance where it can be seen by the player.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a is a fluctuation pattern in which the received fluctuation pattern is to execute a specific movable effect, and immediately after being moved to the standby position, brings the entire forearm decorative body 3352 into the appearance position seen from the player side In this case, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decoration are immediately moved after moving the movable means in the overlapping state through the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and temporarily moving to the standby position (see FIG. 174 (c) and FIG. 218). Only the body 3352 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (while the back top front decoration 3406 is kept in the standby position), and the proximal end of the upper arm decoration 3304 moves away from the back top front decoration 3406 in the left direction. From the state where the forearm decoration 3352 overlaps with the upper arm decoration 3304, the tip side is rotated so as to be away from the upper arm decoration 3304, and the back upper front decoration 34 6, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 appear (see FIG. 175 (d)), and the forearm decorative body is further moved to the left in front view. The entire 3352 is in the appearance position where it can be seen by the player (see FIGS. 175 (e) and 219). Also, when advancing the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the specific movable effect by the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 (see FIG. 175 (e) and FIG. 219) To make the liquid crystal display device 1900 pay attention to the forearm decoration 3352 (in this example, a plurality of LEDs disposed on the front of the forearm decoration 3352 are turned on, and A display effect in which the forearm decoration body 3352 mainly emits the light is emitted toward the periphery of the forearm decoration body 3352 (see FIG. 219). Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 4140a rotates the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 clockwise as viewed from the front, and rotates the back upper front decorative body 3406 clockwise as viewed from the front, thereby the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative The body 3352 and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are returned to the housing position, and the reach development effect is started on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since the reach development expectation is higher than the normal reach effect in the reach development production, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is moved to the appearance position to be visible and improve the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state Can do.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is a fluctuation pattern in which the received fluctuation pattern is to execute a specific movable effect, and in the case where the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is not immediately brought into a state of appearance where it can be seen from the player side With the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 hidden behind the front decorative body 3406, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is moved forward to the standby position (see FIGS. 174 (c) and 218). After that, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are held in the standby position and the normal reach effect is performed. Then, the proximal end side of the upper arm decorative body 3304 moves away from the back upper front decorative body 3406 in the left direction and the fore arm decorative body 3352 overlaps the upper arm decorative body 3304 so that the distal end side moves away from the upper arm decorative body 3304 The upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 appear from the back side of the back upper front decorative body 3406 (see FIG. 175 (d)), and the arm unit 3250 is further leftward in front view By moving the forearm to the player, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is in the state of the appearance position seen from the player side (see FIG. 175 (e) and FIG. 219). At this time, among the upper arm decorative body 3304, the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the forearm decorative body 3352, only the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 advance from the standby position to the front of the liquid crystal display 1900, and the back upper front decoration The body 3406 will remain in the standby position. Also, a display that causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 to focus on the forearm decoration 3352 in synchronization with the advancement of the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 forward to the liquid crystal display device 1900 (in this example, light is emitted from the forearm decoration 3352) Display). Thereafter, when the specific movable effect is finished, the peripheral control MPU 4140a rotates the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 clockwise as viewed from the front, and rotates the back upper front decorative body 3406 clockwise as viewed from the front. The upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are returned to the state of the accommodation position, and the reach development effect is started in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since the reach development expectation is higher than the normal reach effect in the reach development production, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is moved to the appearance position to be visible and improve the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state Can do.

  When the specific movable effect is executed, as described above, although the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 advance from the standby position to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the back upper front decorative body 3406 remains at the standby position. . Therefore, at this time, since the patterns attached to the front portions of the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 can be viewed in a front view, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the standby position. The visual impression (visual image) seen from the front is different from the visual image seen from the front of the movable means in the superimposed state in which the movable means in the superimposed state advances from the initial position to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It will be.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a returns the upper arm decorative body 3304, the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the forearm decorative body 3352 to the storage position after performing the specific movable effect, the base end side of the upper arm decorative body 3304 is right While bringing it close to the back upper front decoration 3406 in the direction, the back upper front decoration 3406 is turned clockwise in a front view. And while turning the tip side of the forearm decoration 3352 so that the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 overlap, the back upper front decoration 3406 hides the overlapping upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 from the front Thus, the back upper front decoration 3406 is turned clockwise in a front view. Thus, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 in the state of performing the specific movable effect (see FIG. 175 (e) and FIG. 219) and the back upper front decorative body 3406 in the standby position Return to the storage position along with. However, at this time, it is necessary for the player's gaze not to move from the display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the upper arm decorative body 3304, back upper front decorative body 3406 and forearm decorative body 3352 returned to the storage position. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the upper arm decorative body 3304, the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are returned to the storage position, the player's gaze on the display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not inhibited. Move them to the storage position. Thus, the upper arm decorative body 3304, the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are placed on the back side of the back upper front decorative body 3406 in which the upper arm decorative body 3406 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are performed. Of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the state of being hidden, and forward movement of the liquid crystal display device from the standby position of only the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 in order to perform the specific movable effect. , It is returned to the stowed position in a slender manner. In particular, the back upper front decoration 3406, which is returned from the standby position to the storage position, needs to be quietly returned to the storage position. In the present embodiment, for example, the back front decoration 3406 is returned from the standby position to the storage position at the timing when the display effect is switched from the normal reach effect to the reach development effect. Since whether the reach effect develops from the normal reach effect to the reach effect is whether or not the player pays attention in playing the game, the effect of attracting attention of such a player is performed to pay attention to the player When the rear upper front decoration 3406 in the standby position can be returned to the storage position in a very natural form without a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, as a method to return the rear upper front decoration 3406 left in the standby position with the specific movable effect to the storage position in a very natural form without discomfort, the display effect from the normal reach effect to the reach development effect is It is not limited to returning from the standby position to the storage position at the switching timing. For example, if the player's gaze can be moved from the stand-by position to the storage position from the back front decoration 3406 to another location, it can be moved from the standby position to the storage position in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to notice. it can. For example, when developing from normal reach production to reach development production, if the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit differs depending on the development destination, the display production that suggests the development of the reach development production at the development destination is By displaying the upper front decorative body 3406 in a display area away from the path when the upper front decorative body 3406 moves from the standby position to the storage position, the back upper front decorative body 3406 is displayed from the standby position in a manner that is not easily noticed by the player. It can be moved to the storage position.

  Also, with the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406, the front position of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is passed and the standby position is temporarily seen (see FIGS. 174 (c) and 218). Upper arm decoration 3304, back upper front decoration 3406, and forearm decoration that is moved to the standby position from the storage position when the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that does not execute the specific movable effect despite movement to The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed in a state where the body 3352 is held at the standby position (without performing the specific movable effect).

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a returns the upper arm decorative body 3304, the back upper front decorative body 3406, and the forearm decorative body 3352 to the state of the storage position without performing the specific movable effect, to the rear side of the back upper front decorative body 3406 A state in which the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406, which is performed as a step before specific movable rendering, in the overlapping state where the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden. Both in the forward direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and in the forward direction of the liquid crystal display device from the standby position of only the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 in order to perform the specific movable effect. And the storage position is returned to the storage position. In the present embodiment, for example, a time for darkening the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided before the confirmation display for confirming the lottery result is performed in the current variation display, and the movable state that is in a superimposed state is provided at this darkened time. The means is passed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and returned from the standby position to the storage position. Then, in accordance with the fact that the movable means in the superimposed state has passed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a confirmation display for confirming the lottery result in the current variable display is performed. Thereby, it is possible to return the arm decoration body 3304, back front decoration 3406 and forearm decoration 3352 which are compactized in the superimposed state from the standby position to the storage position in a very natural form without a sense of discomfort It becomes. It is preferable that the time for darkening the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 be as short as possible within the range in which the movable means in the overlapping state can be returned from the standby position to the storage position.

  In addition, as a method of returning the arm decoration body 3304, the back upper front decoration body 3406, and the forearm decoration body 3352 that have been compacted by being in a superposed state from the standby position to the storage position in a very natural manner without a sense of incongruity, liquid crystal display The display of the device 1900 is not limited to being darkened. For example, if the player's gaze can be moved from the arm decoration body 3304, the back upper front decoration body 3406, and the forearm decoration body 3352 moving from the standby position to the storage position to another place, the player is less likely to notice. It can be moved from the standby position to the storage position. For example, a display effect for attracting a player who can predict the result of the next variable display is a route when the arm decoration body 3304, the back upper front decoration body 3406, and the forearm decoration body 3352 move from the standby position to the storage position. The arm decoration body 3304, the back upper front decoration body 3406, and the forearm decoration body 3352 can be moved from the standby position to the storage position in a manner that is not easily noticed by the player. it can.

  In the standby position, a part of the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are exposed to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and can be visually recognized by the player, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board. The upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are rotated little by little while controlling the plurality of LEDs mounted on 3305 in a predetermined light emission mode (in this example, blinking red), and the upper arm decoration body 3304 and A flame is displayed in the vicinity of the right end portion of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on which a part of the forearm decoration 3352 overlaps, and the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are highlighted (function effect effect). As described above, the expectation for the appearance of the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 of the player at the standby position is further improved.

  That is, peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the back surface front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 to the standby position, and then holds the standby position for the predetermined period. , A preparation effect that can give a sense of expectation that a specific movable effect will be performed is performed.

  When the specific movable effect is performed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a rotates only the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 clockwise when the normal reach effect is finished in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The proximal end of the upper arm decorative body 3304 moves away from the back upper front decorative body 3406 in the left direction and the forearm decorative body 3352 rotates so that the distal end side moves away from the upper arm decorative body 3304 The upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 appear from the back side of the back upper front decorative body 3406 (see FIG. 175 (d)), and the arm unit 3250 is further leftward in front view As a result, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is brought into a state of appearance where it can be seen from the player side by moving it to the position (see FIGS. 175 (e) and 219). ). In addition, a display that causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 to focus on the forearm decoration 3352 in synchronization with the forward movement of the liquid crystal display 1900 of the forearm decoration 3352 (in this example, a display such as emitting light from the forearm decoration 3352) Execute.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a rotates the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 clockwise as viewed from the front, and rotates the back upper front decorative body 3406 clockwise as viewed from the front to display the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 And, the back upper front decoration body 340 is returned to the state of the accommodation position, and the reach development effect is started in the liquid crystal display device 1900. The reach development expectation is higher than the normal reach effect that has been executed, so the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is moved to the appearance position and becomes visible so that the expectation for the player's jackpot game state is expected. Can be improved.

  In addition, after the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the reach of the decorative pattern based on the received fluctuation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 4140a waits for the back upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 immediately without performing reach production. Without moving to the position (FIG. 174 (c)), it may be a normal reach effect (a reach effect in the same effect mode or a reach effect in a different effect mode). One special design, second special design that performs reach production multiple times (one that develops reach production multiple times, one that develops reach production multiple times, one that performs pseudo-continuous variation and multiple reach effects) ), Or may be to execute reach effect over a plurality of variable displays.) After performing a predetermined number of times (or one or more times) Upper front decorative body 3406, there is a case of moving the upper arm decorative body 3304, and a forearm ornamental body 3352 to the standby position (FIG. 174 (c)).

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a also uses the received variation pattern to move the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 to the standby position after executing a normal reach effect a predetermined number of times. After the upper fore ornament 3406, the upper arm ornament 3304, and the forearm ornament 3352 are moved to the standby position, the entire forearm ornament 3352 is immediately moved to the appearance position where it can be seen from the player side (FIG. 175 (e)). 219), or in an appearance position where the entire forearm decoration body 3352 can be seen from the player side at a predetermined timing in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by being held at a standby position for a predetermined period. Do.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 to the standby position after executing the normal reach effect a predetermined number of times, and immediately thereafter, moves the forearm decorative body. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is synchronized with the forward movement of the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the forearm decorative body 3352 while setting the appearance position where the entire 3352 can be seen from the player side (see FIGS. 175 (e) and 219). A display for making the forearm decorative body 3352 pay attention (in this example, a display in which light is emitted from the forearm decorative body 3352) is performed. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 4140a returns the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 340 to the state of the accommodation position, and starts the reach development effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since the reach development expectation is higher than the normal reach effect in the reach development production, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is moved to the appearance position to be visible and improve the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state Can do.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the back-up front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 to the standby position immediately after performing the normal reach production a predetermined number of times, and immediately after the entire forearm decoration 3352 When the back upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 are temporarily moved to the standby position (FIG. 174 (c)) when not in the appearance position as seen from the player side, the upper arm decoration The 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are held at the standby position for a predetermined period, and the normal reach production (the reach production with a higher hit probability than the reach production performed previously) is performed again on the liquid crystal display device 1900 You may do it, you may be made to execute reach production of the big hit expectation which is equal to the reach production which was executed last time) That. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the above-mentioned accessory effect production to further improve the expectation for the expression of the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves to the appearance position where the entire forearm decoration 3352 can be seen from the player side at the timing when the normal reach effect is finished in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (FIG. 175 (e) and FIG. 219) and a display (in this example, the forearm ornament 3352 emits light) in which the forearm ornament 3352 is noticed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in synchronization with the forward movement of the forearm ornament 3352 of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Display).

  Thus, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decoration 3406 and the back upper front decoration 3406 which are hardly visible (difficult to see) from the player side. A game in which the upper arm decorative body 3304 is thought to be exposed in order to move to a standby position where the player can hardly see again (visual difficulty) despite appearing once visible to the player in the state. Disappoint and discourage people. Thereafter, by displaying the upper arm decoration 3304, the player can be surprised and more delighted, and the gaming interest is improved.

  Further, in a state where the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are hidden behind the back surface front decoration 3406, they are temporarily moved from the storage position to the standby position through the front of the liquid crystal display 1900. After that, as shown in FIG. 175 (d), the upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 appear from the back side of the back upper front decorative body 3406, and further in FIG. 175 (e) and FIG. As shown, by moving the arm unit 3250 in the left direction in the front view (the direction toward the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900), the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is brought into a state of appearing position seen from the player side By performing the movable production, it is possible to increase the expectation degree of big hit.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 175 (e), the arm unit 3250 is moved to the left in front view from the standby position as a front stage of a movable effect with a high degree of expectation of big hit (specific movable effect). Although the upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are once positioned in front of the liquid crystal display 1900, here the standby position is passed through the front of the liquid crystal display without performing specific movable effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by performing an effect such as moving to a position. In other words, in a conventional gaming machine that is often only noticed whether or not the movable body advances to the front of the liquid crystal display device, if the movable body advances to the front of the liquid crystal display device, the big hit expectation degree However, unless the movable body advances to the front of the liquid crystal display device, a big hit cannot be expected. On the other hand, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the frequency at which the movable body advances to the front of the liquid crystal display device is increased, the movable body effect itself becomes an effect with low expectation of the big hit, The production itself used is ruined. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, as the previous stage of the specific movable effect, the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 in the storage position are once positioned in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. However, here, by performing the effect of passing the front of the liquid crystal display device and moving to the standby position without performing the specific movable effect, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the specific movable effect and thus the big hit expectation. Moreover, even if the frequency of the production in the previous stage of such a specific movable effect is increased, if the frequency of execution of the specific movable effect is not increased, the big hit expectation degree for this specific movable effect can be maintained, and the interest is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the advancement of the arm unit 3250 to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a first-stage advance, a second-stage advance, and a third-stage advance. The advancement of the first stage is performed as a previous stage of the specific movable effect, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 starts from the initial position in the state where the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decoration body 3406. Is advancing forward. In the second stage, in order to perform a specific movable effect, the back upper front decorative body 3406 remains in the standby position, and only the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 move from the standby position to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is an advance. The third stage advancement is a liquid crystal from the standby position for the back front front decorative body 3406 left in the standby position after the specific movable presentation is ended as the third stage advancement when the specific movable presentation is performed. The upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are provided on the rear side of the back upper front decoration body 3406 as a third stage advancement when the display device 1900 advances forward and the specific movable effect is not performed. This is the advance of the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the standby position in the hidden state. Of these first stage advancement, second stage advancement and third stage advancement, it is the second stage advancement that advances to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the most conspicuous (attracting the player's attention). The third stage is to advance to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the least inconspicuous form. If the strength of the degree to which the arm unit 3250 can bring the player's attention is relatively strong, the form becomes more prominent.

  In this embodiment, although the first stage advancement and the second stage advancement are both the same in that the arm unit 3350 is advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal display in the first stage advancement The role of the display effect displayed on the device 1900 differs from the role of the display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the second stage of advancement. That is, in FIG. 216, three houses are displayed far on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and are scrolled in the horizontal direction. Then, in FIG. 217 showing advancement of the first stage, although the arm unit 3250 is advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is variable according to the movement of the arm unit 3250 (movable body Switching effect control means).

  Specifically, when the arm unit 3250 passes in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the first stage of advancement, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the three houses far away, but the distance to the house is Is closer and only one house is displayed. In FIG. 217, one house whose distance is short is displayed in the display area (the display area on the left side of the arm unit 3250 in FIG. 217) through which the arm unit 3250 has already passed. In the display area which has not passed (display area on the right side of the arm unit 3250 in FIG. 217), the house is still displayed far. In this way, by switching the display effect according to the movement of the arm unit 3250, the player's gaze can be attracted to the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 rather than the movable effect (movement) by the arm unit 3250. That is, in the first stage, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is the main effect, and the movable effect by the arm unit 3250 is the effect to follow.

  In the second stage, based on the result of the special lottery, the arm unit 3250 is advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 from the standby position, and a backup effect is provided to boost the specific movable effect as the display effect (movable object impact Production control means). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 219, a forearm decoration 3352 that emits light emitted from a plurality of LEDs disposed on the front of the forearm decoration 3352 toward the periphery of the forearm decoration 3352. A display effect is performed with the main theme of. At this time, the player's gaze can be attracted to the movable effect (specific movable effect) by the arm unit 3250 rather than the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900. That is, in the second stage advancement, the movable effect by the arm unit 3250 becomes the main effect, and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 follows.

  As described above, in the first stage advancing, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is mainly produced and the movable effect by the arm unit 3250 is followed, but in the second stage advancing, the movable effect by the arm unit 3250 The main effect is to make the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 a secondary effect, thereby backing up the movable effect by the arm unit 3250 and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 to each other according to the state of the game Can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's gaze from being biased unilaterally to any one of the two effects of different tastes, and it is possible to mutually draw out the goodness of each of the effects, and it is possible to It becomes possible to perform an effect effectively. In addition, by switching the master-slave relationship between the movable effect by the arm unit 3250 and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the state of the game, the first stage, the second stage, and the third stage, Even if the arm unit 3250 passes in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a series of movements due to the movement of the arm unit 3250 between the standby position and the storage position passing the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be It can be done in a very natural way without giving a sense of discomfort.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of LEDs disposed on the front surface of the forearm decorative body 3352 only when the second stage of the first stage advance, the second stage advance, and the third stage advance is performed. So that the forearm decorative body 3352 rotates clockwise so that the tip side of the forearm decorative body 3352 gets away from the upper arm decorative body 3304 so as to occupy the largest area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition to the effect (FIG. 165 (e)), the backup display effect for attracting attention to the forearm decorative body 3352 is performed in order to boost this specific movable effect, so in the second stage, the first stage It will stand out from the third stage. Further, in the first stage advancement, the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body are arranged behind the back upper front decoration body 3406 so that the area occupying the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is smaller than that in the second stage advancement. In a state where they are compactly folded so that the 3352 and the 3352 are hidden, and the light emission effect is not exhibited by a plurality of LEDs provided in the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 (a state where the LEDs are turned off And / or a plurality of LEDs are advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a state where the plurality of LEDs are hidden by the back surface front decoration 3406). Even in the third stage advancement, the area occupying the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is made smaller than that in the second stage advancement, and the light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs provided in the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 is exhibited. Not. However, the difference between the first stage advancement and the third stage advancement is the aspect of the display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. That is, in the first stage of advancement, a display effect is given as if light is emitted from the upper front decorative body 3406, whereas in the third stage of advancement, the movable state is in a state of being superimposed from the standby position to the storage position. The display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is darkened or the like so that the player or the upper front decoration 3406 can not easily grasp the movement of the standby position.

  In this way, the third stage advancement is the most inconspicuous among the first stage advancement, the second stage advancement, and the third stage advancement. As a result, when the first stage advance is performed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the specific movable effect being performed. However, a problem is how to bring the arm unit 3250, which has moved from the initial position to the standby position, back to the initial position without discomfort. The advancement in the third stage is not a premise of the specific movable effect, so when the arm unit 3250 such as the back upper front decorative body 3406 is advanced from the standby position to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player It may be misunderstood that there may still be big hit expectations. Therefore, by moving the arm unit 3250 from the initial position to the standby position or from the standby position to the initial position in a prominent order such as the second stage advance, the first stage advance, and the third stage advance, A series of movable body effects such as movement from the position to the standby position and movement from the standby position to the initial position can be performed without discomfort.

  In the case where peripheral control MPU 4140a is determined not to move the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position by the main control MPU 4100a because the arm character product reach fluctuation pattern is not selected (in other words, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is in the appearance position The back up front movable rendering unit 3400 and the back up back movable rendering unit 3200 are also moved at a predetermined ratio even when it is not determined to move. More specifically, even if the arm character reach variation pattern is not selected in the fluctuation pattern setting processing (first fluctuation pattern setting processing, second fluctuation pattern setting processing) executed by the main control MPU 4140a, the arm character Gasereach When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes fluctuation display and displays reach of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command instructing the fluctuation pattern, and then executes reach effect. Instead, the back upper front decoration 3406, the upper arm decoration 3304, and the forearm decoration 3352 are moved from the storage position to the standby position immediately or after a predetermined number of normal reach effects are performed.

  In this case, however, peripheral control MPU 4140a derives and displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol at the timing when the normal reach effect executed by liquid crystal display device 1900 is ended without moving the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position. The upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are turned clockwise with the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406. The upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 340 are returned to the state of the accommodation position without moving the forearm decorative body 3352 in a visible state. In addition, when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display disappears) over a predetermined period. Turn off the lamp and LED arranged in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and move the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 clockwise in a front view and move to the storage position To do. Accordingly, the rotating upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are made inconspicuous. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is whited out over a predetermined period (in this case, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is lit with maximum white brightness). ) And the lamps and LEDs arranged in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are turned on, and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated clockwise as viewed from the front Move to position. Accordingly, the rotating upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are made inconspicuous.

  Thus, even when the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is not visible, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be viewed. Crossing the front and moving the player from the storage position to the standby position to attract the player's attention, and performing the reach effect while conscious of the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 held at the standby position to perform upper arm decoration The expectation for the expression of the body 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 can be improved.

  In addition, since the plurality of timings for moving the back upper forebody 3406, the upper arm ornament 3304, and the forearm ornament 3352 to the standby position and the timing for moving the forearm ornament 3352 to the appearance position are set, the variation display is terminated. Until then, the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 can be expected to move to the standby position, and the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and Expectation can be given to the movement of the forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position until the variation display is terminated in a state where the forearm decoration 3352 is moving to the standby position. In addition, as the period from the start of the variable display to the movement to the appearance position of the forearm decoration 3352 is longer (as the timing at which the forearm decoration 3352 moves to the appearance position is later), the jackpot expectation is higher In this case, when the forearm decorative body 3352 is moved to the appearance position at an early stage by starting the variable display, the expectation for the big hit can be improved by the reach development effect being executed, Even if the forearm decoration 3352 does not move to the appearance position at an early stage, if the forearm decoration 3352 is subsequently moved to the appearance position, the player is discouraged by the jackpot expectation being further increased. Without expectation for the movement to the appearance position of the forearm decorative body 3352 thereafter, the expectation for the big hit can be improved.

  In addition, the arm accessory reach variation pattern may be determined only when it is a win in the variation pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing, second variation pattern setting processing) executed by the main control MPU 4100a. The arm and character reach variation pattern may be determined at a predetermined rate that is lower than when it is hit. Also, the arm accessory gusset reach variation pattern may be determined only when the variation pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing, second variation pattern setting processing) executed by the main control MPU 4100a is out of place. In the case of a hit, the arm character article Gasereach variation pattern may be determined at a predetermined rate lower than that in the case of a hit. As a result, when the entire forearm decorative body 3352 moves to the appearance position and becomes visible, the ratio of jackpot, that is, the jackpot expectation is increased.

  It may be determined by lottery whether or not the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are rotated to the left and right at the standby position. In this case, The upper arm ornament 3304 and the forearm ornament 3352 are moved to the left and right at the standby position at a higher rate than when the arm accessory reach variation pattern and the arm accessory gasase variation variation pattern are received when receiving the arm accessory gas variation variation pattern. By determining that the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are rotated to the left and right at the standby position, the big hit expectation degree may be increased, or the forearm decoration body 3352 may be increased. A variation pattern command is received that indicates an arm accessory reach variation pattern that moves the whole to the appearance position and makes it visible. In this case, the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are chopped to the left and right at the standby position at a higher rate than when the variation pattern command for indicating the arm accessory variation pattern that does not move the entire forearm decoration body 3352 to the appearance position is received. When the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are rotated to the left and right in the left and right directions at the standby position, the degree of expectation that the entire forearm decoration body 3352 moves to the appearance position, in other words, reach development is determined. The execution expectation level of the production becomes high, and as a result, the big hit expectation level increases.

  Further, the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative substrate 3353 and the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 may be made different depending on the degree of expectation of the big hit. For example, whether or not to control the light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 and / or the light emission mode is determined by lottery, and the arm combination reach variation pattern and the arm combination gusset reach variation that become a big hit When a pattern is received, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 are controlled to emit light at a higher rate than when the arm accessory reach variation pattern and the arm accessory gusset reach variation pattern that are shifted are received. In particular, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 are controlled to emit light, the big hit expectation degree may be increased, or the arm accessory reach fluctuation pattern that is a big hit And an arm accessory reach fluctuation pattern that is out of sync when the arm accessory gasse reach fluctuation pattern is received. When the arm combination reach variation pattern and the arm combination release variation pattern are received at a higher rate than when the arm combination release variation pattern is received. Forearm decorative board 3353 and upper arm in a specific light emission mode by determining the normal light emission mode (blinking in blue) at a higher rate than when receiving the arm accessory reach variation pattern and the arm accessory gascer variation variation pattern that are jackpots When a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 3305 are controlled to emit light, the big hit expectation may be increased.

  In addition, the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative substrate 3353 and the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 are differentiated according to the expectation for moving the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position, in other words, the execution expectation for reach development effect. You may do so. For example, whether or not to control the light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative substrate 3353 and the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 and / or the light emission mode is determined by lottery, and the entire forearm decorative body 3352 can be moved to the appearance position for visual recognition The forearm decoration base plate 3353 and the upper arm decoration base plate 3305 at a higher rate than when receiving the arm part product movement variation pattern which does not move the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position when the arm character reach change pattern to be in state is received. It is expected to move the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position when controlling the light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decoration substrate 3353 and the upper arm decoration substrate 3305 by deciding to control the light emission of a plurality of mounted LEDs. Degree may be increased, or the entire forearm decorative body 3352 may be moved to the appearance position to be visible. Determine the specific light emission mode (flashing red) at a higher rate than when receiving the arm character article Gasereach fluctuation pattern that does not move the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position when the arm character product reach fluctuation pattern is received, When receiving the arm character reach variation pattern that moves the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position and makes it visible when receiving the arm character Gaseliech fluctuation pattern that does not move the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position A forearm decoration when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decoration substrate 3353 and the upper arm decoration substrate 3305 in a specific light emission mode are determined by determining the normal light emission mode (flashing blue) at a higher rate than that The expectation of moving the entire 3352 to the appearance position may be high.

  In the above-described example, when the forearm decorative body 3352 is not moved to the appearance position and the normal reach effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is terminated, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol. Black out the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 for a predetermined period (after the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) have been determined and displayed) (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display is displayed And the lamps / LEDs arranged in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are turned off, and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated clockwise in front view. The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed until it is confirmed (normal reach production). The display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be performed for a predetermined period of time) after the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol at the ending timing, or may be before the stop symbol of the offed symbol is displayed. Black out (disappear the display by turning off the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900), and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated clockwise in front view. It may be configured to move to the storage position, and in this case, the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 within the period when the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out. The forearm decorative body 335 is rotated clockwise only for the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 without rotating the whole of the front view clockwise. When the whole is moved to the appearance position, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on and the lamp / LED disposed in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, and then a big hit effect (so-called revival effect) or reach Development effects may be executed. As a result, even after the player recognizes that the variable display has ended, a big hit can be given, which can give unexpectedness and surprise, and in the variable display executed after that, the expectation for the big hit is also given after the end of the variable display. Can improve the game entertainment.

[8-2. Drive control by counter and flag]
In the description of the motor control method described above, the scheduler control unit 4142 drives the motor according to the schedule data 4143, but here, instead, the excitation signal is controlled using the following counter and flag. Anyway.

  In drive control based on the counters and flags, DRVSW (hereinafter referred to as “driver software”) 4146 (see FIG. 221) corresponding to the scheduler control unit 4142 is not limited to the motor drive control method described above. A motor control method using an on counter, an off counter (stop excitation counter) and a fixed excitation counter is implemented.

  First, the on-counter is a counter used to measure the time during which the excitation signal is output from the DRVIC (hereinafter referred to as "driver IC") 4147. The off counter is a counter used to measure the time for stopping the output of the excitation signal output from the driver IC 4147 (so-called excitation off). The fixed excitation counter is a counter used to maintain the driving state of the motor in a fixed state.

  In the present embodiment, each counter is assigned an identifier, and each identifier is assigned a counter flag. As a specific example of such a counter flag, for example, “1” is attached to the on-counter, “2” is attached to the off-counter, and “3” is attached to the fixed excitation counter. ing. The driver software 4146 manages which counter is currently used to control the motor drive by the presence of such a count flag.

  When the counter flag is set to “1” (while using the on counter), the driver software 4146 normally causes the driver IC 4147 to output an excitation signal for each interrupt for the time set in the on counter. Yes. On the other hand, when the counter flag is set to “2” (while using the off counter), the driver software 4146 stops the output of the excitation signal to the driver IC 4147 for each interrupt for the time set in the off counter. Let In this case, the motor may slightly rotate due to inertia.

  Also, when the driver software 4146 sets the counter flag to “3” (during use of the fixed excitation counter), the excitation for fixing the driver IC 4147 every one interrupt over the time set in the fixed excitation counter After outputting the signal (that is, after applying excitation for fixing), the output of the excitation signal is stopped. In this way, the motor can be prevented from rotating with inertia. The reason for stopping the output of the excitation signal after outputting the fixing excitation signal in this way is to prevent the motor from being burned by the continuous input of the excitation signal.

  Here, in the area 4148, for example, data such as effect data is stored from the address 1000 to the specific area, and it is exemplified that the stop command is stored at the address 2000 as a control command. The effect data includes, for example, driving information regarding which counter should be used for what length of interrupt period (number of times) instead of the schedule data 4143 described above. When stopping the motor or the like, the driver software 4146 acquires a control command (such as a stop command) from, for example, the address 2000, and outputs the control command to the driver IC 4147, whereby an excitation signal from the driver IC 4147 is generated. Control the output state of (eg stop).

  The driver software 4146 mentioned above is a specific one when it is necessary to stop the motor urgently when the counter flag is “1” (the on-counter is being used, so the motor is being driven). If the count flag is set to "3" during the interrupt period, the driver IC 4147 can output the fixing excitation signal to stop the motor, and then the output of the excitation signal can be stopped.

  In this case, for example, even if there is a possibility that the production data in the area 4148 in which the control command (stop command) for stopping the output of the excitation signal to the motor is stored may be defective, The driver software 4146 simply sets the count flag to “3” and uses the fixed excitation counter without using a stop command that may cause a problem in the area 4148, and the driver IC 4147 over the period of the fixed excitation counter. It is possible to permanently stop the output of the excitation signal without applying the excitation signal for fixing after the fixed excitation is applied to. Therefore, according to such a structure, the operation | movement of the above-mentioned accessory can be stopped reliably reliably also at the time of emergency.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, a photosensor (not shown) is provided at a prescribed position, such as a storage position of a prize, to detect that the prize is stored, and a photosensor is provided at a prescribed position within a prescribed time. If a special item is not stored, the watchdog timer 4149 may be activated to interrupt the peripheral control MPU 4140 ah as an exception process of the watchdog timer 4149. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the interrupt, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the driver software 4146 to set the count flag to "3" for the driver IC 4147 for driving the motor for driving the accessory. With such a configuration, since the excitation signal to the motor is stopped, it is possible to suppress ignition due to heat generation of the motor.

  In addition, as a method of turning off the excitation for stopping the motor, for example, it can be mentioned that the driver software 4146 updating the excitation for each interrupt can secure the time for applying the fixed excitation, but Alternatively, instead of updating the excitation before one interrupt, for example, it may be fixed excitation. If it does in this way, it can control so that a motor may not move too much by inertia beyond the position which should be stopped.

  In the example described above, the reach development is performed based on moving the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position, but at least the forearm decoration is more than before moving the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position The present invention is not limited to the above as long as the effect display with a high degree of big hit expectation is executed after the entire body 3352 is moved to the appearance position.

[9. Projector production]
Next, projector effects executed during variable display will be described. In this example, by executing the 15R big hit gaming state using the second opening / closing member 2553 as the big hit gaming state, the number of winning balls is the largest among the multiple types of big hit gaming states, and for the player after the big hit gaming state ends By controlling to the most advantageous high-speed short-time state, the most advantageous state for the player is given. When the 15R (right) probability variable big hit is won, the projector unit 2150 is made to emit light from the variable display until the big hit gaming state ends. A predetermined image is projected to the player. Details will be described below.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a starts the variable display based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern indicating the 15R (right) probability variation big hit, derives and displays the jackpot symbol, and then displays the character. The character undresses and performs an effect that shows the cherry blossoms depicted on the character's shoulder. Further, the projector unit 2150 is caused to emit light in synchronization with the operation of taking off the clothes of the character to project an image similar to the cherry blossom snowstorm drawn on the shoulders of the character on the shoulders of the player.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a big hit start command instructing the start of the big hit gaming state from the main control MPU 4100a, the projector unit 2150 continuously emits light and projects an image similar to cherry blossom snow on both shoulders of the player. The effect during the big hit gaming state is executed. Then, the projector unit 2150 is turned off based on the reception of the big hit end command instructing the end of the big hit gaming state from the main control MPU 4100 a.

  In this way, when a big hit that is the most advantageous for the player (in this example, 15R (right) probable big hit), the same image as the cherry blossom snow is projected on both shoulders of the player during the fluctuation display, and during the big hit gaming state Because it continuously projects, it is possible to improve the gaming interest for the players with cherry blossoms projected, and to become the most advantageous big hit against third parties who are not playing with the gaming machine Can appeal and give a sense of superiority. In addition, it can be made to recognize that cherry blossoms snowflake is projected when it becomes the most advantageous big hit to a third party who does not play a game with the gaming machine, and has expectation for projection of cherry blossoms snowflake by the projector unit 2150. It is possible to play a game.

  In addition, since an image similar to the cherry blossom snow drawn on the shoulder of the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is projected on both shoulders of the player, it is possible to give an impression that the player himself has become a character, A player can be entertained by playing as a character.

  In the above-described example, the projector unit 2150 is caused to emit light and an image similar to the cherry blossom snow depicted on the shoulder of the character is projected on both shoulders of the player. For example, the same image as the character may be drawn by spraying the player with erasable ink.

[10. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 are disposed below the center character 2500. When a predetermined lottery result is selected by the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the lottery result is selected, and a predetermined region including two projection regions TR arranged in the vicinity where the player is seated. The projector unit 2150 corresponding to the projection area TR provided on each of the left and right sides of the big prize opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 in response to the detection of the object from the object detection means 2530 for detecting the player in the player. Right side decoration unit 200 for emitting and decorating the outer periphery of the glass plate 594 partitioning the front end of the game area 1100 at the same time as Left side framing unit 240, and causes lit off or reduced the emission decoration such as upper framing unit 280. The light of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 to the projection area TR is reflected to the game area 1100 in the projection area TR (part of the player's body), and then the game is performed with the transparent glass plate 594. It will be reflected to the patient side. At this time, the light emission decoration of each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 is turned off or reduced, and the light directly emitted to the player is reduced, and the inside of the game area 1100 is relatively dark. Therefore, the light (image) reflected to the player by the glass plate 594 of the door frame 5 after being projected from the projector unit 2150 to the light projection area TR and reflected by the light projection area TR becomes relatively strong. The image (light) reflected by the glass plate 594 from the player side becomes noticeable. The image reflected to the player side by the glass plate 594 is an image reflected by the glass plate 594 after being reflected by the light projection area TR as described above, and thus the light source when viewed from the player side A part of the player's body in the projection area TR illuminated by the projection of the image projected by the projector unit 2150 into the projection area TR and the image of the image projected on the glass plate 594 is not visible. Will be visible. Accordingly, when the projector unit 2150 is caused to emit light according to the gaming state, an image projected on the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and a part of the player's body are reflected. It is possible to show the player an effect completely different from the effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900, the movable decorative body, etc., and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and to perform the highly unexpected effect. It is possible to attract the player's interest strongly and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Further, as described above, when the projector unit 2150 emits light in accordance with the gaming state, a part of the player's body located in the projection area TR is reflected on the glass plate 594 and the projector unit 2150 is projected from the part The player sees what is reflected on the glass plate 594, so that the player thinks "What is it?" And pays attention within the projection area TR (part of his / her body on which the image is projected). Therefore, it becomes possible to notice the irradiation of light from the projector unit 2150. By recognizing the light emission of the projector unit 2150, it can be thought that something may be good, and a sense of expectation for the game It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the image is projected from the projector unit 2150 to a part of the player's body located in the projection area TR, the image projected on the player is moved by the movement of the player on which the image is projected. Since the range changes, and the portion on which the image is projected is not flat but three-dimensional, when the player moves, the appearance of the projected image changes and the image can be expanded or contracted. Even a single image can be changed in various ways, and it is possible to enjoy the degree of reflection of the image projected to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to decrease the interest.

  Furthermore, an image is projected from the projector unit 2150 to the projection area TR, and a person other than the player who plays a game on the pachinko machine 1 (a different player or a pachinko machine) is projected by projecting a relatively pinpoint image. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the light emission of the projector unit 2150 for the employees of the game hall where 1 is installed. That is, only the player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can notice the effect using the projector unit 2150, and the effect using the projector unit 2150 can be enjoyed without being noticed by other players. Since it is possible, a chance after the presentation by the projector unit 2150 that emits light according to the lottery result lottered by accepting a game ball to the first starting port 2101 or the like (for example, a state where the big prize opening 2103 can be accepted) Even if the game has not arrived (in the case of losing production), other players, etc. are not aware of the production, and the player can pretend to be calm, and even in the case of losing production, It can be enjoyed without hesitation, and it can be suppressed that the interest of the player in the game is reduced.

  In addition, the projection area TR is lower than the center in the vertical direction of the game area 1100, and when a player of a general height is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the head is lower than the head of the player. Becomes the projection area TR, and it is possible to suppress the light of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 from reaching the player's eyes directly as much as possible, and the player emits light by the light emission of the projector unit 2150. It is possible to prevent dazzling from feeling, and to suppress discomfort due to dazzling to lower interest.

  Further, since the projector unit 2150 is provided in the attacker unit 2100 disposed below the center of the game area 1100, even if the projector unit 2150 emits light at a position lower than the height of the player's eyes, It is possible to reduce as much as possible the light from the projector unit 2150 directly reaching the eyes of the player, and it is possible for the player to hardly notice. Therefore, the player can notice the light emission effect by the projector unit 2150 by viewing the image projected on the projection area TR, the image reflected on the glass plate 594, and the like, and the impact at the start of the effect can be realized. Since it is possible to strengthen the game, it is possible to enhance the unexpectedness of the light-emitting effect and strongly attract the player's interest, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, since the projector unit 2150 that projects an image onto the projection area TR corresponding to the position of the player detected by the object detection means 2530 is caused to emit light, the image (light) from the projector unit 2150 can be reliably transmitted to the specific area. The projector unit 2150 can project an image from the projector unit 2150 corresponding to the optimal position (projection region TR) according to the player's posture. It is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lowered by further enhancing the effect.

  Further, since the projector unit 2150 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the big prize opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100, the projector unit 2150 can be made inconspicuous, and the light of the projector unit 2150 can reach the player's eyes directly. In addition, when the projector unit 2150 is caused to emit light, even if the light from the projector unit 2150 is directly visible to the player, the player has the illusion that it is part of the light emitting decoration of the attacker unit 2100. It is possible to prevent the projector unit 2150 from directly recognizing the light emission effect, and to ensure that the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, since the object detecting means 2530 is provided in the center combination 2500 arranged in the approximate center in the game area 1100, it is arranged in front of the glass plate 594 (glass unit 590) including the projection area TR. The player (object) in the predetermined area (detection area) can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably detects the object in the predetermined area and reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained. Further, since the object detection means 2530 is provided in the center accessory 2500, the object detection means 2530 can be attached to a desired position simply by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1200, and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to simplify the labor involved in assembly and to suppress an increase in cost.

  Furthermore, after inserting the frame-shaped center character 2500 into the opening 1215 formed in the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, the back of the game panel 1200 can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the center character 2500. Since the liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed on the side, it is possible to allow the player side to fully view through the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 and the frame of the center character 2500, and the projector unit 2150 In addition, effects using the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be performed, and various effects can be presented to the player to make it hard to get bored, and the player can be entertained by various effects, It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. In addition, by performing effects with the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a normal state, it is possible to enhance the premium feeling with respect to effects by the projector unit 2150, and it is possible to further enhance the impact of effects by the projector unit 2150. It is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the player, and to suppress the player's interest from decreasing.

  In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 1200, and the projector unit is more likely to position the player's viewpoint on the rear side of the gaming panel 1200 in the production by the production image of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since the player's viewpoint can be positioned on the front side of the game panel 1200 (glass unit 590) in the effect by the light emission of 2150, the player's viewpoint is determined according to the device (projector unit 2150, liquid crystal display device 1900, etc.) used for the effect. The viewpoint can be changed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made hard to get tired by preventing the effect from becoming monotonous.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the arm unit base 3251 for rotatably supporting (pivoting) the base end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are in the storage position and the storage position, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are positioned above the liquid crystal display device 1900 together with the upper arm unit 3300 and can not be viewed from the player. In this state, when the upper arm unit 3300 is rotationally moved from the storage position to the appearance position by the upper arm drive motor 3254 according to the game state, the tip end of the upper arm unit 3300 is lowered to the front side of the liquid crystal display 3300 together with the forearm unit 3350. When the forearm unit 3350 is further rotated by the forearm drive motor 3307 from the storage position to the deployed position, the leading end of the forearm unit 3350 is rotated in the direction away from the upper arm unit 3300. It is possible to show the player such a movable effect that the arm unit 3250 extends in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the forearm unit 3350 is rotationally moved from the storage position to the unfolded position by the forearm drive motor 3307 according to the game state, the leading end side of the forearm unit 3350 will descend and appear on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, Furthermore, when the upper arm unit 3300 is rotationally moved from the storage position to the emerging position by the upper arm drive motor 3254, the upper arm unit 3300 descends and appears on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so as to push the forearm unit 3350. Therefore, it is possible to show the player such a movable effect that the upper arm unit 3300 and the entire forearm unit 3350 entirely change the form (shape) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, by the two upper arm units 3300 and the forearm units 3350 appearing on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the gaming state, it is possible to show the player a movable effect with unusual motion so far. As a result, it is possible to surprise the player and to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be separately rotated and driven by the independent upper arm drive motor 3254 and the forearm drive motor 3307, the entire form of the arm unit 3250 can be changed variously. It is possible to make it hard to get tired of the movement (movable effect) of the arm unit 3250 by providing the arm unit 3250 capable of attracting attention of the player and capable of various movements, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, a forearm unit 3350 that rotates about the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is further provided on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 that rotates about the proximal end side. In other words, since the arm unit 3250 having the two internodes is provided, the entire arm unit 3250 can express the part of the arm of a human being (such as a predetermined character) such as a human being or an animal. Can be realized, and the movement of the arm unit 3250 can be enjoyed.

  In addition, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are rotated and moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the gaming state, and the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blocked by the arm unit 3250. Therefore, the appearance (rotation) of the arm unit 3250 can be made conspicuous from the player, and it becomes possible to make the player pay attention to the decoration unit, so that the player can enjoy the movable effect by the arm unit 3250. Can be suppressed, and the arm unit 3250 can make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play.

  In addition, upper arm unit 3300 and forearm unit 3350 are disposed above liquid crystal display device 1900, and upper arm unit 3300 is placed on the front side of liquid crystal display device 1900 to drive it (moving effect). And so on, so that the load on the upper arm drive motor 3254, the forearm drive motor 3307, etc. is reduced by being supported by the gravity acting on the upper arm unit 3300 or the forearm unit 3350. In addition to being able to do this, the arm unit 3250 can be made to appear speedily by making the turning speed faster, and the impact at the time of appearance can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  Further, a forearm drive motor 3307 for rotationally driving the forearm unit 3350 is disposed on the proximal end side of the upper arm unit 3300, and rotation from the forearm drive motor 3307 is performed by the transmission rotating body 3311, the link member 3312, and the like. The forearm unit 3350 that is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is transmitted to the upper arm unit 3300, so that the forearm drive motor 3307 having a relatively heavy weight is disposed on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300. A rotational moment applied to (acting on) the dynamic shaft can be reduced as much as possible, and an increase in load on the upper arm drive motor 3254 can be suppressed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to enlarge the upper arm drive motor 3254 in order to make the upper arm drive motor 3254 strong, the space for arranging the upper arm unit 3300 is relatively easily secured, and the upper arm unit 3300 is made possible. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with an arm unit 3250 that can stand out. Further, since it is not necessary to use a component having high strength and rigidity as a component to make the upper arm drive motor 3254 and the like more durable, the cost for the upper arm drive motor 3254 and the like (pachinko machine 1) increases. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the forearm unit 3350 is provided with a transmission pin 3351b eccentric from the axis of the second shaft portion 3301b, and a transmission rotating body 3311 having a crank pin 3311b revolved by the forearm drive motor 3307, and cranks at both ends. Since a hook-like link member 3312 that supports the pin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b is provided, the hook-like link is rotated when the transmission rotating body 3311 is rotated by the forearm drive motor 3307 according to the gaming state. The crank pin 311b whose base end side of the member 3312 is pivotally connected revolves, and the transmission pin 3351b is pushed or pulled by the link member 3312 in accordance with the revolving direction of the crank pin 3311b. It will revolve and the forearm unit 3350 can be reliably rotated. .

  Further, the rotation of the transmission rotating body 3311 disposed on the proximal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is transmitted to the second shaft portion 3301b (the forearm unit 3350) on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 by the hook-shaped link member 3312. Since the elongated link member 3312 is arranged in the upper arm unit 3300, the rotation from the forearm drive motor 3254 is second compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted by a plurality of gears. The weight of the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting to the shaft portion 3301b (second rotation shaft 3351a) can be reduced, and an increase in load on the upper arm drive motor 3254 and the like can be prevented. Therefore, it is not necessary to make the upper frame rain rain motor 3254 or the like large and durable, and the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved.

  Further, in the upper arm unit 3300, a link axis line connecting the center of the crankpin 3311b to the center of the transmission pin 3351b with respect to the rotation center of the transmission rotor 3311 (upper side) ), And the crankpin 3311 b revolves only between the position where the link axis slightly revolves to the other side (downward) with respect to the rotation center of the transmission rotation body 3311, and the transmission rotation body 3311 The forearm unit 3350 is in the storage position when it is at a position slightly revolvable to the one side with respect to the center of rotation, so the forearm unit 3350 is in the storage position, that is, the crankpin 3311b is slightly to the one side In the state of the revolved position, the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 causes the link member 3312 to The direction of the force acting on the crank pin 3311 b acts in the direction of rotating the crank pin 3311 b further to one side (upward, counterclockwise direction in front view), but the crank pin 3311 b (transmission rotator 3311) Since the range of revolution is restricted by the slits 3311c so as not to revolve further to one side, the crank pin 3311b continues to stop at a position where it slightly revolves to one side without revolving. Therefore, when the forearm unit 3350 is in the retracted position, even if a rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 acts on the crankpin 3311b via the link member 3312, the crankpin 3311b does not revolve and the transmission rotating body 3311 does not rotate. That is, since the transmission rotation body 3311 can be locked (blocked) from rotating naturally, it is possible that the rotational driving force by the rotation moment acts on the rotation shaft of the forearm drive motor 3307 via the transmission rotation body 3311. It can be avoided. Therefore, there is no need to keep driving the forearm drive motor 3307 in order to maintain the forearm unit 3250 in the storage position, and the load on the forearm drive motor 3307 is reduced and the forearm drive motor 3307 etc. is damaged prematurely. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to breakage of the forearm driving motor 3307 etc. and to prevent the player's interest from being lowered by the interruption of the game. .

  Further, as described above, since the forearm unit 3350 can be maintained in the storage position without applying a load to the forearm drive motor 3307, it is necessary to use an expensive one provided with a brake mechanism as the forearm drive motor 3307. Instead, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the forearm drive motor 3307 (pachinko machine 1).

  Further, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are provided with a plurality of LEDs (upper arm decoration board 3305 and forearm decoration board 3353) that can emit light according to the game state. The upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs when the apparatus 1900 is rotated to the front side, so that the player can make the arm unit 3250 stand out from the player. The arm unit 3250 that can attract the player's interest can be obtained, and when the player pays attention to the arm unit 3250, the arm unit 3250 can surely produce a movable effect, a light effect, and the like. It can be entertained and it can prevent the player ’s interest from deteriorating. That.

  Also, the upper arm unit 3300 is attached to the translucent upper arm decorative body 3304 with three-dimensional decoration and the rear side of the upper arm decorative body 3304 and supports the transmission rotating body 3311, the link member 3312 and the like on the front side A light transmitting upper arm base 3301 and an upper arm decoration substrate 3305 attached to the back side of the upper arm base 3301 and provided with a plurality of LEDs are provided, and light from the LED is transmitted through the upper arm decoration 3304 Since the irradiation is performed to the user side, the entire upper arm unit 3300 can be brightly decorated to make the shape, decoration, etc. of the upper arm decorative body 3304 more visible, and the decorative effect by the upper arm unit 3300 can be further enhanced. At the same time, it is possible to make the upper arm unit 3300 stand out and attract the player's attention.

  Further, the upper arm decoration board 3305 having a plurality of LEDs is attached to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 that supports the upper arm decoration body 3304 from the rear side, and the upper arm decoration board 3305 (LED) is attached to the upper arm decoration body 3304. Since it is in a state as far away as possible, the upper arm decoration body 3304 can be irradiated with light irradiated from the LED toward the back side of the upper arm decoration body 3304 as much as possible. The 3304 can be illuminated and decorated uniformly without spots. That is, the upper arm unit 3300 can be beautifully decorated with light emission, so that the appearance of the upper arm unit 3300 can be improved, the decoration effect of the upper arm unit 3300 can be enhanced, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  Furthermore, since the link members 3312 and the like arranged on the front side of the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 have translucency, the light from the upper arm decorative substrate 3305 (LED) passes through the light transmitting portion to the upper arm. The decorative body 3304 can be irradiated well, and the upper arm decorative body 3304 can be beautifully illuminated.

  In addition, the game area 1100 includes a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 and a liquid crystal display device 1900 that displays an effect image that can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with an atmosphere similar to that of the machine, and it is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity to a player accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and this pachinko machine as a pachinko machine to play. The machine 1 can be made easy to select.

  The pachinko machine 1 described in the embodiment for carrying out the invention can be expressed as the following technical idea. In the following, the terms described in the mode for carrying out the invention will be described as a general concept, and the terms described in the mode for carrying out the invention will be described. The above-mentioned “terms described in the mode for carrying out the invention” corresponding to “terms conceptualized” are described in parentheses in order to associate “ However, once the above-mentioned "terms described in the form for carrying out the invention" corresponding to the "hyperconcepted terms" are described in parentheses once, they are omitted in the subsequent description in order to avoid duplicate descriptions. May have.

  A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to the present technical concept is a display having lottery means for performing lottery processing based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, and a display area where predetermined display effect is performed based on the result of the lottery processing. Means, a jackpot execution means for executing a jackpot game advantageous to the player when a specific display mode indicating that the result of the lottery processing is a specific result is displayed in the display area, and a predetermined standby Moving means for advancing specific display effects from the position to the front of the display area and giving an expectation of the display of the specific display mode in the display area in front of the display area, and the lottery process Based on the result of moving the movable means forward from the predetermined standby position to the front of the display area and performing a backup effect to boost the specific movable effect as a display effect Although it is made to advance the movable means forward of the display area based on the impact effect control means and the result of the lottery process, the movable body switching effect control means is adapted to change the display effect according to the movement of the effect movable means It is characterized by having.

  That is, for example, when a game ball is received at the start port (first start port 2101, second start port 2102) and the start condition is satisfied, a predetermined lottery process is performed. A display means (liquid crystal display device 1900) having a display area in which a predetermined display effect is performed based on the result of the lottery process (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is provided. In the case of a specific result (big hit), that is, when a specific display mode indicating that it is a big hit is displayed in the display area, a big hit game advantageous to the player is executed. Further, based on the result of the lottery process, the specific display mode is displayed in the display area by advancing to the front of the display area (display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900) from the predetermined standby position (that is, a big hit The movable means (upper front decoration 3406, upper arm decoration 3304 and forearm decoration) on which specific movable effects (see FIGS. 175 (e) and 219) can be given which can give an expectation of an image showing 3352). In this manner, when the movable means advances to the front of the display area to perform the specific movable effect, the specific movable effect is displayed in the display area of the display means so that the player's gaze is directed to the effect by the movable means rather than the display effect. A lively backup effect is performed (movable body impact effect control means). In addition, the movable means is always arranged at the initial position and is movable based on the result of the lottery process, and advances from the predetermined initial position to the front of the display means prior to the specific movable effect. Then, it passes through the front of the display means and moves to the standby position. At this time, in the display area of the display means, the mode of the display effect is switched in accordance with the movement of the movable means so that the player pays attention to the display effect in the display area rather than the movable effect by the movable means (movable body switching Production control means). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's gaze from being biased unilaterally to any one of the two effects of different tastes, and it is possible to mutually draw out the goodness of each of the effects, and it is possible to It becomes possible to perform an effect effectively. In addition, by switching the master-slave relationship between the movable effect by the movable means and the display effect in the display means according to the state of the game, the standby position passing through the front of the display means and the storage position are divided into a plurality of stages. It becomes possible to perform a series of movements by the movement of the movable means in a very natural manner without giving the player a sense of incongruity, even though the movable means passes in front of the display means.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, It applies to the pachislot machine, and the gaming machine formed by uniting a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 100 Door frame base unit 200 Right side decoration unit (outside decoration unit)
204 Side upper decoration member (decoration member)
214 Upper right side decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
214a LED
214b LED
214c LED
216 Right side lower decoration board (decoration board)
216a LED
216b LED
240 Left side decoration unit (outside decoration unit)
244 Side upper decorative member (decorative member)
254 Left side upper decorative board (decorative board)
254a LED
254b LED
256 Left side lower decoration board (decoration board)
256a LED
256b LED
280 Upper decoration unit (outer decoration unit)
281 Front decoration member (decoration member)
286 Upper decorative board (decorative board)
286a LED
286b LED
288 Bottom decorative member (decorative member)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1100 Game area 1110 Front component member 1200 Game panel 1210 Panel board 1215 Opening part 1220 Panel holder 1900 Liquid crystal display device 1901a-1901d 1st reservation display area 1902a-1902d 2nd reservation display area 2000 Table unit 2100 Attacker unit (acceptance unit)
2101 1st starting port (inlet)
2102 2nd starting port (receiving port, variable receiving port)
2103 Grand prize opening (reception entrance, variable entrance)
2104 General prize winning opening (reception)
2105 Movable piece 2106 Opening / closing member 2121 Start opening solenoid 2124 Attacher solenoid 2150 Projector unit (projector)
2150R Right projector unit 2150L Left projector unit 2152 Projector body 2156 Light source unit 2157 Lens group 2158 Image film 2500 Center object 2501 Window unit 2502 Flange unit 2503 Perimeter wall unit 2504 Warp inlet 2505 Warp outlet 2510 Stage 2514 Chance inlet 2515 Chance outlet 2530 Object detection Means 2531 Upper object sensor 2532 Left object sensor 2533 Right object sensor 2534 Lower object sensor 2550 Second attacker unit 2552 Second big prize opening 4141 Command analysis unit 4142 Scheduler control units 4143a to 4143d Schedule data 4146 Driver software 4147 Driver IC
4149 Watchdog timer TR Projection area (specific area)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that draws lots based on the establishment of start conditions,
A display device capable of performing an effect based on the result of the lottery;
A movable body capable of performing an effect based on the result of the lottery,
The movable body includes a first movable portion operable by a first drive source and a second movable portion operable by a second drive source.
The movable body is
From the initial position, the player moves a portion of the movable body to a first position where it can not be seen, and from the first position to a second position where at least a portion of the invisible portion can be seen at the first position. first operation and to work,
Player from the initial position is moved to the first position of invisible part of the movable body, capable of executing a second operation and returning to the initial position without operation from the first position to the second position And
The movable body is movable to the first position in a state where the first movable portion and the second movable portion overlap in the first operation and the second operation, and in the first operation, The operation to the second position is performed by operating the second movable portion in such a manner that the overlapping amount of the second movable portion decreases with respect to the first movable portion,
Production which the movable body is performed in the display device when in the second position, unlike the effect that the movable body is performed in the display device when in the first position,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second movable part is operable to move to the second position so as to overlap an area through which the movable body has passed when moving from the initial position to the first position. .